Home

AVR347 - Quality & Performance

1. 3 8 5 8 8 5 5 8 5 8 5 8 gt gt Y 5 2 z 9 _ tere 9 is 1451 1 l RN AAA N 22 faape
2. ea a 1 1 ae Ot PIETRA EVEN eT Un gt lt 110 3LOW3Y 310W33 E I c T I t 1 200 orm A E e 8 EN D 4 1 d 545 244 2 g s Ps 1 1
3. r E i M MUX_BO lt HD_BO 2 HD B1 D D_IP_DO E B1 0 gt MUXSB H i MUX B2 lt lt HD_B2 D B3 gt HD B3 D IP D2 B2 4 1 B3 9_ _03 gt gt MUX_B3 i KRA102S KRAT028 _ 4 lt 4 HD B4 155378 Baw 2903 0905 _ i 0926 oS xot xD E 5 gt B4 522554953 Tem 4 B5 0 iP 05 gt Mux_B5 1 TC7MZ4052FK 6908 R917 6 C lt 1 B6 672 9907 0902 ier gts KRC103S KRC103S KRCIOSE 87 gt 10 06 86 ars 1 7 07 gt MUX B7 I lt 1 ppc_sw2 lt
4. Remote IN OUT amp perd EO MOST AM eee CM43 9P 5 15 ane 4 EH BE lt JW93 a CUP11911 1 y 2n US MAIN B d 5 p Js PG sw900 e u gt gt D qmm 8 4 BLUE BLK RED BLK RED BULE S 090 0000 BN20 4P a UP11916 1 POWER TRANS o TUNER NIA DIGITAL BN98 8P T IN OUT B d GND e I Bedae m 4 CUP11913 3 4 D Mul i Room lt C CN21 7P USA Q Big Erate rest 022 CUPM916 4 mos v 822 1 4 4 lt 4 4 16 4 BN96 8P BN99 8P CN81 8P CN66 2P CNGI 2P CN64 2P CNO3 2P CN65 2P CN62 2P CN67 2P 8 87 2 86
5. C Zo C V e x 4 6 oe 1 7mm C A 4 H 4 DUAL 4 92 0 25 0 28mm i 66 2 Q 52 O O 1 a mj T O OO one ROG 8 5 rrr 8 5029 f s j gt OO a amo O gt OO 2 HUDSON_CL 9 1 _ 62CLK o 3 Hsync_60CLK e lt MN p 5 GND 307 0 5 NN R810 7 lt a B 6 43 3V i o x e P 7 C79 880 m Ast C5 NL 5 S RNQ7 Le sem Q D aR O O T J M CN80 100 harman kardon AVR347 248 0mm 199 0mm EN a x E
6. 1 1 1 1 1 1 OPTION JK81 CUP11910 5 PHONE JACK PCB JK81 CUP11910 7 EC quio C807 Oa i PHONE VID3or VID4 DIGITAL DOWNLOAD JACK PCB ET ob ala x 0 1uF 9 2 8 8 5 I JW86 M I o JW86 x 76 74HCUO4AFN X82 Y 076 74HCUOA4AFN N 1 1 a 5 Spi al 25 s 1 o 2 529 gt 1 1 ose m gt JW8 5 2 HSH2B018Z CWEB202150RV L SW97 o gt TEV 1 a H P MUTE 1 lt NJM4556AL e z s NJM 2 ee HS s a RE A y A NJM4556AL TO HUDSON ASS Y o z COAX_3 R CH L CH AVR247 345 347 m AVR145 132 144 146 OPTION 1 N86 r TT TAI Rase 77777 1 L_OUT R909 C875 R901 gt PWR MOMS SW PCB ds 1 pw Nc 4 o5 x C8
7. ONLY FAN USING FAN_H T H I gt 1 E DC PROTECTOR elx 5 5 5 tr 1 o 13 54 22 1 75 BT RAAT RATS 155 x VCC1 t sox SS x Sx S x eS 5 R634 R631 H 325 328228 SSX 135 2238 2259 2 8 tsx l e i ov JW96_1 g 2 2 2 BSN BSN OSS JK91 9 5630 18 1 4W 51230 i 25 2 2 18 1 4W 2SD2389P AVR132 144 1 BN7 5 252 228 e AVRI46 85 Eo 4 ae eee 4 ESR OVER 525 225 280 658 OVER QENT TT 17 2 CENTER 22 255 252 222 2 2SD2390 AVR145 245 252 553 A12686R 1360 656 0657 8524 C574 ffe R649 A amp NR147 247 R521 C571 ffe R646 225244 BN8 eat 1 e 28D2560 AVR345 347 e lt V R LEFT e e 225 470 680P 3 3 aos o t 470 680P 3 3 225 0501 9858 852 etr SL 0502 A12686R 0872 e A1268GR A1360Y gt ps E 2502590 2302539
8. C463 0 022u C464 I NJM2595M NJM2595M 42 NJM2595M NJM2595M 100 16 100 16 100 16 NJM2595M OPTION V MUTE LOW ACTIVE FUNC SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SWS VIDEO1 L H X X H VIDEO2 H L X L H VIDEO3 H H H H H V4 POD H H X L H DVD H H t H H Ole 5 6VX 12Vl 5VV 5VV Y 7 IC62 ud MC7809C MC7809C 162 Do not use 1 R636 1 Paap 100 16 0 047u C678 FROM POWER PCB HUDSON_INT1 gt HDMI_MUTE HDMI_MUTE_IN 3 HS RESET HS RESET HS lt 3 DEFINITION OF I2C REGISTER NJW1321 HS SDA C3 HS SDA 050 DA
9. NO DESCRIPTION PARTS NO Qty REMARK 1 ORNAMENT VOLUME CGU1A318Z 1 2 CAPVOLUME CGX1A338MBC63 1 3 HOLDERVOLUME CMH1A214 1 4 INDICATOR VOLUME CGL1A222 1 5 WINDOW ASS Y CGUAVR347 1 1 WINDOWFIP CGU1A399Y 1 2 BADGE MODEL CGB1A180Z 1 6 SHEET VOLUME CMZ2A090 1 7 FILTERFIP CMZ1A088 1 8 BDAGEHARMAN KARDON KGB1A158Z 1 9 PANEL FRONT CGW1A427RDRH43 1 10 BRACKET SIDE CMD2A443 1 1 KNOB FUNCTION CBT1A1028MBZG27 1 2 KNOB DISPLAY CBT1A1027K128 1 3 KNOBPOWER CBT1A1026MMZG27 1 4 INDICATORPOWER CGL1A258Z 1 15 KNOB MOMS CBC1A158MBZG27 1 6 BRACKET PCB CMK2A010 1 7 PLATESHIELD CMC1A302 1 8 BRACKET FAN CMD1A600 1 9 HOLDERLED CMH1A215 1 20 CMD1A209 3 21 CABINET TOP 5 1455467 1 22 CHASSIS BOTTOM CUA2A229 1 23 RUBBER CUSHION CHG1A360 4 24 FOOT CKL2A069H43 4 25 SUPPORT CUSHION CHG1A104Z 1 26 HEAT SINK CMY1A270 1 27 BRACKET PCB CMD1A417 2 28 HOLDER PCB CHE170 2 29 BRACKET TRANS CMD1A487 1 LARGER PARTS CHART gt 31 BRACKET PCB CMD1A570 1 32 BRACKET PCB CMD1A387 2 33 PANEL REAR CKF6A319Z 1 34 BUSHING AC CORD KHR1A028 1 35 CORD POWER CJA2A070Z 1 36 T
10. AV R345 247 34 Sr ECTION AVR247 34 7 OPTION XM gt XM_RST BN19 AVR145 1 2025 XM_TXD FROM INPUT gt DMP PCB x S XM_RXD 0401 1553567 iu DMP DET 0402 TX 1 5405 HVTKRC102S PC DMP_RX C401 9 HVDIN4003SRT a 3VC 238 RESET eye 5 QO MODE 5 5 l 8402 R403 B 1 549 0 Jo aT B I TX MODE a DETE
11. O 050 2 2 BUS FORMAT osb MSB LSB MSB LSB MSB LSB S or Storting Term HDMI IN S IBIT SLAVE ADDRESS BBIT A IBIT DATA BBIT DATA BBIT A BiT A Acknowledge Bit 1321_SDA P Ending Term SLAVE ADDRESS lt Slave Address BBIT MSB R NOT W Set the Write Mode or Read Mode 10801 INPUT lt gt 10801 INPUT OSD H 1 0 0 0 0 0 ADR IBIT R NOT W IBIT ADR Set the Slave Address by ADR terminal IPOD V SEL lt op v PM R NOT W O WRITE MODE ADR 0 1 ADR 0 Hex 94 h ADR 1 Hex 96 h CONTROL REGISTER TABLE R NOT W 0 READ MODE ADR 0 1 ADR 0 Hex 95 h ADR 1 Hex 97 h WRITE MODE BIT PS POWER SAVE 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 gt PS 1 POWER SAVE ON MUTE PS O POWER SAVE OFF OUT ON DATA 1 PSI PS2 0972 OUT OUTPUT 7 DATA 2 AUXO AUX AUX2 AUXS AUX AUXILIARY CONTROL SIGNAL QUTPUT F VID OUT gt READ MODE BIT SvID_Y_ouT gt 07 06 05 04 03 02 D1 00 DATA PORTO PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 PORT LONBUF TQ FLIS125 9 ANALOG OUTPUT sw gt COMP Y OUT PR OUT gt COMP PB OUT gt 9 5 MON VID OUT CVBS IN 5 lt CHROMA IN MON Y OUT ee FROM ADV7322
12. 1 313 1v8 C78 HVINJM23910L133 1079 CS495 VDDIO 8EA CS495 VDD 1 5 H 5VD 5VD 1V8 2 lt 85 2 lt 2 5 3525 amp GHZ 1 s J 5 s 8 8 8 519 5 8 5 2 519 5 9 5 8 3 amp 3 8 s 94 8 S 5 8 1 N L703 5 8 HLZ9Z014Z als eye sls 51512 2 els 2 2 sls 8 702 5 8 8 8 8 886838818 8 88 88 58 88 s 3 8 8 8 8 88 e 0704 0705 HLZSZOMI IN4003SRTIN4003ST l C768 1 L701 1 HLZ920142 H C769 OPT OUT gt e 1 E did N oZ s COAX4 lt aum meo m credas mie NA EEA pcr CN ce yaqa p ca mcm Sm Ge Co Ch m Gm lo o de era ka aid mm e a im sm im em i q 525 3 805 822 892 5 E H c770 Sm e 8 55 3 5 31 9 S 2 e 5 5 gt n AMEN c771 1 1 C AKRESET H 1 C772 e DSPDATA I oi gt 1 gt D OUT gt SCP1_BSY 3 o e i 771 DSPCLK 4 gt SCP 1 5 1 5 1 cs 1 OPTION COUNTERMEASUER gt SC
13. 77 76 0 95 9 0751 JK75 Cw R750 C750 a lm D lt E n pu CUPIISIS 1 DO CUP11916 CUP11916 1 gt VR86 Se VR87 05 4766 e A 2 rmm 6 147 247 347 b 18 lt 230 144 CENTER BAR CUP 11916 2 GES CENTER BAR 777 CUP11916 1 y um n E plone 2 harman Fro C908 CUP11916 6 boot C9484 H amp P1 2490950 D 120 R94 N22 1 168 0mm 2 A e c5 e 1 e e 1 d 4701 lt 0 9 07 0999 c9708 CUPIIS16 2 890 gt 51 CEN CH 27578 ONLY VR89 _092 2 9 eia CUP11916 7 dis us 04 ii 9 9 gt 6006000006060
14. 98 AVR347 harman kardon 222 0mm We F 2 201 908 9 gt 7 7 Vr 4 Y JK92 N N 4 45 NS 4 o m i Coane ail PN 5050 500 R951 R952CN61 og 16 RI 04 fills eim j e 9091 _ 7 35 70 I 07 ae 90 i Em qe dy eo ee eo ONO wA L Te ar ed M C92 5 3 8e9 0883 E M ff P C957 2 es e O O C976 Dio pu L5 dne gt O Q s 2 295 22 2 TN Z I Hi 307 mS us m T 86 H Haa 4 C872 RB32 e p t missa gt 2 00991 I 7 nua yi J fey bot 7 844 4 S AVR347 harman kardon m
15. TIPS TES E i STEREO ui ol 2 12v 8CH Len ee n is P Peel 42 N TUNER L a 8C Rch TUNER R E lt z ae MPX_OUT 5 5 5 5 lt S p R219 s n AVR345 347 MULTI A BUS 100 2 wo o a 7292 5 STR 1 cid 120 EY gt MULTI_LCH R220 BCH R m 12 IC36 780 199 xola MULTI_PRE_R MULTI_RCH 2259 85 0221 184005 ak 04 R221 BCH SL 225 875 SLch 278 278 u 1159 LATCH 5 5 ATS 1159 CLK 1159 DATA gt cis dik BCHOS 8v 12V R222 8CH SR 1 8C SRch 637 A7908A MULTI_MUTE2 CJP12GAT5ZY 100 am ABUS IR 325125 4 gt X a o N F 227 5 ee tikes 0214 155355 ale ole e SwE 8C Cch 395 85 45 6VC 5VD 12V 12 100 p 2 gt 53 5 N a N gt R24 7 8CH SUB BCHOB 8CH SUB IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICS c5 eS STA COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK HAVE SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS ms 4 senos E THESE COMPONENTS 8CH SBL 2 7 MPORTANT FOR SAFETY WHEN REPLACING ANY OF TH Co 100 2258 5 USE ONLY MANUFACTURER S SPECIFIED PARTS 1874 ask 5215 Lr ges TR 8CH07 THE UNIT OF RESISTANCE IS OHM 8226 77 ae BCH SBR 8CH SBR K 1000 OHM M 1000 KOH
16. LC11030 1 8 AVR347 harman kardon 74 4 INPUT AND OUTPUT EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT PIN DESCRIPTION PINNo SYMBOL NAME AND FUNCTION 1Ato 6A Data Inputs 7 GND Ground 0 14 Postive Supply Voltage TRUTH TABLE 13 2 4 rx m 1Yto6Y Data Outputs 7 14 5 08490 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS Supply Voltage 0 5 to 7 lo DC Output Current Om Absolute Maximum Ratings are those values beyond which damage to the device may occur Functional operation under these conditions is not implied RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS Supply Voltage 4 5 to 5 5 Input Voltage ____ Vv _ Vo Output Voltage C EE Operating Temperature 55 to 125 dt dv Input Rise and Fall Time Vcc 4 5 to 5 5V note 1 1 Vin from 0 8V to 2 0V q 2 8 194 AVR347 O CIRRUS LOGIC Leading the Digital Entertainment Revolution m harman kardon 114 dB 192 kHz 8 Ch Codec with S PDIF Receiver Features e Eight 24 bit D A two 24 bit A D Converters 114 dB DAC 114 dB ADC Dynamic Range 100 dB THD N e System Sampling Rates up to 192 kHz e S PDIF Receiver Compatible with EIAJ CP1201 and IEC 60958 e Recovered S PDIF Clock or System Clock Selection 8 2 S PDIF Input MUX e ADC High pass Filter for DC Offset Calibration e Expandable ADC Channe
17. Outputs TRUTH TABLE OUTPUTS FUNCTION CLEAR PRESET X Don t Care 2 11 ky 182 AVR347 ANALOG DEVICES harman kardon Multiformat 11 Bit HDTV Video Encoder ADV7322 FEATURES High definition input formats 16 24 bit 4 2 2 4 4 4 parallel YCrCb Fully compliant with SMPTE 274M 1080i 1080p 74 25 MHz SMPTE 296M 720p SMPTE 240M 1035i RGB in 3 x 8 bit 4 4 4 input format HDTV RGB supported RGB RGBHV Other high definition formats using async timing mode Enhanced definition input formats 8 16 24 bit 4 2 2 4 4 4 parallel YCrCb SMPTE 293M 525p BTA T 1004 EDTV2 525p ITU R BT 1358 625p 525p ITU R BT 1362 625p 525p RGB in 3 x 8 bit 4 4 4 input format Standard definition input formats CCIR 656 4 2 2 8 bit or 16 bit parallel input High definition output formats YPrPb HDTV EIA 770 3 RGB RGBHV CGMS A 720 10801 Enhanced definition output formats Macrovision Rev 1 2 525p 625p CGMS A 525p 625p YPrPb progressive scan EIA 770 1 EIA 770 2 RGB RGBHV Standard definition output formats Composite NTSC M N Composite PAL M N B D G H I PAL 60 SMPTE 170M NTSC compatible composite video ITU R BT 470 PAL compatible composite video S video Y C EuroScart RGB Component YPrPb Betacam MII SMPTE EBU N10 Macrovision Rev 7 1 L1 CGMS WSS Closed captioning Rev PrA Information furnished by Analog Devices is believed to be accurate and
18. Z 2222222247 D SBL D SBR HDMI MCLK XM DAT E HDMI SCLK XM LRCK x Cu UT 5 HDMI LRCK 4 4 5 4 XM BICK O lt lt lt a a lt lt a 24 576MHz E o Ele elel N HDMI SD HDMI_SPDIF 23 2 2 2 2 51515555555 gt 19031 1 z Pores E AE USA VER ONLY mg AIR CS42528 5 i a o 5 A D D A CONVERTER WITH DIR i 5 al gt 5 7 MUX IN V4 FROM FRONT EFT I ee HFC4053 5 DMP CVBS HDMI SCLK HDMI LRCK HDMI SD i O NM HUDSON gt CLKIN e ag TS 8125 DIGITAL VIDEO 555585 4 CONT LINE2 DIN RMCK gt XMCK 2222 2 z v3 MAX 720P vs uu T CVBS CARR OUT e RDATA CMPDAT Bou CVBS ADDRESS amp DATA 2 8M 1 DVD A 5 0 Y MULTI IR IN e POUT RLRCK CMPREQ RN S I S VID DAOMCLK Q I Y HUDSON IN REMOTE OUT lt NJM2595 2 1 Cb HUDSON IN ERI see 6dBDRV Cr HUDSON IN NJM2566 CS49510 NE 5 REMOTE IN e gt 1 DIR CONT V CONVERSION l orca ge COMPOSITE INPUT
19. 872 V N oT IPPING ad o D f NS eme N 7 T NE jJ 28 s Q SQ 7 ind SN D Bier TET BAD oan u zu C gt D D N M U N eee M N N AVRIA 145 146 147 245 247 USA 58 6 250V JK98 132 230 2 O EUR T 4A L 250v 2 9A L 250V AVR245 23 30 EUR T 6 3A L 250V 5 0 3 5 MOMS S W Sie 6 1 0199 9090 OF m C992 m He 5 x 3 e W96 ZA 2492 AVRI45 ONLY TTENTION 2 2 AFIN D ASSURER U e io PROTECTION PERMANENTE FL SBRE 2 3 8 090 CONTRELES RISQUES E 2 5 73 8909 S NCENDIE RISQUES s e e ONLY 9 e e z 9 2 4 SS 3 8 9 07 1 C gt 2 1 2 e 0 2 1126 Z es 5 ye 2 5932 0992
20. QN 5 22246 o O m m 29 X x lt x lt x wn lt ro A gt E 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 CX SDIN1 1 48 RXP1 GPO1 CX SCLK 2 47 RXP2 GPO2 CX_LRCK 3 46 RXP3 GPO3 VD 4 45 4 4 5 44 RXP5 GPO5 6 43 RXP6 GPO6 SCL CCLK 7 42 RXP7 GPO7 SDA CDOUT 8 CS42528 41 VARX AD1 CDIN 9 40 AGND ADO CS 10 39 LPFLT INT 111 38 MUTEC RST 12 37 AOUTA1 AINR 13 36 AOUTA1 AINR 14 35 AOUTB1 AINL 15 34 AOUTB1 AINL 16 33 AOUTA2 17 18 19 2021 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 4 2 lt oO amp aa gt see Z m d Ee SESS 25555555 lt 2 lt lt lt lt lt lt XR Pin Name Pin Description CX_SDIN1 1 Codec Serial Audio Data Input Input Input for two s complement serial audio data CX SDIN2 64 CX SDIN3 63 CX SDIN4 62 CX_SCLK 2 CODEC Serial Clock Input Output Serial clock for the CODEC serial audio interface CX_LRCK 3 CODEC Left Right Clock nput Output Determines which channel Left or Right is currently active on the CODEC serial audio data line VD 4 Digital Power Input Positive power supply for the digital section 51 DGND 5 Digital Ground Input Ground reference Should be connected to digital ground 52 VLC Control Port Power n
21. 12 12 1 MUX GO lt t 0904 HD GO KRC103S 4 G1 gt MUX G1 C H e MUX_G2 4 1 HD G2 gt gt D_IP_D10 G2 1695 gt MUX 63 1 AT24CO2N IP pn gt ue MUX G4 lt lt G4 l 1 65 gt D_IP_D12 G4 i I e G50_IP_p13 65 i _66 lt JHD_G6 gt gt 1 e 7 gt lt 10 014 G6 193 G7 D_IP_D15 gt _67 228 SSE ESE IC96 R921 R941 E 5 TC7MZ4052FK 5808 Add lt 0 P Mux L W uPA672T l designed as same length g 1 1 1 2 m MUX_RO HD_RO 1 v HD R1 IP 016 1 gt 10k 1 R1 _07 gt gt RI ko 1 687 l MUX_R2 lt HD_R2 1 9 AT24CO2N e HD_R3 D_IP_D18 R2 I a SSK 5 R3 D iP 09 gt gt MUX R3 1 1 MUX_R4 lt HD_R4 bottom layer is possible hii DOES BRA 1 5 021 gt _ gt MUX_R5 i MUX_R6 lt lt e R7 gt lt D IP D22R6 E Er D aM
22. REN NEUEN E DETENER RUM CS EZ E EOS SEE SESS SES SES mimi mi m m m m m T m eS s s 5 E 9 c CO lt Gei mo PE EX 2 Rev 1 20 harman kardon EGA SEGA 1 SEGA 1 SEGA 1 SEGA 1 SEGA 1 SEGA 2 SEGA 2 EGA 2 EGA 2 2 2 EGA 2 EGA 203 ee CHS7CH ANR347 ANODE CONNECTIO SEGB SEGB SEGB SEGB SEGB SEGB SEGB 1 SEGB1 SEGBI1 SEGB1 SEGBI1 SEGB 1 SEGB 1 SEGB 1 SEGB 1 SEGB2 SEGB2 SEGB2 SEGB2 SEGB2 SEGB 2 SEGB3 SEGB SEGB 3 SEGB 3 SEGB 3 AVR347 TRANSISTOR REGULATOR IC BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 Emitter 2 Collector 3 Base 1 Emitter 2 Collector GND INPUT harman kardon 1 Emitter 2 Collector 3 Base n 3 Base 123 OUTPUT 123 123 123 KTC2874B KRA107M KRA104MT 1267 KSC2785Y KRC107M KRC104M KTD1302T KTA1024Y KTC3200GR KTA1271Y KTA1268GR KSC2316Y KTC3198Y KSA1175YT MCNJM7905 MC7915C L7905 L7915 1 Emitter 2 Collector 1 Emitter 2 Base INPUT GND OUTPUT 1 Base 2 Collector 3 Base 3 Collector 3 Emitter 123 123 123 2 3 2581560 2502390 25 1360 2581647 2502560 25
23. Figure 85 Select a Surround Mode Remote You are now ready to enjoy the best in home theater entertainment with your AVR 347 As you become more familiar with the receiver you may wish to explore some of its advanced functions which are described in the following section SURROUND Figure 86 Surround Setup Menu Screen AVR347 harman kardon TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE SYMPTOM Unit does not function when Main Power Switch is pushed Display lights but no sound or picture No sound from any speaker light around power switch is red No sound from surround or center speakers Unit does not respond to remote commands Intermittent buzzing in tuner Letters flash in the channel indicator display and digital audio stops ourround Back Speaker settings cannot be accessed and test tone does not play through Surround Back Speakers The XM Preview Channel 001 5 silent Unable to activate Program mode on remote Unable to assign a device to HDMI 1 or 2 selectors Remote behaves erratically CAUSE e No AC Power e ntermittent input connections e Mute is on e Volume control is down e Amplifier is in protection mode due to possible short e Amplifier is in protection mode due to internal problems e ncorrect surround mode e nput is monaural e ncorrect configuration e Stereo or Mono program material e Weak batteries in remote e Wrong device selected e
24. 4190 1 1 Z 3 1 1 88N2 LI Te a oy ate ahah REP eR RAR ERE ERE OSEE MIU j Mae DAL as Me sy Se qa at e Ti 1 1 1 LEEREN ey Ne eed tela aes tee ee tee eens ee eine Aer yeh 1 1 1 i MED 1 1 I c S lt 2 1 z DIO 1 1 al gt gt gt oja 5 1 SERO 1 1 gt 25 H e 1 1 gt e 1 5 gt a 5 1 1 1 al 5 gt q 1 ae 9 0001 l 5 c 1 wg us lt Sant 2 1 1 I 91 00 91 001 1 91 001 H e s 1 oN gt Be 1 1 52 LC do 5060 9069 4069 8062 1 1 1 gt uj lt nzz0 0 A0S gt lt d nZZ0 0 ZLU0 A08 1 LOG AGC 0000 000 1 ti Se 1 1 1 91 0089 43 4 H icd l HHH gt n
25. Dri oo sas Po DIODE BRIDOE 1 Lo 2 22 __ Resistors o 82 AVR347 harman kardon Ref NEA Number Description ty GC t BOWER TRANS a a ea O ee ___________ 219 HEAT SINK BRIDGE DIODE HEAT SINK 1 SCREW 1 ICMYiA219 HEATSINK BRIDGE DIODE HEATSINK 1 EA ai VIDEO PCB CUP11918 1 j p uacua Capacitors po T 22 22 a 83 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator _ PartNumber Description ee C anf eee Eee cet ot mue sw _ j ee Semiconductors E JM Resistors es 84 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator Part Number Description ee C E eee See ce 1 so s 221 j j Miscellaneous _____ puse REMOTE IN OUT PCB CUP11849 12 Eu e Lp 85 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator PartNumber Descipion 10 _ tt NE REMOTE WO eee PCB T 1848 12 12 oa TRANSISTOR ENE rr
26. o D m Clock doubler 32 bits SRL TF Port 0 Port 1 Watchdog Timer WDT Special timer for CLOCK 16 KB RAM 256 KB FLASH Port 2 Port 3 Port 6 CSAWAIT Port Controller 4 BLOCK E PROM Interrupt E x COH Olti 46 Bit Timer TMRBO 16 Bit Timer TMRB1 4 KB BOOT ROM harman kardon T5CC1 DVCC 3 DVSS 3 X1 gt 2 gt EMUO gt EMU1 XT1 P96 XT2 P97 RESET AMO AM1 gt ALE 00 to P07 ADO to AD7 P10 to P17 AD8 A8 to AD15 A15 P20 to P27 0 A16 to A7 A23 RD P30 WR P31 HWR P32 BUSRQ P34 BUSAK P35 R W P36 BOOT P37 SCOUT P64 P65 P66 gt to P40 to P43 CS0 to CS3 WAIT P33 NMI INTO P64 INT1 to INT4 PAO to PAS BOINO INT5 P80 gt 6 P81 __ gt TBOOUTO P82 TBOOUT1 P83 gt TB1INO INT7 P84 gt TRAIN TINTS P85 TB1OUTO P86 TB10UT1 P87 Initial function after reset Figure 1 1 T5CC1 Block Diagram 165 AVR347 harman kardon T5CC1 2 Pin Assignment and Pin Functions The assignment of input output pins for the T5CC1 their names and functions are as follows 2 1 Pin Assignment Diagram Figure 2 1 1 shows the pin assignment of the T5CCI 84 Penso 83 P60 SCK 2 P43 CS3 42 52 P41 CS1
27. 11 VDD18 SC e c a lanee CART ONT CD em p Og 093 LUE 1 8_H_A gt ca 5 Ore SOOO ORS oOo 66 MX PPWR GND18 SC cn gt gt gt gt cic ce 1 lt 3 3RPLL HI 8 1 lt lt gt 0 Cy PBIAS 92 CX 8 OOO BG 5060606060 56868 steletats C804 j 2 1815 dH 2 81 812 813 I 5 4 4 e 3 4 4 lt 1 1814 gt 55 33V 6804 10k LL EL M 1 B73 8 2 gt 53 RESET gt e 1805 Li 1 J 1807 5 TACT SW WILL BE ADDED BY i lh l 5 4 E 43 5VVI 3 3VVI 1 8VV1 v a HVINJM23910L125 Lane mo RS sw EV e 3 3v_A_SC esx 524 1835 He 049 Soler S 5 gt Lam 858 25 20 525505 SWS BAS 505 2 zs 2 5 elg n toy e 1 e e 1 8 z rnm 43 3VVI zi L805 o se U x 4 2 5 5 1804 w ST202EBW 5VV M M 1817 7 7 M r c NAR REVISION 2 4 6 525 gre gt 1
28. 5345 247 34 D ESIGN CH ECK APP ROV DRAWING NO M S K Water H W L 07 01 18 07 01 18 07 01 18 DSP AVR347 harman kardon day HPL OUT zi v C389 R381 e
29. 012 0014 DAG DAN 003 0012 DA4 POP X CP ADSGPOS 55 50 AS EXT 5 O 05 amp gt 26 2 GNDIO4 bay gt 9 Ag 006 0 14 3V3 755 000 00020763 3 3 Y YY VY pue 3 ENNO P M 0013 DAS 12 _ 004 7 DA3 AD LIN b ze 4 D E 005 DAIS DAI3 005 DA2 x 5 4 GND7 22 gt 5 5 s 6799 2 952 5952 0225 5 5 02 _ NC 0012 DA4 vssQ 550 lt 8 555 XTAL OUT 55 1 75 50 9 9 ADB 9 s S 5 5 100 XTIN RN80 AD9 z z o 2 A na 2 Be 24 E 334 5 004 DA12 DAI vas A 5 oos DAI z 8 8 5 51975 5 e o5 SD_AN EXT_A10 8 5 5 5 gta 18 R768 R767 SD AIZEXT Att z 0415 007 e 008 DAO 5 5 as fas Yo is Yo de 7 de 05 4 680 S877 4 GWA o6 2 gt s ip ors 5 gt 64 o L5 56K 300 9 2 2 50 22 fe RZ ELA va eo Hum ESI EU 777777 2 NC E Tas gt 5 ss 25085 f 5 C760 2 2 C762 E 2 7 NO 1 E C736 Fir 62 CX_SDIN4 L704 w 5 NC 003 DATI 11 LDQM c 19 lt gt 6 o o VDDA SD CLKN R739 507 gt 504 5
30. 1 5 ee 6 E 5 FOR USING FAN C2785Y E FR scie Jt 2 5 1 W 14 soos 45V AVR345 347 ONLY antata emas uzak ora ae 51600 e gt JW90 JW91 ALL MODELS 18 1 4W 1 r 5 5 SBR 569 sox 2x gt gt rSo 1 257 OVER 1 28 1 Se 0817 1 9877 080 51606 e RB73 AI268GR 47 R819 A 55 8 N 470 680P 39 NDA 825 5 53 1 lt 12V 15V H 2SD2390 i RON on zz e m Pn kD Be co e poro rA Ope cp uera act TI 1 Wh RY94 d 0814 68 155153 AVR245 345 247 347 OPTION moni R807 255 A12686R 0802 z bL 2 5525 5551 ee C2785Y e 1852 e 2 a Ls AVR245 345 247 347 PART 15 i 2285 28 210 1 STR 278 ahs gle 1 in c 72 cq qL MULTI_IR Pits ses 2 5 ABUS n SBR cals i MN R612 oen STs F901 6 3A USA 9 9 0953 e AVR145 245 144 146 147 carr our 1 568 10 50V P RPM 0 5 e MUTE_POWER 4 e 0 7V F901 KBA2CBOOOTLEY USA lt gt 0821 0822 gt x 155133 Rl gt AVR247 347 8 M 2 6 av l MULTI_ C3200GR a M
31. o o o o o o o o o XD 90000000 Se OO 9 66 33 2 3 GD 2 00 000 0 00 30 09 o OOOO Remove the Screws 3 Removing the Rear Panel Remove the Screws 4 Removing the Main PCB CD D AVR347 1 Removing the Top Cabinet Remove the Screws DISASSEMBLY 2 Removing the Front Panel 43 0 49 Remove the Screws AVR347 harman kardon AVR347 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 1 TOP CABINET 21 REMOVAL 1 Remove 13 screws 51 57 and then remove the Top cabinet FRONT PANEL ASS Y REMOVAL Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 Disconnect the card cable between
32. 1 I lt NI LI 1 si 3 ate l i a EE a I o I Tenn lt b D gt 06 C I lt 23 o LO e lt SEC S i N 5 NS 5 O a ree i tO 1 LO xr T ws OO iM ES lt 1 e e 1 i i Pe gt 215 l l I 1 gt ae s e 1 lt ao c D T gt Sz i lt 1 LO 2 lt 1 a5 I 1 1 lt lt I 92 Cr n 1464 1 l l 25 5488 i gt e CY gt 11 0268 691581 e 4096 i lt 1 l gt 11 0 69 A lt i 5 S a 1 DICTI VV aces m m I 1 5 Si gt 375 _1 1 1 1 1 l l 2 1 I Lu 1 1 Y 1 042 042 1 1 E 3 e oaa s S168 Q C 8582 1 5 2 V gt 4 A0S 01 1 105 01 5 gt
33. gt ADC_CLAMP A15 3v ass L _ R833 10 Gipson d taav AVDQ_ADC 2 2 22222222 55 I 5 E OE C885 0 tu REND gt gt gt gt 7 gt VEG gt gt 7 gt 7 RVDD_3 3 262 4 5 HD R2 gt E ROM_SDI ROM_WEN 225 101 rame P_BLANK seio x Eo we ROM 500 16 LH Do P_VSYNC A cae ROM_SCLK A17 2 58 4 CLK ADD Connection Red DATA Input um 53 is PP REYNE R817 C832 GNDS ROM_SCSN ROM_CSN SPI_H_CS DV7322 SCLK PR 1 8 HD_R4 S4 19 8 RNB6 20 5 DCLK HD R5 R818 C833 lt gt Dvs s 1 19 COMP_Y M E BIP DHS 7 57 8895 43K 6 2 500 CNDS _ 7 Reig C834 DEN e RB32 B 19 n2 wes PR Gu 522 L GND 10 3 3V_A_A 20 B7 3 ADD Connection i DO NOT MOVE AAD Lom 2816 6831 AVDD_A B6 VEU Mu Re 2v5DD AN 576 BS B4 1 r1 E CNBI CNDS CRVSS gt 2 CDVV_1 8 3 4 A AVDD_OUT_LV_33 e ss Blue DATA E ind 5 s AVSS OUT LV 849 BM FLI8125 E 83 du CIS i Pewee ANALOG INPUT 3 cap i E 2 AVDD B 81 gt HD 1 D 62 a 2 Vey C835 R820 C83
34. a IE MX Ree _023 gt TERT EW LL MUX_R7 3 3K 1 v T 1 R933 1 BVV 5 2 Gee 3 3K 1 Y 455 1 100 i 1 55 e C980 spyt0u 16V gt a 2 C936 E 2 9 23 3 ed 0 0tu 26 92 MUX_CLK lt 8 8 g g E 8899 4 2 2 HSYNC_62CLK D IP CLK 554 D_IP_HS gt MUX_HS BS L901 gt l m 5452 ats MUX_VS lt lt H VS 1 nd 005 9225 1 T z 1 1 T H DE gt C D IP VS ele 25 249 2 lo 525 5 28 5 87053 op ys D IP DE gt 2 MUX DE 8 8 8 2 HS re S 1 gt S lt 0 P MUX R909 100 22 gt D_IP_DE gt R910 100 0 gt gt OO lt O o m gt O oe BO gt D IP DO 5ooul xg u0dozzuujuzucrooOcoooOLrtoOzuuzoooz Bl piP EOE TTE E E E EEE EE A 4 CKOAGZFA HNSOOSSONSGZECOZLOCZONLOSSSO 0 9 9 lt 5 gt lt lt B2 gt MOON iOS gt 0 _ 2 858zz9g2zssgtc x ae BS 5p pos xx x x x xd 4 lt B4 1 8VV 2233323322323 M_SDATA t T AGND a C93 gt D_IP_D4 v JUL L U CM sik H UU UU H d lt 1 HOMI_TX_RST
35. gt BUSAK P35 8 Bit Timer a m TA1OUT P71 1 lt gt RW P36 16 l BOOT P37 amp Bit Timer I SCOUT P64 P65 P66 TMRA2 gt PA4 to m 8 Bit Timer TA3OUT P72 TMRA3 P40 to P43 ose FLASH Controller c50 to C33 8 Bit Timer 4 BLOCK WAT TAAIN P73 TMRA4 E PROM WAIT P33 8 Bit Ti Interrupt NMI TASGUT 74 TMRAS to Bit Timer IET LBOINOINT 260 8 Bit Timer 16 Bit Timer lt gt TBOINT INT6 P81 TMRA6 TMRBO TBOOUTO P82 TBOOUT1 P83 TA7OUT 75 lt 4 Crime IET TB1IN0INT7 P84 16 Bit Timer lt TB1IN1 INT8 P85 1 M TB4OUTO P86 164 TB1OUT1 P87 Initial function after reset AVR347 ADTRG P53 ANO to P50 to P57 AVCC AVSS VREFH VREFL TXDO P90 RXDO P91 SCLKO CTSO 92 TXD1 P93 RXD1 P94 SCLK1 CTS1 P95 SCK P60 SO SDA P61 SI SCL P62 TAOIN P70 lt TA1OUT P71 TA3OUT P72 P73 TASOUT 74 4 3 TA7OUT P75 10 Bit 8CH AD Converter SIO UART IrDA 5100 SIO UART SIO1 Serial Bus 7 interface SBI TMRAO 8 Bit Timer TMRA1 8 Bit Timer 8 Bit Timer TMRA2 8 Bit Timer TMRA3 8 Bit Timer 4 8 Bit Timer 5 8 Bit Timer TMRA6 8 Bit Timer TMRA7
36. 2 ee Miscellaneous DOCERE INPUT CUP11913 1 pL Capacitors 02 f f j ee a 57 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Ref Designator Number Description 24 22 INPUT INPUT PCB i 1 55883 o oe oae cii ks 58 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Ref Designator Number Description INPUT INPUT PCB Gi 1 es sss s 59 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator Number Description J ee E enn INPUT PCB INPUT POS UPTON 1 msn oma oae cei 60 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator Part Number Description ee INPUT ee 1 a ce ena oa 61 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator Part Number Description y OJS ee E enn INPUT eae 1 ee ont oat s a ee ae Semiconductors ee NS ea 62 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator PartNumber Description E usu INPUT 1 L B BURL OF RW i Lu Resistors o G T T i lt ____ ae I N61 CRJ104DJIO3T lt lt RES 4ARRAY 1608 2 1 6 4 1 EA 1040 103 lt lt RES 4ARRAY 1608 2 608 4 1
37. DAI DATA 27 CSW_ERR 50 015 EXT 07 50 DO EXT 08 EXT SD D1 GPIO25 CSW BIRQ 34 Figure 23 144 Pin L QFP Package Pinout 140 FLU TSILTELISILTETLIETETSTLILT ES lt x i o 44 o do ui x lt v t t 4 k 88 88 55584 554 5 gj GU 00960 alk xk 4 lt ad as e ME lt ee e rp 8272 55 59 5884 e p Qn sus BE vp kt 6 m moe lt a t uU t a u t th mo lt lt lt lt o 5 lt lt lt SE u msc 7 Bg 5 lt a i Copyright 2005 Cirrus Logic Inc DS631PP4 AVR347 harman kardon 55 8 Mbit SPI Serial Flash SST25VF080B FEATURES Single Voltage Read and Write Operations 2 7 3 6V Serial Interface Architecture SPI Compatible Mode 0 and Mode 3 e High Speed Clock Frequency 50 MHz Superior Reliability Endurance 100 000 Cycles typical Greater than 100 years Data Retention e Low Power Consumption Active Read Current 10 mA typical Standby Current 5 pA typical Flexible Erase Capa
38. 5 1 7 boum ESK m SERA 52 TUNING_DO g25 PRESET UP 1 27 LL I 10 16V I gt 1 5706 5713 DELAY l co lt x lt DIG_SELEC l 225 TUNING_UP 525 SOURCE_DO H 1 528 ese 29 1 Bee 3 z f 3 3 E 72 ome e oD H E E gt POWER_H BAND 8 5 sk _ue Oz MIC IN ZO VOL_LED_CTRL ee 7 2 V tva 5715 rs Z P_SCAN i sa M 8 5 e KEY_3 22 see ee eee soe eee Sa Bocce so 1 J lt 43 3VC c o AVR245 345 147 247 347 OPTION 1 e i P J VOL EN2 mrt e gt 6 VFD CS 6781 1K i EE 2 JK85 3695 VFD_CLK R783 1K LI 5 VFD_DATA R784 1k 8 2 d zu VFD RST e es 5 5221 ree 05 R708 L a V3C_IN 5 4 x oo 5 20 45VD MIC IN 3 t 2 82 lt 3 3VC ER ee cca Rue wot LED BLUE is Jh E un E C857 35500555 gt HP_MUTE2 Y HP_IN lt LO 8 BSR REMOTE IN 2 8 Es 8 2 5
39. LL 5 ILLO DD Q1 S D QD LUN C281 R281 6371 _ R201 CD L 151613 5 vOLO vOL L H e gt L 0UT 1 o 5 1K 10 35 10 35v 560 1 100 VIDEO4 R 2 10 557 Rees 10 55V ES 391 55 55 8 z sz Se N s 150P e C2874B 1 4 cl R391 FUNC_MUTE2 R202 151614 VIDEO4 L 3 ta ag 1 pela pog 525 ES 252 100 E 5 as 958 5 22 M 1 3 z lt 5 0301 1 T c o NSRR s a T 2 SSESTS m 0202 1SS355T r i ag 302 1 do 5 R203 151601 V 1 ac lian ues oS x R392 FUNC MUTE2 77 5 858 528 258 100 55 1 5 gt gt x dn 392 1 1 oS x a BTS STS x s Ta 4 92535 4 T 2185 C2874B 1 gt o i R303 option R533 R344 OD k gt e e R323 I 1 1 R204 REC I 1 2K Ts 1 1 5K CNET 820 e TREC __15602 7V 7V 199 1 5 8 820 560 6572 C390 R382 1 i gum 0 2680 C282 12V gt R OUT 100 i f R304 e ur y 324 7 gt 680 VOLO2 VOL R H e 00 1 i H 10 35V 560 nse gig 6 10 35 10 35V APE 131613 CD L i Bus a 6 26 T B 0204 455355 151614 CD R Na ee eee GS Nei tae 1 MR Sir
40. C893 J776 harman kardon AVR345 OPTION FOR HUDSON USE SW96 SW97 J958 J963 J974 NONE SW98 R951 R952 J959 J964 um a PE SRESETASGNDZ T ol 9 V H gt 5 000000000 000 r O 1725 9 J796 J723 _ Gow BD R783 w R781 7 9 Ew 2787 R701 727 705 C2 ium CA 3 0738 1753 R893 735 754 076 7 2 gt amp w B 892 072 8 Q 7 611971090 Bw 49R915 R73 e D 03 40 J734 98 8 JP AVR245 345 M c Cn L 90505 ew 4 2864 HB 5715 s gt R922 6easGsswlk r Igs 1 y 2P AVR145 152 PHONE PCB OPTION 2 H ki gt 5 IP AYR248 342 a AEN _ com il M i s C5 VR146 147 247 347 on 092 7 4 132 242 545 160 3 640 5 0 0 IN 4 V3C 699000 JK85 1954 ee eee 4951 harman kardon CUP11910 7 973 C5 DIPPING ardon 45 VR PHONE VID3 OR 4 ANALOG JACK CUP11910 6 CENTER BAR
41. Lo TAPE 7 CBLISAT C Gm a Figure 73 6 8 Channel Input Selector NOTE The 6 8 Channel Inputs pass the incoming signals directly to the volume control without digitizing or processing them Therefore you will need to configure bass management settings speaker size delay and output level on your source device so that they match the settings you programmed using EzSet EQ which may be viewed using the Manual Setup menu see Advanced Functions section Consult the owner s guide for your multichannel player for more information The multichannel analog audio connection is not required for DVD Audio players compliant with HDMI version 1 1 or better or HD DVD and Blu ray Disc players that decode the digital audio internally and output linear PCM signals in digital format Consult the owner s guide for your disc player for more Information Using the Tuner The AVR 3475 built in tuner may be selected in one of three ways see Figure 74 1 Press the Source Selector Button on the front panel repeatedly until the tuner is selected The last used band AM or FM will be active 2 Press the Tuner Band Button marked AM FM Press this button again to switch bands This will also enable you to select XM Radio which is described separately in the next section 3 Press the Tuner Input Selector marked AM FM on the remote
42. Port 64 port SCOUT Output System Clock Output Outputs or fs clock P71 P72 P73 P74 Interrupt Request Pin 0 Interrupt request pin with programmable level Port 65 I O port Port 66 port Port 701 0 port x Input 8bitt timer 0 Timer 0 input TAOIN TASOUT Output 8 bit timer 3 output Timer 2 or Timer 3 output m Lt VO Port 73 VO port TAIN TU Input 8 bit timer 4 input Timer 4 input 1 Port 7141 0 port _ Output 8 bit timer 1 output Timer 0 or Timer 1 output Port 74 I O port P75 1 Port 75 port Output P80 1 TBOINO INT5 P81 TBOIN1 6 16bit timer 0 input 0 16bit Timer 0 count capture trigger input x Interrupt Request Pin 5 Interrupt request pin with programmable rising edge 16bit timer 0 input 1 16bit Timer 0 count capture trigger input interrupt Request Pin 6 interrupt request on rising edge IBOOUTO Output 16bit timer 0 output 0 16bit Timer O output TBOOUT1 Output 16bit timer 0 output 1 16bit Timer 0 output x P84 Port 84 I O port 16bit timer 1 input 0 16bit Timer 1 count capture trigger input INT Interrupt Request Pin 7 Interrupt request pin with programmable rising edge falling edge P85 TBAIN1 INTS P86 TB1OUTO P87 4 T
43. VD4 TAPE r7 89888 BRABA 00000 pogiba aga 00088 88808 n nera n SURR OFF nona 00000 pu d 86808 05099 00900 580 1587 VID 5 68CH Color of Illumination Green 0 250 y 0 439 patterns B TER _ B MODEL HCA 18ML03 e Negative Patterns M co rm PATTERN DETAILS Rev 20 Jan 2005 201 IEEE a Ll StS S ass Im rvx n r AVR347 GRID ASSIGNMENT DIGITAL EX PRO LOGICI n DO3STRE o HEADPHONE o 5768 STEREO OFF WBA 8 7 8 9 83 9 8 7 08 9 2022 83 ea 26 27 29 22 _ 80 B2 83 ba B6 87 66 59 eee 46 47 8 69 8 63 64 2 B 56 59 60 0 62 63 89 65 88 62 69 59 _ 8G 96 106 116 126 _ 146 89888 8888885 156 166 H 99069 I B1 B4 B5 B6 LS B3 m B11 T 1 B10 4 10 pe Bi3lL L B16 B20 B18 B21 17G harman kardon 18G MODEL HCA 18ML03 GRID ASSIGNMENT 1 20 Jan 2005 m 2005 NN 2 AAA inet
44. PHONE PCB 37 5 REMOVAL 1 Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 2 Remove the Front Panel ASS Y referring to the previous step 2 3 Disconnect connector CN92 on the Phone PCB 37 5 from the lead wire BN92 5P on the Volume PCB 37 6 4 Disconnect connector CN85 on the Phone PCB 37 5 from the lead wire BN85 3P on the Fip PCB 37 1 5 Remove 2 screws 52 and then remove the Phone PCB 37 5 POWER LED PCB 37 3 REMOVAL 1 Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 2 Remove the Front Panel ASS Y referring to the previous step 2 3 Disconnect connector CN88 on the Power Led PCB 37 3 from the lead wire BN88 4P on the PCB 37 1 4 Remove 2 screws 52 and then remove the Power led PCB 37 3 FIP PCB 37 1 REMOVAL 1 Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 2 Remove the Front Panel ASS Y referring to the previous step 2 3 Disconnect the lead wire BN84 5P on the Fip PCB 37 1 from connector CN84 on the Volume PCB 37 6 4 Disconnect the lead wire BN85 3P on the Fip PCB 37 1 from connector CN85 on the Phone PCB 37 5 5 Disconnect the lead wire BN88 4P on the Fip PCB 37 1 from connector CN88 on the Power Led PCB 37 3 44 AVR347 harman kardon 6 Disconnect the connector CN89 on the Fip PCB 37 1 from lead wire BN89 4P on the Key PCB 37 2 7 Remove 3 screws S2 and then remove the Guide PCB 37 8 amp t
45. cam ANALOG INPUT 66 COMP PR IN lt RIN COMP PB IN lt B IN 9 Q9 Q9 HS SCL lt HS RESET HS_SDA lt HUDSON INT lt 10801_INPUT gt HDMI IN HDMI_SCK gt HDMI_MCLK 2 z HDMI_SDO gt gt HDMI_LRCK JK62 8 5 E 802 gt JK62 5 a HDMI_SD1 gt C612 SPDIF NU uk 272 m 593 gt pM see MCLK is HDMI_MUTE 2 C622 502 Ll yi 577 977 5577 5 Ea 10 50 308505205 C674 kx O i age d e COMP Y OUT 500 gt Cd 10 50 0 501 n csi A 5 X SET 5 13 0 gt ws c d ge 89 Um 3 Be 5 I e C675 R615 5 4 uL gt 91 C624 0 zig e 9VV 5 5 Ei lt ase ats 10 50 C579 EN On 45 e 1 comp_pR_out BN15 i gt 10 20 yi zi 3 5 1 C616 VREF ISSR E Lo 5 PBS NJW1521 ee ws gt DA02_LRCLK ols 10 50 v CVINJW1321F P1 3 1 18 SCK N DAO2 SCLK 2 e e 259 PRI gt 500 2_ en i lt 11521_80A gt DAO MCLK lt 1321 HDMI SPDIF NE C 10 50 gt MCLK 5 gee 5 HDMI_SCK HDMI_SCK 4 4 HOMILLRCK gt HDMI LRCK l 500 500 R604 HDMI_SD1 HDMI_SD1 HDMI_SD2 gt HDMI_SD
46. 5 W Y Y H W L 07 01 18 07 01 18 07 01 18 ey CPU CA AVR347 harman kardon vu
47. 827 Ber Bor 5 90700 II 2SB1559P AVR132 144 146 15V e LI 5000 330 0961 v eet TI PS C910 0 047 55 jon 2SB1560 AVR145 245 147 247 FAN 212 12 12 12 12 12 lt 29 e LE N z z C918 10 047 2SB1647 AVR345 347 STS 818 818 2 818 35 5 5 5 S E Ses Bsr e E 5 5 5 28 e p 0474 E m R632 VCC C917 10 047 51600 e 1r e 18 1 4W 51600 18 1 4W 22 24 dun Be 5 5 BL gt 52 228 EZ is 525 525 258 858 ES OVER nS x acu psu es ST JU c tere Ce 20 _ Q960 025 95 0502 51606 E A1268GR A1360Y 067 51208 d 1268 MU A aor R525 C575 fe R650 A R522 4 R647 sox 51030 LeeLee 555 uno 7 WW Ww 857 C902 470 680P 5 5 NDA Soe 107 Q505 TA1268GR Q875 2SD2390 6800 50V E 2502390 e 1 AVR145 132 144 146 147 1 E r 1 8200 50V AVR245 247 068 1 1 2 38 0605 R675 R672 ff 18200 63V AVR345 347 AVR45 132 144 146 147 8250805 539 e 225272 255 ase e 4 C909 2 g 8 5613 151 Se rye 258 228 925 910 NP 248 Ts 2281 225 25 1 Wi
48. Active Read with Auto precharge with Auto Read with Auto precharge Burst Stop U LDQM Refresh Refresh A9 Pin TA ee Exit Entry H L Precharge power down Exit L H Entry H L Clock Suspend Note 1 Exiting Self Refresh occurs by asynchronously bringing CKE from low to high 2 X Do not care L Low H High BA Bank Address RA Row Address CA Column Address Opcode Operand Code NOP No Operation Rev 0 2 Aug 2003 12 162 AVR347 harman kardon NJW1159 2 CHANNEL ELECTRONIC VOLUME GENERAL DESCRIPTION PACKAGE OUTLINE NJW1159 is a two channel electronic volume IC It is included output buffer amplifier and also resistor output terminal for using external amplifier to lt lt customize for your application hese functions are controlled by three wired serial data And the chip selector is available for using four chips on same serial bus line 15 available for two channel stereo NJW1159V NJW1159M NJW1159D and or multi channel audio volume FEATURES Operating Voltage 4 5 to 7 5V hree Wired Serial Data Control Chip Selector available for using four chips on sarne serial bus line e Volume 0 to 95dB 1dBstep MUTE Bi CMOS Technology Package Outline SSOP16 DMP 16 DIP16 i BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 Wired Control Data 163 harman kardon T5CC1 AVR347 TOSHIBA CMOS 16 Bit Microcontrollers 1 Outline and Features TSCC1 T5C
49. EE 22 KR 6 E AN Js 4 Amo EN gt _ ONE 25 wan man w m mw wie 1 wa w wa mc wawam zT w ava a aa N 4 z 1 62 6678 Oe s lee TUE 77347 VIDEO Mb es s 9 x C Ld INI ID Ol 6 NI m 71 LE NY O O O O mmm mus mm 106 AVR347 51 XM IC PRELIMINARY 14 Aug 04 1 Overview The XM Digital Transceiver Integrated Circuit XM DT IC provides a cost effective means for an electronics equipment manufacturer to be XM Satellite Radio compatible by multiplexing data and audio streams between the XM Receiver and User Interface Controller into a 2 wire time division duplex TDD high frequency serial link In a typical application two XM DT IC devices connect to each other via a differential link as depicted on Figure 1 1 below In the Slave unit XM DT Digital Transceiver antenna the XM DT IC interfaces directly to the XM Radio receiver chipset taking m a real time 125 audio stream along with data information The XM DT IC stores this data in in
50. Figure 82 Using The Bridge Remote p p lt P 7 4 Bp R 3 iro SKIP AVR Figure 83 Using The Bridge Front Panel 39 harman kardon Table summarizes the controls available when The Bridge is in use also Figures 82 and 83 Table 7 Using The Bridge iPod Function Remote Control Key Front Panel Button Play Play gt Tuner Mode Pause Pause Il Tuner Mode Menu Menu Spkr Tuner Band AM FM select oet oet ocroll Forward Left Arrow 4 Preset Down scroll Reverse Right Arrow gt Preset Up Forward Search Next Track Forward Next gt Tuning Up Reverse Search Previous Track Reverse Previous 44 Tuning Down NOTES e Play and Pause functions are not available unless content has been selected for playback by navigating the menu system e For the Search function press and hold the indicated button Pressing the Previous Track Button once skips to the beginning of the current track Press the Previous Track Button twice to skip to the beginning of the previous track While a selection is playing the song title artist and album name if available on the iPod will scroll across the upper line in the front panel Message Display The lower line will display the elapsed time of the track on the left
51. e a I SC JW84 2 2uF 50V HP_MUTE2 gt 5 5 eves R874 155133 2 9 e 5 5 5 e VOL LED 0701 li T Sp 258 1 1 818 258 8 8 5VC ul 2 1 IA D5V C107M 2 J i 5 R873 R704 R786 oO 470 1 gt 10 1 5K 9 8 8 558 j 2 555 5 O 528 5 MASS 7 SRE m pi 5 JK86 s 1 3 8 5 2 5 ol 5VD D5V zr dis 2070 bou 0778 4 TO INPUT ASS Y TO VIDEO ASS Y 145819 C796 1000P 795 1000 CUP11910 8 BLACKET JACK PCB FOR CARD CABLE C794 2200P C793 0 1 C882 REVISION 2 4 6 CUP11910 9 JACK PCB FOR PHONE JACK 1 3 5 7 238 SCHEMATIC TE 145 245 345 132 144 1 ANR HO LTE 207070500708 BN81 BN81 TO POWER ASS Y DESIGN CHECK APPROVE DRAWING NO boe 07 01 18 07 0148 07 01 18 215 harman kardon AVR347 2
52. 10 50V 25 1695 E ei L7812CP E zi E i r AA N ee D EI LI M MULTI gt 0451 24V HVTKTC28748T 5 iN our 2 gt 1 1N4003ST gt D475 1SS355T s 1 96 GND 5 1 NJM7824F A 3 gt 1 1 ale 1 gt wo 0 770 Sa gt 1 CRD25F J220T 5 R104 1 0452 3 0995 HVTKTC2874BT e 2 19 IN4003ST 5 1 8 S 5 2 918 s ee ee MULTI M 8 252 252 Sh oz 2 22143 AVR24 34 nid XM SECIION USA Ver ONLY gt s 5 5 5 6VX v XM L 4384 RST iPod IN Lch XM MUTE N 3 XM RST i S XM R XM TXD XM_RXD gt iPod_IN_Rch
53. A BUS PART I I 24V 24V I PROTECT TO XM PART MUN a REGULATOR 5 3 iB s REGULATOR 1 DC OVER CURRENT SL lt 1 I q c gt Ho ROTARY ENCODER MASTER VR FL DISPLAY I 1 I ss 0226 1 1 BLUE VOLUME Indicator AER MED GNE 455 REMOTE SENSOR VR ENC STANDBY lt AMBER BLUE DMP L R N L2 DMP DMP TX DMP RX PMP_CVBS gt DMP CVBS gt IPOD THE BRIDGE SUB TRANS SR CEN SBL MULTI L SBR MULTI R POWER S W COAX4 4 NJU7301 DEO4 or MIC INPUT REVISION 2 1 3 MODEL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM AVR347 345 SHEET DESIGN M S Kim W Y Yang APPROVE H W Lee 07 03 14 107 05 14 07 03 14 DRAWING NO BLOCK DIAGRAM 11908604 AVR347 harman kardon AVR347 Electrical Parts List UTI Mon mou pose 1 pU _ O __ 2 4 _ Semiconductors _______ S D usu __ uua e Resistors p
54. FA 1 SE 1 l ES a a Ecco arse 1 1 4 1 ae Y aun m E i voro S 2 W Z 0 0 W LvO O ND 1 aa o 25 Sk o2 85 1 I e N 98 BE 5 1969 262 260 060 p S 5 gt X g T Su 55 3 5 58 559 SR 5 gt I L oo 155 i 2 w ge 55 2215 i 2 2 DS 1 5 2252 SC ME S gt 5 lt b az 55 e 0000 gt E zx 22 3334 28 58 88 8888 048 Q 8 LEA eh oh ach dos 8 lt 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AVR347 harman kardon IPOD FROM VIDEO2 VIDEO1 OUT VIDEO1 IN MONITOR OUT P CN42 1 IPOD Y E CJPTIGAHZY of al sp E IPOD C els ole SH 8 5 14 78 SNS a Is 5 IPOD COMP 3 Oi H gt ar ONL XX VID OUT E se e 221 JK40 Spiess JK40 3 C431 o lt 5VV S VIDEO C 10 50 8 v e C432 3 R461 S VIDEOS Sz VIDEO Y 10 50 N b C433 A 10 50 22 92e a m 5VV Y aye a 1s 278 JK40 2 518 Us E C421 COMPOSITE o ue 10 50 S VIDEO C C422 5 S VIDEO Y 10 50 C423 10 50 _ o 8 E
55. mE Number Description _ HEAD HEADPHONE CUP11910 5 ceo sur i s NUS Semiconductors S f f ee Resistors 000 0 0 po C eee Miscellaneous Pe er __ 55 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator PartNumber Description ty 4 22 DIG DIGITAL INPUT CUP11916 1 ENT e sock a 8761 CRD201J 50 75OHM1 SWJ _ 1 EA HJSTOTXI77ZL MODULE OPTICALTX 1 EA 75 HJSTORXI77L MODULE OPTICALRX jJOPTJACK R 1 77 MODULE OPTICALRX jJOPTJACK R 1 JK77 HJSTORXI77L OPTICAL RX 1 JK78 ________ 4 0682 ACK BOARD 1 E BORA ERI BOB VOLUME ENCODER S E Capacitors 02 f j _ __ __ 7 8 gt NM Ek Semiconductors o po O S _ S E 56 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator PatNumbe _____ Po VOLUN ENCODER 0021191059 a m ovoszcssscengz ae LEB a ee Resistors _ S o o Z C P
56. o anoo dnL 0 0 411400 a a Li s 1 7 9 129 1 5 9 8 4 M 1 1 1 sao H 1749 cw RR ASZ 0001 a t ae 49 00 25 I 5 Ie eR 5 00 2 971 1 69 00 2 2 Si Ed a e amp e gt gold i 1 vt 1569 i 1 m MS 5 gl 3409 1 m 2 2 2 2 182 3 3 PyS WS SASSASIASS 2 1 w22 2WS 245 542 ey Steate SAz5SAz 1 1212 2 I Mr EE TL EN E SAS Zws VWe 2A s AS z ol2 _ N RE SUN afz afz 5172212 9212212 S72 275 wu BAS 7 ans _ gt __ 843 BAS T E E 1 e 1 529 5 SN MZZ 1 i i 25 4 4 nL0 0 59 1 8 Pp 1010 e c e e l p 6762 1 1 i 1 i 1 1 nL0 0 1 1 m EE 8969 N 612 i lt anoo j i 1 w lt
57. 2 O 33 PANELREAR 19 1 34 BUSHING AC CORD KHRIAQ8 0 10 00 35 CORDPOWER OA207Z 1 O 36 TRANSPOVR CI5WOZZU 4144 37 FRONT PCB ASS Y 371 11 72 KEYPCB 1 y O 373 POWERLEDPCB 0 10 C 34 3 5 PHONERB 1 376 VOLUMEPCB 1 377 83258 1 378 GUIDE PCB CARD CABLE 1 10 SS eee MAIN PCB ASS Y 39 382 GUDEPCRCARDCAME ao E E ME INPUT PCB ASSY juj 392 39 6 O 1 C O O e POWER PCB ASSY 401 402 4035 4094 405 m vooras S O 42 TNERMODUE 1 S BRACKETSIDEL 45 RUBBER 5 7 BADGEASSY 1 ORNAMENTBADGE j gt 28 0 25 49 50 SHEETREFLECTION 1 5 RECEPTACLE AC 1 49 harman kardon AVR347 harman kardon AMPLIFIER SECTION BIAS ADJ USTMENT Measurement condition No input signal or volume position is minimum Standard value Ideal current 48mA 5 ldeal DC Vo
58. Format RXP7 GPO7 MUTEC Detector A O VLC McLK P Mult Div Serial Audio OSAI SCLK Interface Port SAI_SDOUT Digital Filter OVLS ADCIN1 Gain amp Clip ADCIN2 Digital Filter Gain amp Clip SDOUT AOUTA1 Q DAC 1 CX LRCK DAC 2 DCX SCLK CX SDIN1 DAC 3 CX SDIN2 DAC 4 Q CX SDIN3 CX SDINA Analog Filter DAC 5 Digital Filter 6 Volume Control DAC 7 DAC 8 Preliminary Product Information Cirrus Logic Inc http www cirrus com 195 harman kardon IC ICM Ir CIRRUS LOGIC 542528 2 PIN DESCRIPTIONS
59. THE UNIT OF RESISTANCE IS OHM 1 bd R977 1000 OHM M 1000 KOHM 0010603 x 8 1 7 e e E HU ccc Illae c oe eben Se 10K THE UNIT OF CAPACITANCE IS MICROFARAD uF i pF 10 uF option Do not use these parts THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM MAY MODIFIED AT ANY TIME 5VV PS x L Y jaw 0 0 26 WITH THE IMPROVEMENT OF PERFORMANCE Y TRANSISTOR 80010007759 TRE 3 3VV REVISION 2 4 6 AA 0000 1 5 5 7 2 I KRA102S R1 R2 gt 10K OHM 0000 0001 8 5888 8828 7 5 2333 o dii SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM KRA103S R1 R2 gt 22K OHM 2 2888 8223 SHEET KRA104S R1 R2 gt 47K OHM 2 27 5 x AVR345 247 347 gt ste 22 sla 5 S E MODEL 6 8 5 823 8 8 8213 gt 209 007 03 14 DESIGN CHECK DRAWING NO 1 07 03 14 07 03 14 07 03 14 2 AVR347 harman kardon
60. er 9 gusce C347 2 C287 R287 6377 R387 R313 R333 DAC BR DACO SBL OUT 100 VOLO6 VOL BL lt aur 9250 5 pens Ts 4 7V UA i no mE rey 75 560 i 05 ri B SS is ts 2 7K 318 ma 03 0397 Y E wa Ne 157 R314 150P SBR OUT gt R214 VIDEOI R 151622 1 i h C28748 2 7K R397 cc cr g 3 SB_MUTE2 9 gt 5 5 L 8 7 L x lt 4 52425 55 hex 225 959 92 1 552875 878818525 87258 872 838 558 c MULTI IC34 us 5 exchan 8215 5 gt DVD_L 151623 AVR345 2 8 l l di lt 3 100 i 5 ols wo 5252 5 EUR 5 5 825 8 2 858 928 lt 158 MUTE2 x I 3225 2922 3 2 1 229 STs 3 2 B9 zl DVD e ONLY 5 JU 392 1 T DATA ul Hideo cometen ite Shee 2 i C2874B R315 216 7 u DVD R 151624 D_BL C336 12 T_CLK 5 R T 150p 2 7K LS ese T_DOUT Q 100 181601 r REC L s 3 ios 560 C288 R288 C378 R388 Spe OUT 25 0 5 Tj GT R316 BT R336 gt 680 C348 poni VOLO7 VOL BR amp H e 5 5604 vi REC R 1 DBL 9 1 9 s L 1 10 55 SUR 10 35 i TUNED 5 i 2 0003 1
61. lt 3 lt l 9 9 5 nies wee S w 1 i ezn 28 1259 225 1 z 2S7 gt 223 823 528 r ESO SE 301 6010 1969 i 1 222 225 225 225 225 ane E 1 1 1 vv 44 N 4 5 lt EE E 1 als 555 Wax cb Lucu 42 522 5 2Sa s gt 823 anro anoo HD 119 YS 1 e He 1 5913 012 6013 amoo anoo e IL e Le e C2 019 8012 1 1 1 i e e 1 1 1 1 1 1 e i 1 1 e 1 1 1 C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 x 1 I i 1 l 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 7 1 1 1 1 N 1 jS e T CD 1 lt i HE lt 1 1 1 1 1 N 89 3 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 x I 1 1 So 1 lt o 5 o o 2 e gt 1 5 A91 001 59 i 4 4 xf 1 19 2 i 0G nLY0 O 2 28 1 ES
62. m 4 4 092 x 285 5 e oa amp 56 2 a bj ge UE o ui 5895 FH lt lt os oF _ I DO lt lt lt lt 8 lt 8 5 5655565552 85 Peete Uri ARAM 54 55508 000 28 EH Hn pe b 1 a 7 SD EXT 7 50 7 EXT 1 AD7 GFIO7 50 2 EXT A2 PCP 06 59 2 SD A3 EXT A3 _ 05 GPIO5 50 4 4 AD4 5612 118 528 PCP 03 PCP AD2 GPIO2 150 A5 EXT A5 63 SD 6 AB PCP_AD1 GPIO1 00 150 cun PB 50 EXT XTAL_OUT SD A8 EXT 57 RONA SD_A11 EXT_A10 ROS 50 12 A11 FILT2 1 44 L Q FP 54 _ 80 CLKEN 7 CLKIN FB 180 CLKOUT DAI DATA3 GPIO14 DATA2 GPJIO13 50 8D 08 EXT SD 09 EXT Dt DAI DATA1 GPiO12 DATAO DAI 771 50 D10 EXT 02 50 EXT 03 84 DAI 50 012 EXT 04 150 013 EXT 05 LRCLK2 GFIO4Z SD 14 EXT DC SCLK2 BDI_CLK
63. 73 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator _ Number Description ty o sao roe 74 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Number ty cao on 8701 C3A206_ J SN9PB5 06 702 326 _ 5 05 5 06 8703 3 206 5 5 5 06 74 3526 WIRE COPPEER 15 95 985 06 8705 35426 J SN9PB5 06 76 3526 JSN9PB5 06 8707 35426 _ 5 5 5 06 8708 3 206 5 05 5 06 75 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Ref Designator n Number Description _ L O O Ert sca s 76 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Number Description ty _ a E 77 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Number Description _ L ornate roe n C 7 CS CE Miscellaneous po S S o 78 AVR347 harman kardon Ref PR Naber _ PatNumbr Descipin Q ee enn MAIN ola TEL itt m L ea SPEAKER re a POS
64. AUTO POLL The Auto Poll feature is used when both an analog audio and digital audio connection have been made for one source device If for some reason no digital signal is available the AVR 347 will switch to the analog inputs for the source This situation can occur with some cable or satellite television broadcasts where some channels are broad cast with digital audio and others with analog audio For some sources the Auto Poll feature is unnecessary and may be undesirable For example if your DVD player is stopped you may not want to use the analog audio signal or you may have decided not to connect analog audio Move the cursor to this line press the Set Button and press the lt p gt Buttons until OFF appears disabling the Auto feature With Auto Poll turned off the receiver will only check for a signal at the audio input assigned to the source NOTE Since The Bridge is connected to the AVR using a dedicated audio connection it isn t possible to select a different audio input for this source The AM FM XM tuner and 6 8 Channel Inputs also use dedicated audio inputs and it isn t possible to select a digital audio input for these sources The next three lines in the Input Setup menu activate the tone controls and may be skipped at this time We recommend leaving the tone controls at their factory defaults for most listening in order to enjoy the sound mix created by your favorite movie and music artists However i
65. AVR145 245 OPTION SW98 R951 952 959 964 C5 104 AVR347 harman kardon C O O O O O O O O 6 leoo 000 C 31 COUS 6558 06059 Ros 2 02 RI 523 090 6096 020 8 090 0 ot 000 900 900 C493 B o 8 O o o C401 ROO NO D R401 R453 R4 C C C 2 R43 je C C61 C 9 BN R403 8402 o e R492 79 9 9 9 9 9 92 29 9 9 5 9 87979 7 9 9 9 9 9 67 ox IC 13 C p C604 e 2 E T4 IC 48 O O CEE O O OO 7 A fF A F5 7 F NEN 1 LY qmm e 2 1 46 J y A 72 j x PN N l N N V J J 2 V A xz LA y gt 2 7 N AVR347 harman kardon harman kardon DIPPING ADU 0028 m O AVR247 347 VIDEO UM mim R 431 b 4 431 LABS lt 3 yr id ye Y NY ms zr TIS x E 46 8 p gemi 8471 INY C461
66. CS495xx Data Sheet FEATURES Powerful 32 bit Dual core Audio DSP Multi standard 32 bit Audio Decoding plus Post Processing Dual decode Capable D 3 Framework Applications Library Dolby Digital Pro Logic IIx Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital Headphone Dolby Digital Virtual Speaker DTS ES 96 24 DTS ES Discrete 6 1 DTS ES Matrix 6 1 DTS Digital Surround MPEG 2 Multichannel AAC Multichannel 5 1 MP3 MPEG 1 2 Layer ill THX Surround EX THX Ultra2 Cinema DVD Audio Video SACD Multichannel Bass Management 10 Channels of 32 bit Serial Audio Input 16 Channels of 32 bit PCM Output Two Master slave SPI or Format Control Ports for Audio Subsystem Management Parallel Host Control amp UART Customer Software Security Keys D Large On chip X Y and Program amp ROM SDRAM SRAM and FLASH Memory Support Dual 192 kHz SPDIF Transmitters 10 Ch Ser al Audio In Control 2 X 1 Channel Status Serial Control 1 The CS495xx DSP famiy integrates two programmable 32 bit DSP cores and a DMA engine with a full set of audio peripherals Feature rich AVR designs can be easily developed using the Framework applications library which includes both certified application programs and a modular programming environment for easy customization The framework includes certified state of the art audio decoders
67. Figure 1 Packages N 1 PDIP8 BN 8 e 8 MN 150 mil width TSSOP8 DW 169 mil width UFDFPN8 2x3mm 1 26 AVR347 M24C64 M24C32 SUMMARY DESCRIPTION These C compatible electrically erasable pro grammable memory EEPROM devices are orga nized as 8192 x 8 bits M24C64 and 4096 x 8 bits M24C32 Figure 2 Logic Diagram M24C64 M24C32 Al01844B uses a two wire serial interface comprising a bi directional data line and a clock line The devic es carry a built in 4 bit Device Type Identifier code 1010 in accordance with the I C bus definition The device behaves as a slave in the I C protocol with all memory operations synchronized by the serial clock Read and Write operations are initiat ed by a Start condition generated by the bus mas ter The Start condition is followed by a Device oelect Code and Read Write bit RW as de scribed in Table 3 terminated by an acknowl edge bit When writing data to the memory the device in an acknowledge bit during the 9 bit time following the bus masters 8 bit transmission When data is read by the bus master the bus master acknowledges the receipt of the data byte in the same way Data transfers are terminated by a Stop condition after an Ack for Write and after a NoAck for Read 4 26 129 harman kardon Table 2 Signal Names Ground Power On Reset Vcc Lock Out Write P
68. POWER DOWN PROTECTION ON INPUTS SYMMETRICAL OUTPUT IMPEDANCE lot 8mA MIN m BALANCED PROPAGATION DELAYS OPERATING VOLTAGE RANGE 2V to 5 5V mg PIN AND FUNCTION COMPATIBLE WITH 74 SERIES 08 IMPROVED LATCH UP IMMUNITY s LOW NOISE p 0 8V MAX DESCRIPTION The 74 is an advanced high speed CMOS QUAD 2 INPUT AND GATE fabricated with sub micron silicon gate and double layer metal wiring 5 technology The internal circuit is composed of 2 stages including buffer output which provides high noise immunity and stable output PIN CONNECTION AND IEC LOGIC SYMBOLS June 2001 187 harman kardon 74VHCO8 QUAD 2 INPUT AND GATE ORDER CODES PACKAGE TUBE T amp R SOP 74VHCO8M 74VHCO8MTR TSSOP 74VHCOBTTR Power down protection is provided on all inputs and O to 7V can be accepted on inputs with no regard to the supply voltage This device can be used to interface 5V to 3V All inputs and outputs are equipped with protection circuits against static discharge giving them 2KV ESD immunity and transient excess voltage LC10970 1 8 AVR347 harman kardon 74VHCO08 INPUT EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT PIN DESCRIPTION PINNo SYMBOL NAME AND FUNCTION 1 4 9 12 1Ato 4A Data Inputs 2 5 10 13 1Bto4B Data Inputs 6 8 11 1Y to 4Y Data Outputs Ground 0V
69. RS 232 Mode Leave this switch popped out in the Operate position unless the AVR 347 is being upgraded RS 232 Reset This switch is only used during a software upgrade A standard processor reset is performed by pressing and holding the front panel Tone button switched AC Accessory Outlet You may plug the AC power cord of one source device into this outlet and it will turn on whenever you turn on the receiver Do not use a source that consumes more than 50 watts of power AC Power Cord Input After you have made all other connections plug the AC power cord into an unswitched outlet Plug the female end of the cord into this receptacle which conveniently allows you to install all wiring ahead of time AVR347 harman kardon Component Coaxial Digital Video 3 Video 1 Video XM Audio Tape AN AN DVD A V Inputs Antenna Inputs RS 232 RS 232 Outputs FM Antenna Inputs Outputs Inputs 1 2 amp y us m 1 2 amp 3 Reset Serial Port omponen HDMI 2 Video 2 Video 1 Video Video Bridge Aut hu Input Tape AN AN Monitor Monitor DMP RS 232 Inputs AM Antenna Inputs Inputs Outputs Outputs Input Mode TL S Sern lt lt wa AS EBA r 4 A 3 p 4 mem n omo E MIL 2 3 Ai M ore aa 4 gt y Pr RESET OPERATE MODE COMPONENT VIDEO IN MONT
70. 15 82 1 5 5 99 t 8 EXT_D14 SD_D6 30 42 11 EXT_A14 SD_A13 77 3 OPT_0UT EXT_D13 SD_D5 31 40 9 EXT_A13 SD_A14 75 2 x EXT 012 50 04 32 38 8 EXT_A12 SD_A10 74 6 20 E EXT 011 50 03 34 35 6 EXT AT1 SD A12 55 4 gt EXT 010 50 02 35 33 5 EXT_A10 SD_A11 56 5 19 EXT_D9 SD_D1 37 31 3 EXT A9 SD 9 58 7 32 gt EXT D8 SD DO 39 29 2 EXT AB SD 59 8 31 gt 2 EXT_D7 SD_D15 40 45 49 EXT 7 50 61 18 30 gt OPTI GNIS EXT_D6 SD_D14 41 43 48 EXT_A6 SD_A6 62 19 29 DAO2 LRCLK EXT D5 SD 013 42 41 46 EXT A5 SD A5 64 20 28 DAO2 SCLK EXT 04 50 012 43 39 45 EXT_A4 SD_A4 67 21 27 8715 DAO2_DATAO EXT D3 SD 45 36 43 EXT 3 50 A3 68 22 24 Utne EXT_D2 SD_D10 46 34 42 A2 SD_A2 70 23 23 HDMI MCLK 1 SD D9 48 32 40 EXT A1 SD 71 24 22 HDMI SCK EXT 00 50 D8 49 30 39 EXT A0 SD 0 72 25 21 HDMI LRCK HDMI 500 DIR MCLK HDMI_SD1 HDMI_SD2 HDMI_1_SW 70 HVITC74VHC157FT HDMI M_SW SPDIF_SW H B amp HDMI on 0 IC71 H B 4 HDMI on L A amp HDMI of HVITC74VHC157FT L A HDMI off F_OPT4 gt SPDIF 212 HDMI_SD3 2007 01 18 E VISION AG SH MO D
71. 2 TIT B DEG 60006 5 55594 592 592558208552586 5595 8055508 lt mr lt lt lt lt m m lt lt r m lt lt K lt lt lt lt NERO9OB8i519d0 d20G8iooQS20 iuoiiiiioimonssyy 9i evy 98595 DGND 73 36 DGND Dvcci8 _ 74 35 Dvccis IOGND 75 34 L RoPwRsv 76 1 MUTEOUT 77 32 DSCLo SPDIF 78 31 DSDAO 79 30 29 050 1 503 81 28 cscL SD2 82 27 CSDA SD1 83 26 SDO 84 25 IOGND WS 85 24 CGND SCK 86 23 MCLKIN 87 22 DACDVCC18 MCLKOUT 88 Sil 9031 21 DACDGND 89 20 L AnBPb 90 144 Pin 19 _ DACVCCB 91 18 DACGNDB 92 17 NC Top View 16 DACVCCG AUDPVCC18 94 15 DACGNDG AUDPGND 95 14 L AnRPr XTALOUT 96 13 DACVCCR XTALIN 97 12 DACGNDR xrALvcc 98 11 comp REGVCC 99 10 RsET NC 100 9 vREF RSVDL 101 8 DACAGND RESET 102 7 SCDT _ 103 6 INT 104 5 lovcc 105 4 L L 106 CLK48B _ 107 2 HSYNC L 108 1 bE CN NS 93i 6 5 88 5898822858858
72. 22 HEATSINKASS Y 114 F 12825 58 808025 0 J CHDA0O2R SCREW SPECIAL SCREW 21 E _ jsCREW SPECIAL SCREW 4 E ICHDS3A012R SCREW SPECIAL SCREW 5 1 398 7 BRACKET PCO 2 EA ___________ 1 417 7 PCB BRACKET 2 EA _ 2 600 BRACKET FAN 1 CMYiA270 5 J HEATSINK EA _ tCMY2A240 5 HEAT SINK 1 __________ 5 EA SCREW 6 E __ 12825 5 MOTOR FAN 60 8025MM jsCREW SPECIAL SCREW 2 E ICHDS3A012R SCREW SPECIAL SCREW 3 E 1 5 BRACKET FAN _ BRACKET 1 E EE ELE j EIAS EU PCB CUP11916 2 iwa 55 i podus Capacitors Po C851 CCEA1HH100T ELECT 10UF 50V C852 CCEA1HH100T ELECT 10UF 50V C853 CCEA1HH100T ELECT 10UF 50V C854 CCEA1HH100T ELECT 10UF 50V C855 CCEA1HH100T ELECT 10UF 50V 79 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator PartNumber_ Description ty 4 22 BAS POS CU PCB 2 ass cet oc ue sw 2 C 7 Semiconductors 121 o _ ___
73. Bde uv C373 83 e e d8 TG S 283 283 RS C 0UT L03 voL 100 L NRI oy 560 5 5285 5 10 35V 10 35V Ern O C 1 1 150P 4 E C2874B R206 e TAPE R _ 5016 T 2 R35 wot vem 5 1 1 100 28 5 6 7 8 wld gt 2x lt _ FUNC_MUTE2 gt aS a 8 9 3 HPL OUT S M M Noo N Jn 8258 5 STU STs 855 022 R207 exchange exchonge e VIDEO3 L 151017 eq E I alm eo 3 43 5 gt Sx R394FUNC_MUTE2 R318 FUNC_MuTE2 gt 2 L5 LS Sx noo 258 lt sx L 9778 nre g lt 1 lt 12V 12 55525 9 xT aa 392 1 oH zi 8 V D 0 3 SATA 151615 TAPE L R307 R348 8 89 e 28748 C2874B 1000 R208 VIDEO3 R_ISIG18 DAC SW DA 1 ISIG16 TAPE R 0262 80 xox C278 C344 284 z C374 R384 R317 100 47 25V DACO3 R284 lt SW OUT 2 Ba DAC BL DACOS Det gt e 34 e Ws VOLOB VOL SW WM 1 jM 151617 VIDEO3 L DAC SR 2 7K 10 35V 10 35V SN 10 35 0206 4155355 j DAC SL BACO E R209 Se D Sas iss 100 1SIG18_VIDED3 R DAC C DACOS VOLO4 VOL
74. Connect one of the source s analog video outputs to a source input on the AVR e g Component Video 3 or Video 3 and select that source input then select the 6 8 Channel Inputs for audio the AVR 34 will retain the last video selection other than HDMI see Figure 26 The AVR 347 is Simplay HD verified for compatibility via the connection with other Simplay HD verified products lf your video display is equipped with a DVI Digital Video Interface input you may use an HDMI to DVI adapter not included 0000 OUT 7 OPTICAL Figure 26 HDMI and Digital Audio Inputs CD The CD source is used for a strictly audio device such as a CD player Referring to Table 2 connect your CD player to the CD Analog Audio inputs and to any available digital audio input See Figure 27 Figure 27 CD Audio Inputs and Digital Audio Inputs No video connections are needed Tape The Tape source is used for audio only recorders such as a CDR MiniDisc or cassette deck Referring to Table 2 connect your recorder to the Tape Analog Audio inputs and outputs and to any available digital audio input and corre sponding digital audio output See Figure 28 OPTICAL 06 LOAXLAL Figure 28 Tape Audio Inputs and Outputs and Digital Audio Inputs and Outputs Hemember to connect the output jacks on your recorder to the Tape or digital audio input jacks on the AVR and the input jacks on your
75. SAL SCLK gick2 HLZ9RO05Z 29 Y Der A0UTB4 voos e 206 WE Em lt 2 SAI_LRCK LRCK2 502 d 503 AOUTB4 lt gt 50 DAL 00 S0 bow RNB1 503 2 9 D_BR lt lt j 21 lt R712 82 151 xs C ex T 58 AOUTAA44 77 59 lt DAL Di 50 08 DO PA sot e 506 BL lt 4 2 ADCINI R761 1K 32 X Mor AOUTA4 7 SD 09 01 D_BL lt 2 8762 m 4 898 33 500 RAS 607 VA 57 7 DAI_02 GNDIO3 gt 24 CS42528 CQ 55 CX_SDOUT SDTO 34 gt cs c m 25 Es 5 DALDI 55 SD_D10 EXT_D2 RN82 5 05 cS 25 52 RMCK MCKO gt 5 334 M AOUTB3 2 VDDIOB SD _ _03 Ag D_SR 54 SAI_SD0UT 50102 100 Vin 09 27 D_SR lt lt a AOUTB3 2 vis DAI SCLK1 5 43V3 3 ADUTA34 0 95 DAI_LRCK1 0_D12 EXT_D4 ADB g 0 88 lt cu 52 DGND S gt a lt ve GNDIOS 69 50 013 05 RN83 6 A7 son m WW 5 2 p_sw lt 4 AOUTB2 10 77 DAL LRCKE 49 SD_D14 EXT_D6 a 5 mul ADUTB24 so XP 50 015 07 R M 6 06 DAI_SCLK2 015 s Li D 5 lt 4 s RXP1 5VD 43V3 141 ESSE T lt 32 42 Bas ADS mh 005025990292 fas fee Ne dna ses R754 2 EXT 5 a T 04 adr 552 2 i D
76. The SDA pin is bidirectional for serial data transfer This pin is open drain driven and may be wire ORed with any number of other open drain or open collector devices DEVICE PAGE ADDRESSES A2 A1 A0 The A2 A1 and AO pins are device address inputs that are hard wired for the 24 and 24 02 As many as eight 1K 2K devices may be addressed on a single bus system device addressing is discussed in detail under the Device Addressing section The AT24C04 uses the A2 and A1 inputs for hard wire addressing and a total of four 4K devices may be addressed on a single bus system The 0 pin is a no connect The AT24CO08A only uses the A2 input for hardwire addressing and a total of two devices may be addressed on a single bus system The AO and A1 pins are no connects The AT24C16A does not use the device address pins which limits the number of devices on a single bus to one The AO A1 and A2 pins are no connects WRITE PROTECT WP The AT24C01A 02 04 08A 16A has a Write Protect pin that provides hardware data protection The Write Protect pin allows normal Read Write operations when connected to ground GND When the Write Protect pin is connected to Vcc the write protection feature is enabled and operates as shown in Table 2 Table 2 Write Protect Part of the Array Protected WP Pin Status 24C01A 24C02 24C04 24C08A 24C16A Full 1K Full 2K Full 4K Full 8K Full 16K Array Array Array Array A
77. gt 04 I D IP 021 AVCC 5 395 90 en P S ee MUX B3 gt D3 AGND ts 2 R1IX2 zo gt gt 9 J 022 osx o o xo09oo gt R7 _ 2 gt C946 2 RIX2 295 9 55 lt lt lt gt gt lt D_IP_D23 470 gt gt gt 2525cccuoonuotz B1 TENTATIVE gt gt gt Zixxx xe Ze x Q 20 1 _ gt 55 gt 28 5 5 5VV MUX_HS 3 MUX VS gt ics 8 R951 R952 9 2 L aiit 1 8K 1 8K 9VV 8 Ji T IW RON 100 Y 5254 ux RN5RZ50BA ots 5 575 ate elo 91 2750 2 8 2 555 0910 e uPA672T 2 sss 3 2 1 8946 A 3 535 1 1M z 43 3VV D_IP_PwR 25 3 1 x v 1 H a 8 gt HDMI_IP_INT z Ld 2 gt scot 2 gt e HD JP RST t I R944 22 1 1 779 eM NU ub 7 3 dama as B en eee ama IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE lo E 4 impedance layout 2 COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK HAVE SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS pug 2 i e 52 224 x 4 ac 1 gt N 68104042201 i
78. lf you have forgotten to plug in the EzSet EQ microphone the warning screen shown in Figure 55 will appear as a reminder Figure 55 EzSet EQ Warning to Plug in Microphone NOTE As shown in Figures 53 54 and 56 59 while Ezset EQ is in progress a Cancel setting is highlighted You may interrupt EzSet EQ at any time by simply pressing the oet Button What EzSet EQ Does EzSet EQ will send test signals to the various speakers and perform the measurements described in this section adjusting the AVR 3475 settings to match EzSet EQ s internal references set Master Volume Level EzSet EQ sends test tones to the front speakers and adjusts the system s volume level to enable it to take the remaining measurements correctly EzSet EQ uses the left front speaker to set the master volume level and then it proceeds directly to measur ing the speaker output levels Speaker Level During this test EzSet EQ ensures that all speakers sound equally loud at the listening position During a surround sound presentation it is common for the surround channels to sound less prominent or not to be used at all at times By setting the baseline channel levels correctly the AVR behaves as a blank canvas for the movie director to create special effects A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 56 will appear with the speaker position changing as EzSet EQ measures the levels for each speaker You may occasionally hear EzSet EQ send a tone bac
79. listen to the multichannel disc first select the analog video source input then select the 6 8 channel analog audio inputs and the AVR will retain the last video source you selected other than HDMI The AVR 347 is Simplay HD verified for compatibility via the connection with other Simplay HD verified products 2 Figure 4 repeated HDMI Connection Analog Video There are three types of analog video connections composite video o video and component video Composite video is the basic connection most commonly available The jack is usually color coded yellow and looks like an analog audio jack although it is important never to confuse the two Do not plug a composite video cable into an analog or coaxial digital audio jack or vice versa Both the chrominance color and luminance intensity components of the video signal are transmitted using a single cable See Figure 10 Composite video cable Figure 10 Composite Video S video or separate video transmits the chrominance and luminance components using separate wires contained within a single cable The AVR347 CONNECTIONS plug on an S video cable contains four metal pins plus a plastic guide pin Be careful to line up the plug correctly when you insert it into the jack on the receiver source or video display See Figure 11 Figure 11 S Video S video cable Component video
80. 13600 KTD600KG 25034230 KSA733CYT MC7815C MC7809 NJM7824 MC7805C L7805 L7815 NJM2391DL1 25 NJM2391DL1 33 LOW DROPOUT VOLTAGE REGULATOR KRC102S PIN FUNCTION 1 Emitter 1025 1 IN 2 Base KRC103S 2 GND 3 Collector KRC107S 3 OUT KTC4075GR KTA20146R N CHANNEL MOS FET ARRAY uPA672T PIN CONFIGURATION SOT 223 PKG FRONT VIEW SOT 23 Package AD1580 LM1117 REGULATOR 1 Source 1 S1 FUNCTION 2 Gate1 61 E NC OR V 1 Adj Gnd 3 Drain2 D2 v 2 2 Vout 4 Source 2 52 3 Vin 5 Gate2 G2 6 Drain 1 D1 NC NO CONNECT Marking MA TO 263 D2 PKG FRONT VIEW KP1010 photocoupler 1 4 1 Anode PIN FUNCTION 2 Cathode 1 Adj Gnd 2 Vout 9 9 3 Emitter 3 Vin 4 Collector 204 AVR347 harman kardon ULTRA SMALL PACKAGE HIGH PRECISION VOLTAGE DETECTOR S 808xxC Series Rev 3 2 00 B Pin Configurations SC 82AB Table 7 Top view Pin No Pin name Pin description 5 OUT Voltage detection output pin Voltage input pin No connection 1 2 2 GND pin 1 The NC pin is electrically open The NC pin can be connected to VDD or VSS Figure 4 SOT 23 5 Top view Pin name Pin description Voltage detection output pin Voltage input pin 3 VSS GND pin 5 4 1 The NC pin is electrically open 1 2 3 The NC pin can be connected to VDD or VSS Figure 5 SOT 89 3 Top view in No Pin description Voltage detection output pin
81. 2 5 e ca gt BN20 29 3 fl S WHT O ee li 4 9 0902 a C916 d N SNP RE D 1 5 S q gt ovo ET90 900 6 60 96 Td DGND 7 RED _STHEV _ n E 5 e 9 ono lt GREEN DO 1 BEK ee Z A I e ill Oe BN97 0 CEN OF sie hi kardon 12290 USING FAN ar ee IT ET91 22 N e lt a a wo CN e Li 8 e 9 06 4 S 8 gt ND sgg C2 1 e 4 j H o 12 i nO oe i 4 capu Du 7 C e w o lt E D o o 2 e c 0819 Q818R856 0820 0824 0516 Q511 531 0556 0541 0519 0514 R5540559 054469 62 0518 0518 5330558 0543 0520 0515 R535 0560 054 Q512 R552 0557 0542 0822 8218858 0823 0825 gt 6 gt J147 C 1 5 154 5 J160 Cams 168 169 5 8 152 Cc o
82. 2 X Do not care L Low H High BA Bank Address RA Row Address CA Column Address Opcode Operand Code NOP No Operation Entry H L Rev 0 1 Nov 2003 12 158 AVR347 harman kardon la HY57V161610E Vi 2 Banks x 512K x 16 Bit Synchronous DRAM DESCRIPTION THE Hynix HY57V161610E is a 16 777 216 bits CMOS Synchronous DRAM ideally suited for the main memory and graphic appli cations which require large memory density and high bandwidth HY57V161610E is organized as 2banks of 524 288x16 HY57V161610E is offering fully synchronous operation referenced to a positive edge clock All inputs and outputs are synchronized with the rising edge of the clock input The data paths are internally pipelined to achieve very high bandwidth All input and output voltage levels are compatible with LVTTL Programmable options include the length of pipeline Read latency of 1 2 or 3 the number of consecutive read or write cycles initi ated by a single control command Burst length of 1 2 4 8 or full page and the burst count sequence sequential or interleave A burst of read or write cycles in progress can be terminated by a burst terminate command or can be interrupted and replaced by a new burst read or write command on any cycle This pipeline design is not restricted by a 2N rule FEATURES Single 3 0V to 3 6V power supply e Auto refresh and self refresh All device pins are compatible with LVT TL interface e 4096 refresh cyc
83. 5 5 5 Figure 1 Pin Diagram Individual pin functions are described beginning on page 37 Sil DS 0118 A 146 AVR347 harman kardon Sil 9031 HDMI PanelLink Cinema Receiver Data Sheet Silicon Image System Applications A N Receiver In an A V receiver audio video is accepted as inputs from one or more sources A single Sil 9031 provides two HDMI input ports These can be selected and combined into a single HDMI output through a Sil 9030 transmitter EDID o PROM 5 9 2 Digital Video e gt Sil 9031 Sil 9030 DDC 5 JL 5 8 25 SPDIF 2 EDID MCLK 125 PROM 2 Controller Audio DSP Audio DAC udio Other Audio Sources TE Speakers Figure 2 A V Receiver Block Diagram Sil DS 0118 A 147 AVR347 Sil 9031 HDMI PanelLink Cinema Receiver Data Sheet Functional Description The Sil 9031 provides a complete solution for receiving HDMI compliant digital audio and video Specialized audio and video processing is available within the Sil 9031 to easily and cost effectively add HDMI capability to consumer electronics devices such as A V Receivers digital TVs plasma displays LCD TVs and projectors Figure 3 shows the functional blocks of the chip DSDAO DSCLO DSDA1 DSCL1 R1XC R1X0 1 1 R1X2 ROXC ROXO ROX1 ROX2 ROPWR5V R1PWR5V PanelLink TMDS Digi
84. 5523 843 5 L 8213 5 7 303 BAS e 1 3 5 7 E 5 wen cepe see es 20 m ni 25 3 3VVl OOOOU UUUU JU 2 m IC81 lt S saa gece CD a a 1 8RPLL CVIM24C32WMN6TP 5 5 8 3 5 2 2 SH vun 88 0801 r802 7 ES 5 279 12 158159 200 gt ii t t one 1 zs 1 2 1801 805 8 4 S SCLK t WU sun s ols 5 MODEL Po de 4 E 823420 8505505 805805305 u 1 HDMI CONTROL GPIO 9189 861 8618 1 1 2 T REED SEEN 1 DESIGN CHECK APPROVE DRAWING NO 2352 5 ST 8 85 W Y Y 1915S 6M 6 5 240 PS Tr FROM 07 03 14 07 03 14 07 03 14 HUDSON 2 AVR347 harman kardon TO FRONT PCB IPOD PCB TO XM amp CN72 C774 C714 39p 0 4 332MHz TEST Vssd CIN FLOUT Vssa HVILC72723M Vddd MODE RST Vdda MPXIN RDSID RDDA RDCL READY 1 74 5VD TO VIDEO PCB OSD_H 10B01_INPUT IPOD_V_SEL
85. 78 X N gt 9 5 C33 7 550597 SS 0377 R396 Tit 4 o m 2 AE COX G1 pe e INi 5 B 25S 5 To 1 2 m oL 05 997 2522 0221 0222 AVR345 2 2 0 R501 J 6 l 385 5 etd 74557025 D R502 9 d DOD JE JE TI ze s 0 16 o oc jio 5 5 SS R318 gt f ue Su 8 i i D C 1 a C28 BR V R313 eee R786 C384 OJR GN e e e 1 gt RN92 M 383 3 6 m p x A OR 2 dk 1 E SS a 4 zi 390 2 T 5 SN C392 gt m 7 L N FRE 71 _ Y Ei 7 c DAT L 30 m TT D 2826382 9 E mi e 09 Ico C381 27 21 EIE C701 7 C715 DE T 30 C766 Au B e 5 70 ae C391 20 0706 5 Spices EN UU 2 i n zb 3 7 R7 CN15 1 9 11913 S 75 84 e e gt 2 7 N C76 S RE S J C 7 c mu DEUS Sa t e Eie PI 5 nos a man kardon u 8 0mm 11 25mm 102 2 LAD m 2 Z y AVR347 harman kardon
86. AVR347 harman kardon Source Digital Input Speaker Size Tone Mode Message Display Indicators Select Setup Channel Level Navigation Surround Mode Indicators speaker Channel Delay Volume Adjust Input Indicators t s 5 AMA AVR Volu Tone Mode Speaker Channel Digital Select Delay harman kardon eb bem Headphone Power Surround Tuning Preset Stations Jack EzSet EQ Digital Video 4 Indicator Mode Microphone Audio Inputs O Input Optional 4 and Analog Audio Standby On Main Power Surround Tuner Band Source Tuning Coaxial 4 Video 4 Inputs Switch switch Select Select Mode Video Inputs NOTE make it easier to follow the instructions throughout the manual that refer to this illustration a copy of this page may be downloaded from the Product Support section at www harmankardon com N AVR347 harman kardon REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS AM and FM Antenna Terminals Connect the included AM and FM antennas to their respective terminals for radio reception XM Antenna Jack Plug in an XM antenna module here The XM antenna module is purchased separately and should specify that it is for home use with an XM Ready product You will need to subscribe to the XM service which is available separately and activate the service for your antenna module XM service is not available in Alaska and Hawaii Front Center and S
87. DVCC DVSS 9 9 9 9 P52 AN2 ia 8 9 18 9 9 P37 BOOT 3e RW P35 B 7 m VREFH adu 1 3 c 1 gt VREFL AVSS AVCC LS 2 s x z D El 27 7 23 69 P26 A6 A22 68 P25 A5 A21 P24 A4 A20 P23 A3 A19 P22 A2 A18 Top view 64 QFP100 P80 TBOINO INT T 0 1 1 0 1 5 57515157515 olol clu a Blas 5 515 5 5 5 5 D gt gt 1 gt gt gt gt ziziziziz ziz al8 amp lzisloals njolol lo 5 5 i pe gt Qo gt e Q c Mi 2 4 1 P85 TB1IN1 INT C annnoannnpnnnnm nnm nmm gt 2 M jj 510 51 C 1 4 j RESIST SENSI alal lelai 5 sl 818189 8 8 8 5 8 en X CTS P11 AD9 A9 PSe TB1OUTO 1 P92 SCLKO CTSQ 2 pum 2 CTS 53 PAVADQIAG _ ws 27 x ET NN Figure 2 1 1 Pin assignment diagram 100 pin LOFP 166 AVR347 harman kardon 22 Pin Names and Functions The names of the input output pins and their functions are described below Table 2 2 1 Pin names and functions Table 221 Pin names and functions 1 3 MEN PinName of Pins 7
88. E ri S f j CUPii9132 T TT i Capacitors NENNEN ee ___ ___ _ __ Semiconductors ed M NN 1 OoOo O Resistors puer 86 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator PattNumber Description 4 22 ee ie 2 oat RES cri e j Miscellaneous j A BUS CUP11913 3 EEE SS p Ir Capacitors _ o ES 142222 EE Er fee Semiconductors _ j C 4 2 S o o 87 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator PartNumber ty 4 22 ABUS PCB CI PCB SSS eee 3 moa piobE zENER E NEN NEN Resistors ___ ___ ___ __ h _ Miscellaneous O S ____ gt RUD MARBRE ACK on PCB CUP11915 E OEE SS eee 88 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator PartNumber_ Description ________ _ ____ _ _ _ ____ ____ ___ __ ee PCB CUP11915 aos omae oae cii i 89 AVR347 harman kardon Ref EE Number Description 24 22 HURSONTHEND PCB CUP11915 reem H
89. H 1 B5 05 88 lt AGND B p i po 3 a Te B7 s 2 Y AVCC gt D_IP_D7 955 H t e e 2 2 na t ROX1 T H There are not these parts ROXI AGND GO ve jr 02 i AVCC ps 1 R974 0971 H D2 SHIELD i ROX2 300 0 D2 1 I D 9 1 ROX24 gt D_IP_011 01 e i a ESE SAZASAZAZASAZAS Dog impedance layout 4 AGND e 1 1 D1 SHIELD TMDSPCND 1 300 D1 oe o oo o l 1 ica IP 012 00 PGB0010603 x 8 El RSVD_A 65 b Pon gt 989955558323288322 89 vccz DO SHIELD USS RSS see noe ea esee Sass MEL AVCC gt D_IP_D14 MUX_G2 5 AE 5 AGND 20 option Do not use these parts RIXC gt D_IP_D15 MUX gt 09 TX24 CK z BIC WX gt DCK TX2 cm CK SHIELD AGND gt D_IP_CLK MUX GO D8 AVCC 4 1 CK AVCC 5 WUX 87 D7 TX 1 Suo RIX0 Rd ha wx B6 gt D6 r NG R1X0 gt D_IP_D17 T DDC CLK MULTI LAB R2 MUX_B5 gt D5 AGND R3 gt D_IP_D18 ovce 55 X04 I T DDC DATA D_IP_D19 2006 02 08 AVGE OGND am x0 597 enp R1X1 c926 e CGND AVCC tat 1 1 ei p 8 XC pne HP DE AGND IRIS i
90. L Disable Chip Select Pin in serial mode Auto Setting Mode Pin in parallel mode L Manual Setting Mode Auto Setting Mode CCLK Control Data Clock Pin in serial mode DIFO Audio Data Interface Format Pin in parallel mode CDTI Control Data Input Pin in serial mode P S I Parallel Serial Select Pin Internal pull up pin L Serial control mode H Parallel control mode AOUTR Rch Analog Output Pin AOUTL O Lch Analog Output Pin I2 VCOM Common Voltage Pin VDD 2 Normally connected to VSS with a 0 1uF ceramic capacitor in parallel with a IOuF electrolytic cap 13 yss Ground Pin 02 14 Power Supply Pin 02 15 DZFR O Rch Data Zero Input Detect Pin 16 DZFL jLchDataZeroInptDetectPin 4444 Note All input pins except pull up pin should not be left floating 50176 00 2002 09 190 harman kardon TALCX32 LOW VOLTAGE CMOS QUAD 2 INPUT OR GATE 5V TOLERANT INPUTS HIGH SPEED tpp 5 2ns MAX at Vec POWER DOWN PROTECTION ON INPUTS AND OUTPUTS mg SYMMETRICAL OUTPUT IMPEDANCE lon 24 MIN at Voc 3V PCI BUS LEVELS GUARANTEED 24 mA m BALANCED PROPAGATION DELAYS tpLH mg OPERATING VOLTAGE RANGE Vcc OPR 2 0V to 3 6V 1 5V Data Retention PIN AND FUNCTION COMPATIBLE WITH 74 SERIES 32 LATCH UP PERFORMANCE EXCEEDS 500mA JESD 17 ESD PERFORMANCE HBM gt 2000V MIL STD 883 method 30
91. LSAING BEER RES 556 OV EBATNO sam o L2INO L3INO R3INO DJ gt HHEEHEEHEREFEREHEREEH DCLAI sett DCRAIDCRAA LAINO RAINO L5INO L6INO R6INO L7INO R7INO L8lINO R8INO L9INO R9INO 1101 Input Selector De gt oLSOUT Input Selector RSOUT oLBOUT jouueyy o kBOUT SWOUT i 7 j i 3 3 B 5 2 Jj 5 rig TL cud LL TA O DIS ITMS 5 eld Ao 121 AVR347 EPIN CONFIGURAITON Z 6 CO bh NS TT 50 1 DEED mina 1 TL 81 a N Sa L TL EE TTL L TI 31 141 100 LLL so ss so s 6 recam mum s GND 6 s IN ume o omn 65 moar 99 xm FN VDDOUT 9 m 6 m o 9 mu 4 non n Mum 99 5 m 49 m 99 1
92. Microsoft and Xbox are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries SACD is a trademark of Sony Corporation The Simplay HD logo and the Simplay Simplay HD and Simplay Labs trademarks are owned by silicon Image Inc and are used under license from Silicon Image Inc and or Simplay Labs LLC TiVo is a registered trademark of TiVo Inc XM and XM Ready are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio 1 Instruction manual ass y Accessories 2 Package Drawing 6 MICROPHONE ASS Y AVR347 lt gt P gt 1 MANUAL ASS Y POLY BAG CARD WARRANTY AM LOOP ANTENNA ASS Y BATTERY ASS Y 3 6 7 ASS Y C2 3 FOAM PAD L BATTERY ASS Y MANUAL INSTRUCTION FM 1 POLE ANT UL REMOCON ASS Y ZONE2 4 FOAM PAD R 9 O 5 AVR347 CORD POEWR UL SHEET GUIDE STAPLE eae 6 BOX OUT CARTON mau CARD WARRANTY em MERE 3 UJ IMAGE BROCHURES wa COVER ASS Y on REMOCON TRANSMITTER ASS Y O UJ UJ udi lt ness Le 5 BAG POLY eee 3 IMAGE BROCHURES REMOCON ASS Y CARTAVR347 MICROPHONE 55 CJXAVR340MICRO MICROPHONE ASS Y AVR347 harman k
93. Now press the DVD button twice quickly At the first press the button will light red indicating that the remote is in DVD mode On the second press the button will turn green indicating that the remote is now in CD mode If you press a different selector and retur to the DVD CD Selector you will observe that the remote is still in CD mode Each Input Selector has been preprogrammed to control certain types of components with only the codes specific to each brand and model changing depending on which product code is programmed The device types programmed into each selector may not be changed however you may program the HDMI 1 and 2 selectors with the DVD Cable Satellite or VCR PVR device type DVD Controls DVD players and recorders CD Controls CD players and recorders Tape Controls cassette decks Video 1 Controls VCRs TiVo and PVRs Video 2 Controls cable and satellite television set top boxes Video 3 Controls televisions and other video displays Video 4 Controls televisions and other video displays HDMI 1 and 2 Each code set controls a source device VCR PVR DVD player or cable satellite set top box connected to one of these two inputs XM Controls the AVR functions for XM Satellite Radio The Bridge DMP Controls an iPod docked in The Bridge Any given button may have different functions depending on which component is being controlled Some buttons are labeled with these functions For example the Sleep
94. Press this button again to switch bands AM FM or XM AVR347 IRE HERES he 14 D D rom mo Figure 14 mm Input oelection Radio stations may be selected in one of four ways see Figure 75 1 If you know the frequency number enter it directly by first pressing the Direct Button on the remote and then using the Numeric Keys 2 After you have programmed Preset stations See below either enter the Preset number 1 through 30 using the remote or use the Preset Stations Buttons front panel or remote to scroll through the list of presets 3 In Auto tuning mode with each press of the Tuning Buttons front panel or remote the AVR 347 will scan in the chosen direction until a station with acceptable signal strength is detected Press the Tuning Button again to stop scanning 4 n Manual tuning mode with each press of the Tuning Buttons the AVR 347 will tune the next frequency increment 0 1 MHz for FM or for AM in the selected direction Press and hold the Tuning Button for faster scanning Figure 75 Tuning a Station Press the Tuning Mode Button TUN M on the remote to switch between Auto and Manual tuning modes See Figure 76 When an station has been tuned pressing the Tuning Mode Button will switch between stereo and mono tuning which may improve reception of weaker stations Figure 76 Tuning Mode To store a station in one of the 30 pres
95. S VIDEO INPUT COMPONENT INPUT C 6M 07 V CONVERSION See UCL 6 CH OUTPUT HDMI MCLK DIR MCLK HDMI MCLK K 9 DIR CONT K DSP CONT FUNC SW CONT 9 VOL CONT gt MUTE CONT F PH DET gt TUNER CONT CONT D S VID Y g etd ie ST202 BW ed MONITO 2 6dB DRV S VIDEO MONITOR REMOTE IN ROM TOSHIBA 16BIT u COM CARR OUT MULTI R C IN POWER AMP CONT I CONT O MULTI R C OUT 6dB gt Cb3 COMP_Cb_ADV7322 OUTPUT Cri O9 IOO OO 09 FOR BACK UP MEMORY KEY VR ENC MOD ENC STANDBY POWER DOWN 2 HUDSON COMMUNICATION OSD VFD CONTROL 51 harman kardon 2 1 AVR347 345 BLOCK DIAGRAM 8dB FRONT L 92 C r r a a 1 I MAIN AMP P_AMP H_PHONE OUT or MIC_INPUT FL FR CEN c r LINE amp TO VIDEO PART TO DSP PART 50 45V L TO IPOD PART REGULATOR 15v 4 19
96. Signals are presented differentially to the delta sigma AINL 16 modulators the AINL pins VQ 17 Quiescent Voltage Output Filter connection for internal quiescent reference voltage FILT 18 Positive Voltage Reference Output Positive reference voltage for the internal sampling circuits REFGND 19 Reference Ground nput Ground reference for the internal sampling circuits AOUTA1 36 37 Differential Analog Output Output The full scale differential analog output level is specified in the AOUTB1 35 34 Analog Characteristics specification table AOUTA2 32 33 AOUTB2 31 30 28 29 27 26 AOUTA4 22 23 AOUTBA 21 20 VA 24 Analog Power Input Positive power supply for the analog section VARX 41 AGND 25 Analog Ground nput Ground reference Should be connected to analog ground 40 MUTEC 38 Mute Control Output The Mute Control pin outputs high impedance following an initial power on con dition or whenever the PDN bit is set to a 1 forcing the codec into power down mode The signal will remain in a high impedance state as long as the part is in power down mode The Mute Control pin goes to the selected active state during reset muting or if the master clock to left right clock frequency ratio is incorrect This pin is intended to be used as a control for external mute circuits to prevent the clicks and pops that can occur in any single supply
97. TRUTH TABLE ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS Parameter 7 5 _ Absolute Maximum Ratings are those values beyond which damage to the device may occur Functional operation under these conditions is not implied RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS e Supply Voltage 2055 VW input Voltage 0to55 Output Voltage te V Operating Temperature 55 to 125 EN Input Rise and Fall Time note 1 3 3 0 3V 1500 5 0 0 5 0 to 20 ns V 1 Vix from 30 to 70 of Vcc q 2 8 188 AVR347 harman kardon AK4384 106dB 192kHz 24 Bit 2ch gt DAC The AK4384 offers the perfect mix for cost and performance based audio systems Using AKM s multi bit architecture for its modulator the AK4384 delivers a wide dynamic range while preserving linearity for improved THD N performance The AK4384 integrates a combination of SCF and CTF filters increasing performance for systems with excessive clock jitter The 24 Bit word length and 192kHz sampling rate make this part ideal for a wide range of applications including DVD Audio The AK4384 is offered in a space saving 16pin TSSOP package FEATURES Sampling Rate Ranging from 8kHz to 192kHz 128 times Oversampling Normal Speed Mode 64 times Oversampling Double Speed Mode 32 tim
98. The Bridge Main Menu Screen MUSIC This line allows you to navigate the audio materials stored on your iPod PHOTOS VIDEOS Selecting this item allows you to play still images or videos stored on the iPod The screen shown in Figure 80 will appear directing you to operate the iPod s own controls directly to play images and videos You may use the AVR 34 remote instead of the iPod s controls to navigate it Visual materials will be displayed on a video display connected to the AVR NOTE After selecting video photo viewing the AVR may remain in Manual Mode even after undocking the iPod or switching to another source input and back again To return to normal operation with the AVR remote in The Bridge mode press and hold the Menu Button AVR347 IPOD Manual Mode Please select movie photo using buttons on your Figure 80 The Bridge Playing Images and Videos SETTINGS This line accesses the Settings menu shown in Figure 81 The items in this menu enable you to use the Shuffle and Repeat functions on the iPod You may also set the Resume function which resumes play of a selection from the point at which it was stopped NOTE iTunes allows you to set certain selections to always or never remember playback position or to be skipped in Shuffle mode The AVR 3475 settings cannot override these iTunes settings The Br idge Settings Figure 81 The Bridge Settings Menu Screen Be
99. conforming to HDTV high definition television video conforming to SMPTE ITU R BT 601 ITU R 656 274M or SMPTE 296M and SMPTE240M HD high definition video 1 720 10801 10351 YCrCb SD PS or HD component digital video EDTV enhanced definition television 525p 625p YPrPb SD PS or HD component analog video PS progressive scan video conforming to SMPTE 293M ITU R BT 1358 BTAT 1004EDT V2 or ITU R 13621362 ADV7322 PIN CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS m La o x I gt AN o Lu Ll gt F IN UI E Vpp io 48 S BLANK TESTO 2 RsET1 TEST1 3 46 VREF YO 4 45 COMP1 1 5 44 DAC A 2 6 43 DAC B ADV7322 TOP VIEW 42 DAC Y4 8 Not to Scale 41 Y5 9 40 AGND Vpp 10 39 DAC D DGND 11 38 DAC E Ye 12 DACF Y7 36 COMP2 TEST2 14 35 TESTS 15 34 EXT_LF 16 33 RESET 17 18 j 19 20 21 22 123 1124 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 29580285298 666665 5 J gt gt lt lt o o CY I gt Qo 2 IQ in E z oc 185 AVR347 harman kardon ADV7322 Table 6 Pin Function Descriptions Mnemonic Input Output Function DGND AGND CLKIN_A CLKIN_B COMP1 COMP2 DACA DAC B DAC DAC D DAC DAC F P_HSYNC P_VSYNC P_BL
100. d m N N j 24 e amp 103 V 4 V ehh P i Lor 9900006 he pa Ads 12 e 11 25mm R ey e e p S b NEM 4 101 AVR347 harman kardon 248 0mm 4 ADJ ADJ2 0 7 N b CUP119135 35 lt 0 P Uu r js lt O 3 Q e 000 f R400 O C401 e A40 C 45 BN e n 432 C4448 C TET e ES 9R480 t CO a 5 C443 in lt gt 2 57 RA 59 3 58 46 5 A3005 x v CUP11913 6 27 N uopipy m 23 1 E gt JK17 421 04 io E e 7 5 0 A30 2 ds gt y e om gt Ze T C 2c R0 9mm e wee eS i c 454
101. f 1kHz Channel Gain Balance 1 0 5 dB Volume 0dB Vin 1Vrms f 1kHz Cnannel Gain Balance 2 Volume 60d8 1 0 dB Vin 1Vrms f 1kHz Maximum Attenuation Volume 95dB A weight 95 dB dB Output Noise Voltage V VOUS OR es 9 Rg 00 A weight 5 6u 17 81 Vems MCN 1Vrms f 1kHz 5 Total Harmonic Distortion Volume 0dB BW 400 30kHz 0 005 0 05 Vo 1Vims TZ 1kHz A weight dB Volume 0dB Rg 0Q 170 Channel Separation EX Vin 1Vrms fz1kHz AVR347 SZA harman kardon HCF4053B TRIPLE 2 CHANNEL ANALOG MULTIPLEXER DEMULTIPLEXER LOW ON RESISTANCE 1250 Typ OVER 15V p p SIGNAL INPUT RANGE FOR Vpp VEE 15V HIGH OFF RESISTANCE CHANNEL LEAKAGE 100pA Typ at Vee 18V BINARY ADDRESS DECODING ON CHIP HIGH DEGREE OF LINEARITY lt 0 5 DISTORTION TYP at fis 1KHz Vis 5 V Vpp Vss gt 10V RL VERY LOW QUIESCENT POWER DISSIPATION UNDER ALL DIGITAL CONTROL INPUT AND SUPPLY CONDITIONS 0 2 uW Typ at Vpp Vss Vpp 5 VEE 10V MATCHED SWITCH CHARACTERISTICS Ron 50 Typ FOR x VEE 15V m WIDE RANGE OF DIGITAL AND ANALOG SIGNAL LEVELS DIGITAL 3 to 20 ANALOG TO 20V p p QUIESCENT CURRENT SPECIF UP TO 20V 5V 10V AND 15V PARAMETRIC RATINGS INPUT LEAKAGE CURRENT l 100nA MAX AT Vpp 18V TA 25 100 TESTED FOR QUIESCENT CURRENT MEETS ALL REQUIREMENTS OF JEDEC JESD13B STANDARD SPEC
102. harman kardon IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTE Installing multiroom system very often requires running various cables inside walls Always comply with the appropriate safety codes when installing con cealed wiring The AVR 3475 multiroom connections should installed per the requirements of all applicable state and local building codes as well as NEC National Electrical Code requirements Check with your local authorities as needed to ensure that all wiring inside walls is installed in compliance with the proper standards Failure to do so may present a potential Safety hazard you have any doubt about your ability to work with electrical and telecommunications wiring you are advised to hire a professional licensed electrician or custom installer to install the multiroom system Connect an external amplifier to the Multirnom Audio Outputs see Figure 40 Figure 40 Multiroom Audio Outputs It is recommended that you place the amplifier in the same room as the AVR 34 so that a shorter length of interconnect cable is used with a long run of speaker wire to the remote room rather than placing the amplifier in the remote room which necessitates a long run of interconnect cable that would be subject to signal degradation Depending on the number of channels available in your amplifier you may distribute the AVR 3475 analog audio signal to a single pair of speakers for 2 channel listening to several pairs of speakers located in s
103. nig gla ols ail SCN om utm x 8 8 STE 37 5 89 S 5 ake n 1903 E204 L403 ols ddp o UM 25866555 1 RS 27s 12920142 12920142 f HLZ9Z014Z REVISION 2 4 6 us 282 5 5 30535 275205 2 22 875 2 2 4 1 5 2 7 e e o e 518 5 5 543575 3V3 5 3V e R503 rcm erue E e 1 R501 Option Do not use i CRJIOCJOROT 2 1 R509 e 100 l MODEI e E 100 l l T DESIGN CHECK APPROVE DRAWING NO Tl LAB option not use p option rni 100 not use 4 2007 01 18 M S K W Y Y H W L 214 07 01 18 07 01 18 07 01 18 MULTI AVR347 harman kardon AVR145 245 345 147 247 347 PART
104. recorder to the or digital audio output jacks on the AVR No video connections are needed T Bridge With Harman Kardon s optional The Bridge you can listen to audio or view videos stored on your iPod not included use your AVR 347 AVR347 INSTALLATION remote control to operate the iPod and even charge the iPod while i s docked in The Bridge simply plug the proprietary cable from The Bridge into the special The Bridge DMP connector on the rear of the AVR 347 See Figure 29 Refer to the owner s manual for The Bridge to select the appropriate insert to match your iPod Figure 29 The Bridge DMP Connector Step Five Connect Video Display Only video connections should be made between the receiver and your video display TV unless your TV is the source for your television programming see Video 3 Source on page 20 lf you used an HDMI video connection for any of your sources then con nect the HDMI Output on the AVR to an HDMI input on your video display See Figure 30 Consult the owner s guide for your television to learn the proper procedure for disabling or muting the audio Unless you have a non HDMI source device that outputs 10801 or higher video an analog component video connection see note below no other video connections are required thanks to the AVR 3475 ability to transcode analog video signals to HDMI and you may proceed to Step Six IMPORTANT NOTE The AVR 347 cannot
105. 1 2255 8 t mro Ow bead j 3 xd 1 Sasa l Q68 1 9601 e 1 iR RIGHT e M 2 Q604 R674 5 ena A1268GR R671 0681 A 1 1 SR 225r x o e o 1 BNO 25 2 En 2231 e 5 NIB HS post cus C2785Y 1 R956 R957 3 1 So x 910 NNW S58 559 ssa 3e Lz 5 2 25 229 524 1 9 lt lt 259 25 M 5 a 5 1 1 0514 519 225 BSN de C2 85Y MON 1 390K 9 5x ft Lo SR 10 50V R579 r a C 10 50V MN 6576 ZW E aqa STs i LO 1 e e e e e gt a s S 5 5 E P 10 7 T 5 C501 10 T 2 1 SB 25 0 51615 NY J 9 8 an oS 5 68 0511 0516 S 17 0320058 m mr mt 29 C3200GR 6320068 2 3551 gla 992 esx 6 352 25 5890 F LEFT e e e 1 1 9 1 AO 5 228 825 2 2 asx els 5 2 2225 259 3225 828 855 9 528 gt 5 5 Spe 525 525 2254 228 824 1 2 3 55 toed FL x o o o 1 07 e to 55 a to T s Re mon GS 0215 529 528 S 5 1 n o mM gt gt 5 1 PSA ex 2 S 2281 S E 5 x o6T5 ESS RSS
106. 16 SDA 28 AUX2 40 Pr IN4 5 GND 17 GND 29 AUX3 41 V 6 Y IN1 18 DGND 30 Pr OUT1 42 Y IN3 7 V 19 VREG 31 GND 43 GND 8 Pb IN1 20 V 32 Pb OUT1 44 Pb IN3 9 V 21 Pr OUT2 33 GND 45 V 10 Pr IN1 22 PORT 34 Y OUT1 46 Pr IN3 11 GND 23 PORT O 35 V 47 GND 12 POI TS 24 Pb OUT2 36 Y IN4 48 Y IN2 118 AVR347 harman kardon NJW1321 BEQUIVALENT CIRCUIT FUNCTION VOLTAGE Y Pb Pr Input RGB Input XM Y OUT1 Pb OUT1 Pr OUT1 Y Pb Pr Output 47V Y OUT2 RGB Output Pb OUT2 Pr OUT2 Logic input terminal OV Auxiliary 3 values voltage 1 9V output terminal 5 0V 119 AVR347 harman kardon NJW1321 NAME FUNCTION INSIDE EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT VOLTAGE Slave address setting terminal clock terminal data terminal Reference voltage terminal Supply voltage terminal Ground terminal Ground terminal 120 AVR347 harman kardon NJW1197FC2 S CHANNEL ELECTRONIC VOLUME WITH INPUT SELECTOR STRUCTURE Bi CMOS CATEGORIES 3D Surround amp Sound Enhancement PACKAGE OUTLINE QFP100 C2 SOLDERING METHOD For this device soldering method is recommended Reflow NOTE E ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS Ta 25 C Power Supply Voltage Maximum Input Voltage Power Dissipation Note ELA JJEDEC STANDARD Test board 76 2 x 114 3 x 1 6mm 2layer FR 4 mounting IBLOCK DIAGRAM LAINO EE N EEEESEEREE
107. 2 85 2 BN84 2P BN83 2P BN82 2P BN81 2P oum E m __ J iow _ 0209 COP BN95 3P BN20 5P 5 31 M m U amp N P U B d 33 gt FAN FAN CN22 6P _ CN18 5P HEAT SINK ASS Y 4 4 uU 1 1 9 1 1 CN72 17P CUP11910 6 ae gt VOL amp MIC B d CUP11913 5 RDS B d FRONT B d EUR ONLY BN85 3P CN88 4P BN92 5P A eee oux BNIO 4P CUI TS es PT i 2007 03 14 KEY B d BN89 4P REVISION 2 4 6 1 3 5 7 SCHEMATIC DIAGRA MODEL AVRS4 DESIGN CHECK APPROVE DRAWING NO MICE A M MEZ NE WIRING DIAG 218 07 03 14 07 03 14 07 03 14 11905 0
108. 206 AVR347 RNSRZSOBA PIN CONFIGURATION e SOT 23 5 5 4 PIN DESCRIPTION PinNo Symbol Description Ground Pin Input Pin Output Pin No Connection Chip Enable Pin ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS harman kardon RN5RZ mamme nA i 207 AVR347 harman kardon
109. 3 5 QUPO7GATSSIY 97055 CNY 5VX 5 2 5 AGND ___ XM_MCLK MCLK 5VV XM_LRLK 10 16V R483 0460 XM L XM BCLK BICK X e 933 492 1 5K o 10 16 5 2 5 DATA SDTI 255 met o 5VX 3 x LRCK 5575258 x x BY agx gt 225 E Swe e e E 2 3 Sye S S855 4384 gt S ens X AGND 9775 ses 8 5 5 STe 559 S 5 5 2 XM MUTE x x x o 5 5 R486 10 16V R484 C499 XM R g 8 8 ws amp e e e 44 e 115860 5 L 10K C493 1 5K 10 16V amp ef x a R528 LSDP_TXRX MODEMS c HSDP_EN R516 22K AGND 1 RN51 58 5 CRJ104DJ101T e 2K VSS x vss avy XM_RXD i TX OUT gt gt lt R515 22K C502 VDD 5 i VDD C511 0 1 e e e r amp D a e 4 SC_RX_IN a m HSDP DATA 220 0 vss 1 51 vss 5 6VX XM_IRQ gt 5VX COMMAND_SEL HVIXMDTIC 5 TEST e C503 2 m XS 45 1584MHz IRQ 5 OSC IN e Mss E 212 ry VDD e Tt e 45 1584MHz Variable E ariabie D404 4 RESET z 2 2 05 oU ac T lt e e SLAVE SEL S 88 58 VSS e 0 xb 1 54 Svs HVDRBIGOL60TE25 XOO A epee EC 1 6 5 3V sla BP OOM
110. 5 8729 SCP1_SDA MODEL OPTION TABLE ABUS IR p ids MODEL OP A PIN48 OP B PIN98 OP_C PIN52 0730 2 AVRI45 147 HIGH R792 LOW R791 LOW R712 lt HP_MUTE2 lt gt lt AKRESET FUNC AVR245 LOW R793 LOW R791 LOW R7 2 lt FUNC MUTE e 1197 DATA REMOTES OUT ONE OPE LOW R791 OT OPTION 1197_CLK MUTET FONEREDONN S 3 m Mrs AVR132 LOW R793 IGH R790 LOW R712 lt 197 MUTE 8792 POWER_MUTE gt 3 1159 DATA HP_MUTE gt AVR144 146 G R792 IG R790 LOW R7 2 poe lt MUETI MUTE SB MUTE 3 MULTI MUTE1 AVR145 230 GH R792 LOW R791 IGH R711 AVR245 230 LOW R793 LOW R791 IGH R711 PULL_UP AVR347 HIGH R792 LOW R791 OT OPTION GPIO Input Out Port without pull up resistor AVR247 LOW R793 LOW R791 OT OPTION AVR345 230 HIGH R792 HIGH R790 OT OPTION AVR245 CVIM24C32WMN6TP 5VD HVI74ACTO4MTR 1091 0000000 5VD Z x a gt e GND x 27228825 i 55 2 2 3 5VD R706 1 lt MPX OUT 5 Y Wohm 225 8 8 2 zi RDS_CLK l R708 Ros g 100 8407 RDS_DATA 3 RDS_DATA O cms
111. APPROV D RAWING NO 007 03 14 oF Duk LER MANC PN 07 05 14 07 05 14 07 03 14 19115 MAIN p AVR347 harman kardon INPUT 1 INPUT 2 HP DET T5V GND DDC DATA DDC CLK NC CE REMOTE CK ELD CK DO ELD DO D1 ELD CK SH CE REMOTE CK ELD CK JK91 JK92
112. Before beginning eliminate extraneous background noise that might affect the results such as noisy air conditioning to avoid making any loud noises while running EzSet EQ IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTE During the EzSet EQ procedure a series of very loud test tones will be played through all of the speakers Avoid sitting or standing close to any one speaker during the procedure If you are particularly sensitive to loud noises you may wish to leave the room and have someone else run EzSet EG Step One Place the included EzSet EQ microphone in the listening position or in the center of the room at about the same height as the listeners ears The microphone features a threaded insert on the bottom so that it can be mounted on a camera tripod for stability An extender rod is also included Step Two Plug the EzSet EQ microphone into the Headphone Jack EzSet Microphone Input Jack on the front of the receiver see Figure 51 ee ee ee E Ww Phones Set up MIC Ti d f Figure 51 Plug EzSet EQ microphone into receiver Step Three Make sure that the AVR 347 and the video display are turned on Press the OSD Button to display the Menu System See Figure 48 Use the A W Buttons to move the cursor to the Speaker oetup tab and then press the Set Button to select the Speaker Setup menu See Figure 52 28 harman kardon Figure 52 Speaker Setup Menu Screen selec
113. Capability HCC Transient Intermodulation Distortion Slew Rate FM Tuner Section Frequency Range Usable Sensitivity signal to Noise Ratio Distortion Stereo Separation selectivity Image Rejection IF Rejection 40 9908 9908 10Hz 130kHz 35 Amps Unmeasurable AQV usec 8 5 108 0MHZ IHF 1 30V 13 2dBf Mono Stereo 70 68dB Mono Stereo 0 2 0 3 40dB 1kHz 400kHz 7098 8008 9008 A Simplay AVR 347 is Simplay HD verified for compatibility via the HDMI connection with other Simplay HD verified products Please register your AVR 347 on our Web site at www harmankardon com NOTE You ll need the product s serial number At the same time you can choose to be notified about our new products and or special promotions AM Tuner Section Frequency Range 520 1 20kHz oignal to Noise Ratio 4508 Usable Sensitivity Loop 5001 Distortion 1kHz 50 Mod 0 896 selectivity 10kHz 30dB Video Section Television Format NTSC Inout Level Impedance 1Vp p 75 ohms Output Level Impedance 1Vp p 75 ohms Video Frequency Response Composite and S Video 10Hz 8MHz 30B Video Frequency Response Component Video 10Hz 100MHz HDMI Audio and video processing General AC 120V 60Hz 65W idle 540W maximum channels driven Power Requirement Power Consumption Dimensions Product Shipping Width 17 5 16 inches 440mm 22 inches 659mm Height 6 5 8 inches 165mm 10 1 2
114. E 950 GSR SVID_C_0UT o 2 5 5 JK40 1 COMPOSITE R491 COMPO_REC_OUT o o 75 a 8 R492 S V C REC OUT S VIDEO C 3 MM 75 E Xo 2 S VIDEO Y R493 S V Y_REC_OUT 75 sas 5 _ o 8 8 545 4 m 5VV e o a 2 o 2 b JK41 P 1 JK41 3 gt a can COMPOSITE e B 10 50 C412 S VIDEO S VIDEO Y 10 50 C413 10 50 n Sse SVID Y OUT 3 ESR 5 JK41 2 C451 COMPOSITE e 10 50 e C452 gt S VIDEO C 9 R471 a 8 m Xo S VIDEO Y B 10 50 5 E FSR 950 259 a 5VV JK41 1 COMPOSITE R401 C404 B lt MON VID OUT 75 1000 6 3 5 A P R402 C405 55 S VIDEO C QUT e 75 10 50 5 S VIDEO Y R403 C406 128 lt J MON Y OUT TEN 75 1000 6 3 5 5 415 95 3 22 22 9 V4 S V Y IPOD V SEL V4 5 V4 COMP FROM VIDEO4 JACK B D IC 48 HCF4053MOTSTR HCF4053M013T 5VV 5VV
115. EA RN63 CRJ104DJI03T RES 4ARRAY 1608 2 6084 1 EA RN64 CRJ104DJI01T RES 4ARRAY 1608 2 1000 1684 1 EA RN65 RES 4ARRAY 1608 2 1000 16084 1 6 RES 4ARRAY 1608 2 1000 1684 1 1 CRJ104DJI03T RES 4ARRAY 1608 2 6084 1 8 72 ______ 1040 1037 lt lt RES 4ARRAY 1608 1 6 4 1 RES 4ARRAY 160874 63 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator _ PartNumber Description pu eoque INPUT PCB CUP11913 1 A ac uj RES 4ARRAY 160874 64 bm AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator Part Number Description ________ _ ____ _ _ _ ____ ____ ___ __ INPUT 1 BL ooa RES CHI e a 65 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator Part Number Description Ee E enn INPUT 1 ass oa RES Hi ks RES CHIP 392R 196 RES CHIP 392R 1 66 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator Part Number Description MC en INPUT 1 ORT ES UUU CHIP 392R 1 Sor RES CHIP 392R 196 RES CHIP 392R 196 67 AVR3
116. F at the other end of the communications link The SC I F block contains five signals SC RX IN SC TX OUT COMMAND SEL ERR IROZ and RESETZ The SC RX IN and SC TX OUT connect the asynchronous serial communications to the respective microprocessors The SC I F 108 AVR347 PRELIMINARY 14 Aug 04 communicates at a default mode of 9600 baud no parity 8 data bits and 1 stop bit The baud rate can be changed using the XM DT IC Command Mode The Master and Slave baud rates must be set to the same rate by their respective microprocessors The COMMAND SEL input allows configuration of the XM DT IC and to retrieve feedback of the link status during normal operation This signal ts logic low for normal operation and logic high for Command Stat Mode Details of the operation of this signal are described in the Programming section of this specification The ERR_IRQ output signal is active low when an error occurs on the link 1f interrupts are enabled via the Interrupt Mask register Access to the Interrupt Mask register 1s gained via the Command Mode and the interrupt source identification is obtained via the Status Mode Details of these modes are described in the Programming section of this specification The RESET input signal is used to perform a complete asynchronous reset of the XM DT IC The RESET signal is also used to place the XM DT IC into Command Mode Refer to the Programming section SAII Synchronous Au
117. FR lt 23 a 33X4 RN84 SS lt lt a lt lt D_FL lt 4 sjal s 22 s 5 2 2 al 2 xl 5 s sale 2 e 2 a z 2 2 2 B 5 l g 4 2 2 48158 DFL 4 el E 5 S 5 5 DAL0 15 9 al 5 8 a N 3v3 8 a 8 2 28 135 5 5 8 84 4 _ 2s 2 2 2 242 zt s Se 2 e al a al 5 85 Oo S oO lt 2553 m aj a al a 5 5 51515 5 0 0 19 R717 ns e a z 3 3 3 3 s s 5 S 0 ku e Y AAAAAA R743 Sof EROR LL L ne 8 amp 9 ew sexum e 33 5566565 5 8 9 e 5 215 1 1 Bg E E ERES NS 5 e iB Address CS495xx Flash SDRAM a 8 E i 25 8 000 mn pa amp t amp amp DALEY 19 88 9 e Se pee pe 1114 9 7 6355888 5 EXT_A18 87 16 1 EE EXT A17 5VD R720 EXT _ 85 17 9 Bg 28838 NES DATA 5495 Flash SDRAM 16 84 48 2 lt 2 lt COAX_OUT 8 2 amp S amp 5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT DATA DAOI00 031 a 151 D15 SD 07 29 44 12
118. Figure 36 Input Selectors 4 Enter a code from Step 1 above a If the device turns off then press the Input Selector again to accept the code it will flash The remote will exit the Program mode b If the device does not turn off try entering another code If you run out of codes you may search through all of the codes in the remote s library for that product type by pressing the or Y Button repeatedly until the device turns off When the device turns off enter the code by pressing the Input Selector which will flash The remote then exits Program mode 5 Once you have programmed a code it s a good idea to try using some other functions to control the device Sometimes manufacturers use the same Power code for several different models while other codes will vary You may wish to repeat this process until you ve programmed a satisfactory code set that operates most of the functions you frequently use OD You may find out which code number you have programmed by pressing and holding the Input Selector to enter the Program mode Then press the Set Button and the LED will flash in the code sequence One flash represents 15 two flashes for 2 and so forth A series of many fast flashes represents 0 Record the codes programmed for each device in Table 3 Table 3 Remote Control Codes Source Input Product Type Remote circle one Control Code Video 1 VCR PVR Video 2 Cable Sat
119. High frequency oscillator connection pins Note An external DMA controller cannot access the device s built in memory or built in devices using the BUSRQ and BUSAK signal GND pins e V All pins SUD be connected with the power supply pin 169 harman kardon Ports AO to I O ports Input Interrupt Request Pins 1 to 4 Interrupt request pins with programmable rising edge falling edge BEEN Pin for reference voltage input to AD converter L Power supply pins All DVCC pins should be connected with the power supply pin AVR347 harman kardon NJW1159 PIN ASSIGNMENT Lch External Opamp Input Connection Teminal 6 VSS OUT Internal VSS Noise Rejection Capacitor Terminal 8 V __ supply voltage input 9 IN jJlehipt 9 100 2 Chip Enable Terminal 0 1 GND Ground 1 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATING Ta 25 C PARAMETER SYMBOL RATING UNIT Maximum Input Voltage VAS V SSOP16 300 Power Dissipation DMP 16 300 mW DIP 16 500 Operating Temperature Range 40 to 85 Storage Temperature Range 40 to 125 For the maximum input voltage less than V V B ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Ta 25 C V V 7V 7V RU 47kO Power Supply Supply Current 7 ws s m Input Output Characteristics BOUTL 2pin BOUTR 4pin f 1kHz THD 1 Vin 1Vrms
120. Installation procedure lf a signal is present at the component video input assigned to that source it will be selected If no signal is present at the component video input then the S video or composite video input for the source will be selected It is not possible to reassign the S video or composite video inputs to other sources For audio only sources such as the tuner or CD inputs when no compo nent video signal is present the last used video source will be selected AVR347 OPERATION 6 8 Channel Direct Inputs If you wish to hear audio through the 6 8 Channel Direct Inputs together with video then connect your multichannel player to the Component Video 1 Inputs and connect the player s 6 or 8 channel analog audio outputs to the 6 8 Channel Inputs on the AVR Assign the component video inputs you selected to the 6 8 Channel Input source The AVR will automatically select the correct component video and audio inputs when you select this source lf you need to use composite or S video for your multichannel player e g if your video display does not have component video inputs then connect the device to the video inputs for another source Since the AVR automatically selects the last used video inputs for audio sources first select the source you connected the video cables to and then the 6 8 Channel Inputs for the audio Example 1 You would like to connect a DVD Audio player to the AVR 347 You plan on playing
121. Port 0 port that allows VO to be selected at the bit level Address and data lower Bits 0 to 7 of address and data bus Port 1 port that allows to be selected at the bit level Address and data upper Bits 8 to 15 for address and data bus Address Bits 8 to 15 of address bus Port 2 VO port that allows to be selected at the bit level Address Bits O to 7 of address bus Address Bits 16 to 23 of address bus Port 30 Output port Read Strobe signal for reading external memory This port output RD signal also case of reading internal area by setting P3 lt gt Qand lt P30F gt 1 Port 31 Output port Write Strobe signal for writing data to pins ADO to AD7 Functions ADO AD7 P10 P17 15 Output P20 P27 16 23 Port 32 port with pull up resistor High Write Strobe signal for writing data to pins AD8 to AD15 Port 33 port with pull up resistor Wait Pin used to request CPU bus wait Port 34 port with pull up resistor Bus Request Signal used to request Bus Release 4 Port 35 1 O port Owitri p ull uD FeSIS catre Bus Acknowledge Signal used to acknowledge Bus Release Port 36 port with pull up resistor Read Write 1 represents Read or Dummy cycle 0 represents Write cycle Port 36 port with pull up resistor This pin s
122. Qty 1 ORNAMENTVOLUME 2 _ 1 C O 2 CAPVOLUME 1 O 3 HOLDERVOLUME CMHIA2I4 1 4 INDICATORVOLUME CGLIA22 1 C S WNDOWASY CGUNRG7 1 WINDOWFIP CGHA9Y 1 2 BADGEMODEL 2 __ 1 j y O 6 comzoo 1 4 7 08 1 C 8 BADGEHARMAN KARDON KGBIAIBZ __ _ 690 _ __6 __ _ 1 O 9 PANELFRONT CGWIM27ROH3 2 10 20 10 BRACKETSIDE CMD2A43 1 O 11 KNOBFUNCTION CBTIAIO28M287 C 1 12 KNOBDISPLAY CBT1A1027K128 2 10 00 13 KNOBPOWER CBTAI30MMZG7 1 NDICATORPOMER 4 15 CBCIAISEMEGZ O 1 16 7 PLAESHED E 18 BACKT AN _______ 1 cMHimis _______ 1 20 BRACKETFIP CMDIA29 7 121 CKCoBM5S4602 22 CHASSISBOTTOM CUA2429 23 RUBBERCUSHON 4 24 CK20943 4 O 25 SUPPORT CUSHION 04 __ T ovan 27 BRACKETPCB 1 2 28 H DERPCB 2 29 BRACKETTRANS 30 2 20 00 31 BRACKETPCB Cupiso 32 BRACKETPCB CMDIAS7
123. Remote sensor is obscured e Local interference e Digital audio feed paused e Multiroom system has been turned on and the surround back channels were reassigned to multiroom operation e XM antenna is not plugged in e XM antenna is not located in such a way as to enable reception e nput Selector not held for at least 3 seconds e Invalid device assignment attempted e Buttons are pressed too hard SOLUTION e Make certain AC power cord is plugged into a live outlet e Check to see whether outlet is switch controlled e certain that all input and speaker connections are secure e Press Mute Button e Jurn up volume control e Check speaker wire connections for shorts at receiver and speaker ends e Contact your local Harman Kardon service center e Select a mode other than Stereo e here is no surround information from mono sources e Check speaker mode configuration e The surround decoder may not create center or rear channel information from nonencoded programs e Change remote batteries e Press the AVR selector certain front panel sensor is visible to remote or connect an optional remote sensor e Move unit or antenna away from computers fluorescent lights motors or other electrical appliances e Resume play for DVD e Check that correct digital input is selected e Use the OSD menu system to access the MULTI ROOM SETUP menu and change the SB Amps setting to MAIN e sure
124. View 5 lead SOT23 0180V SEEPR 8 05 AVR347 harman kardon ATMEL Absolute Maximum Ratings Operating Temperature en 55 C to 125 C NOTICE Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent dam Storage Temperature 65 C to 150 C age to the device This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or any Voltage on Any Pin other conditions beyond those indicated in the with Respect to Ground 1 0V to 7 0V operational sections of this specification is not implied Exposure to absolute maximum rating Maximum Operating Voltage 6 25V conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability DC Output Current 5 0 mA Figure 1 Block Diagram GND WP SCL SDA SERIAL CONTROL H V PUMP TIMING LOGIC DATA RECOVERY _ _ mE hi E e EEPROM Y DEC SERIAL MUX Dour AT24C01A 02 04 08A 16A 0180V SEEPR 8 05 150 AVR347 Pin Description Memory Organization 0180V SEEPR 8 05 harman kardon AT24C01A 02 04 08A 16A SERIAL CLOCK SCL The SCL input is used to positive edge clock data into each EEPROM device and negative edge clock data out of each device SERIAL DATA SDA
125. ZI 2 95 22K 18 8 5 5 CN49 1 I L2zl222ll2 2l2ll2l2222l2222 2 a ee ee a E lt gt d z S 2 lt 5 2 2 1 5 z 5 26 zi Z 309909 kl ira ME Aer Zk gt gt gt o Io 1 x x lt z gt ze 2 6 6 6 6 99000 000000 U T POWER_HIGH gt MIC_IN lt VOL_L_CONT KEY1 KEY ENO KEY3 lt VOL lt VOL_EN2 VFD CS VFD CLK lt VFD DATA 3 3VC lt VFD_RST gt VFD CS HP MUTE2 EN VFD_CLK ERT VFD_DATA gt VFD_RST gt HP_IN CARR_OUT SB_MUTE gt MULTI_MUTE gt AVR247 347 OPTION XM M ES Korm eye oni POWER MUTE XM MUTE XM MUTE gt lt RST 0 gt lt J XM_CMD XM_IRQ XM_IRQ gt XM_TX XM_TX XM_RX DMP DET lt DET 3 3VC PC DMP TX lt PC DMP PC DMP_RX PC DMP_RX 4384_RST 4384_RST 3 3VC ro 9 1 87 gt atts q HVIRESVL28CATZ ST ETS r 4 x M 5 19x xl a 198 p gt 2 1 1 2 8V gt Mes A T 1 ics o e le toE EU ES S 15 l 1 Z ol RESET IN A A 19 3 5
126. a variety of discs using this player including conventional DVDs and even CDs as well as multichannel discs When playing DVDs and CDs it is preferable to use a digital audio connection to obtain the best sound quality and the benefit of any digital surround formats contained on the DVD However when playing DVD Audio discs you will need to use the 6 8 channel analog audio connections In addition some of these discs contain video materials The player does not have an HDMI output We recommend that you connect this player as follows a Connect the player s coaxial digital audio output to the Coaxial 1 input on the AVR This input is assigned by default to the DVD source b Connect the player s component video outputs to the Component Video 1 inputs on the AVR which are assigned by default to the DVD source If your video display doesn t have component video inputs then connect the player s composite or S video output to the DVD s corresponding video input c Connect the player s 6 channel analog audio outputs to the AVR s 6 8 Channel Inputs and assign the Component Video 1 inputs to this source using the Input Setup menu as described in the Initial setup section d Program the player s remote control codes into the DVD Input selector Note that not all commands will necessarily be available When you wish to view a DVD simply select the DVD source When you wish to listen to a DVD Audio disc and view the menus and other
127. and DSP Surround Buttons are labeled for use as Channel Up Down Buttons when controlling a televi sion or cable box See Table A8 in the appendix for listings of the different functions for each type of component IR Transmitter Lens As buttons are pressed on the remote infrared codes are emitted through this lens Make sure it is pointing toward the component being operated Power On Button Press this button to turn on the AVR or another device The Master Power Switch on the AVR 347 s front panel must first have been switched on Mute Button Press this button to mute the AVR 347 s speaker and headphone outputs temporarily To end the muting press this button or adjust the volume Muting is also canceled when the receiver is turned off Program Indicator This LED lights up or flashes in one of three colors as the remote is programmed with codes Power Off Button Press this button to turn off the AVR 347 or another device AVR Selector Press this button to switch the remote to the codes that operate the receiver Input Selectors Press one of these buttons to select a source device which is a component where a playback signal originates e g DVD CD cable TV satellite or HDTV tuner or an iPod docked in the optional The Bridge This will also turn on the receiver and switch the remote s mode to operate the source device XM Radio Button Press this button to select XM Satellite Radio as the source You will need to have
128. are integrated circuits and some field effect transistors and semiconductor chip components The following techniques should be used to help reduce the incidence of component damage caused by static electricity 1 Immediately before handling any semiconductor component or semiconductor equipped assembly drain off any electrostatic charge on your body by touching a known earth ground Alternatively obtain and wear a commercially available discharging wrist strap device which should be removed for potential shock reasons prior to applying power to the unit under test 2 After removing an electrical assembly equipped with ES devices place the assembly on a conductive surface such as aluminum foil to prevent electrostatic charge build up or exposure of the assembly 3 Use only a grounded tip soldering iron to solder or unsolder ES devices 4 Use only an anti static solder removal device Some solder removal devices not classified as anti static can generate electrical charges sufficient to damage ES devices 5 Do not use freon propelled chemicals These can generate electrical change sufficient to damage ES devices 6 Do not remove a replacement ES device from its protective package until immediately before you are ready to install it Most replacement ES devices are packaged with leads electrically shorted together by conductive foam aluminum foil or comparable conductive material 7 Immediately before removing the protective material f
129. assign the surround back amplifier channels to the remote zone limiting the main system to 5 1 channels This method also requires you to provide an additional component that is the amplifier However this method may be used to increase the number of remote rooms in the system when you are also using the other options for connecting a multiroom system 4 Connect an A BUS hub or other A BUS components to the A BUS Port See Figure 43 Use Category 5 5e cable as described in the instructions for your A BUS components The A BUS system may carry the audio signal to the remote components while receiving IR control codes depend ing on the capabilities of your A BUS components If you connect a hub to the AVR 347 you may distribute audio to many remote rooms Visit our Web site at www harmankardon com for information on our available hubs the ABH 4 and ABH 4000 and amplified in wall modules the AB 1 and AB 2 Figure 43 A BUS Port In addition to the audio signal you will usually wish to connect an IR control device to the AVR 3475 Multiroom IR Input so that listeners in the remote room may turn the multiroom system on or off select a source input control the source device connected to that input and adjust the volume in the remote zone As mentioned above an A BUS system does not require a separate IR control connection By using external multichannel amplifiers and A BUS hubs it s possible to construct a system that distri
130. cee Jadre Uc uf Sy tb t Ya amp Aon Be pet eO V ee oke OE S Yo ak Bay Ef ted see s Yok ed tu rn Me AOE MA pec E Lie ceca ems mim a m qaya a es m esi Es LI 1 TEN cee RI SERA kasna ee PB a ees H s UM a EPIKCHI SeerP 1 i r UI WT A 1 eR ee ie i V m OL 0 8 3019711933 Ol sena 9 8 1NO3J E 1 q 10101010 01010101010101010101010 010101010101010 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 1 5 S 1 t o gt l ies 7 1 1 gt 1 1 1 1 S gt gt o 24 8 e gt 1 i 1 gt 5 gd gt gt o9 1 E 70 1 7 2 gt 24 3 2 1 1 a 8 2 1 1 N amp 5 5 N 1 1 1 I fe dae 1 1 e a 1 1 z I ms 8 M 1 ay 1 1 gt 0
131. communications applications The QS3VH16233 is characterized for operation from 40 C to 85 C SEL2 AVR347 IDTQS3VH16233 2 5V 3 3V 32 16 MUX DEMUX HIGH BANDWIDTH BUS SWITCH harman kardon INDUSTRIALTEMPERATURERANGE PIN CONFIGURATION 1A DE 1 1 1 2B1 m m 1B2 2B2 E 2 m 3B1 4B1 mE NE 3B2 4B2 4 5A 5B1 E 5B2 6A E 7B1 7B2 EE 8A GND Vcc 9B1 p 9B2 10 mi 11B1 o 11B2 12A 13B1 EI 1382 A 14 15 1 E 15B2 16B2 mj 26 mE 16 27 SEL TEST2 28 SEL2 SSOP TSSOP TOP VIEW ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS m NOTES 1 Stresses greater than those listed under ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS may Cause permanent damage to the device This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect reliability 2 Vcc terminals 3 terminals except Vcc CAPACITANCE ta 25 C 1MHz Vin 0 Vout 0V a Switch OFF Demux 4 HHG Quickswitch Channels Mux Switch ON Demux 8 2 NOTE 1 This parameter is guaranteed but not production tested PIN DESCRIPTION Description Data Select PortSelect FUNCTION TABLE rest Fu
132. connector CN72 17p on the Fip PCB 37 1 and connector CN72 on the Input PCB 39 1 Disconnect the lead wire BN81 8P on the Fip PCB 37 1 from connector CN81 on the Trans PCB 40 4 Disconnect the lead wire BN22 6P on the Phone PCB 37 5 from connector CN22 on the Input PCB 39 1 Disconnect the lead wire BN18 5P on the Phone PCB 37 5 from connector CN18 on the Input PCB 39 1 Disconnect the lead wire BN10 4P on the Volume PCB 37 6 from connector CN10 on the Input PCB 39 1 Disconnect the lead wire BN41 6P on the Volume PCB 37 6 from connector CN41 on the Video PCB 41 Disconnect the lead wire BN90 2P on the Main PCB 38 1 from connector CN86 on the Moms PCB 37 4 9 Remove 1 screw 510 and then lead wire JW82 1P JW83 1P on the Phone PCB 37 5 10 Remove 1screw 510 and then lead wire JW84 1P on the Volume PCB 37 3 11 Remove 10 screws 51 and then remove the Front Panel ASS Y NO Volume PCB 37 6 REMOVAL Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 Remove the Front Panel ASS Y referring to the previous step 2 Pull out the Volume Knob ASS Y Disconnect connector CN84 on the Volume PCB 37 6 from the lead wire BN84 5P on the Fip PCB 37 1 Disconnect the lead wire BN92 5P on the Volume PCB 37 6 from connector CN92 on the Phone PCB 37 5 Remove 8 screws 52 514 and then remove the Volume PCB 37 6 A
133. consider upgrading to an HDMI capable video display Antennas The AVR 34 uses separate terminals for the included FM and AM antennas that provide proper reception for the tuner The FM antenna uses a 75 ohm F connector See Figure 13 Figure 13 FM Antenna harman kardon The AM loop antenna needs to be assembled Then connect the two leads to the screw terminals on the receiver See Figure 14 Figure 14 AM Antenna RS 232 Serial Port The RS 232 serial port on the AVR 347 is used only for data Harman Kardon releases a software upgrade for the receiver s operating system at some time in the future the upgrade may be downloaded to the AVR using this port Complete instructions will be provided at that time AVR347 INSTALLATION You are now ready to connect your various components to your receiver Before beginning make sure that all components Including the AVR 347 are turned completely off and their power cords are unplugged Don t plug any of the power cords back in until you have finished making all of your connections Remember that your receiver generates heat while it is on Select a location that leaves several inches of space on all sides of the receiver It is preferable to avoid completely enclosing the receiver inside a cabinet It is also preferable to place components on separate shelves rather than stacking them directly on top of the receiver Some surface finishes are de
134. convert 10801 or 1080p analog video signals to the HDMI format and downconverts them to 720p for the Component Video Outputs This affects users of Microsoft Xbox 360 systems and some older set top boxes lf your digital cable television set top box outputs 1080 or higher video via component video outputs only contact your cable operator for a replacement unit equipped with an HDM output For Xbox 360 or satellite receivers with no HDMI output change the settings on your source device so that it outputs only 20p video through its component video outputs which the AVR can convert to the HDMI format Although you could connect the source device s component video outputs directly to your video display you would then have to select the correct video input on the display to match the AVR s input Figure 30 HDMI Output your television does not have HDMI or DVI video inputs you will need to make a video connection for each type of video used for your sources First determine what types of video your display is capable of handling Component video is preferred followed by S video and then composite video Ideally this guided you in selecting the video connections for your Sources Next note which types of video connections you used for your source devices Make sure you didn t use a better type of video connection for a source than your video display can handle If so disconnect the source and use a video connection that
135. exit Learning mode If you prefer you may wait for the remote to time out and exit Learning mode on its own but this will take about 30 seconds lf you are unable to locate a code set that correctly operates your source device It will not be possible to use the AVR remote to contro that device However you may still connect the source to the AVR 347 and operate it using the device s original remote control Alternatively you may wish to consider purchasing Harman Kardon s optional TC 30 activity based remote which is programmed by accessing a large data base of product codes on the Internet The TC 30 is also capable of learning codes from your device s original remote Most of the button labels on the remote describe the button s function when used to control the AVR 347 However the button may perform a very different function when used to control another device Refer to the Remote Control Function List Table A8 in the Appendix for a list of each button s functions with the various product types If you wish you may program Macros which are preprogrammed code sequences that execute many code commands with a single button press You may also program punch through codes which allow the remote to operate the volume channel or transport controls of another device without having to switch the remote s device mode See pages 60 61 for instructions on these advanced programming functions AVR347 NOTE The AVR 347 remote
136. ff 0683 257 11 1 SR 1 1 I 1805 555 52 C2785Y e TS rSo 925 2785 1 i z 11 vy ofS 328 ess 910 NDA 1 2281 229 228 910 NDA qe ERN e 2 2 25 92 J 528 923 e 51615 1 0 Me a eV ARES SOT aaa 1 FL 10 50V MN R578 1 1 1 BL 10 50V f MN 0 9 4 22 4 H RIS 1 e gt 0913 o 9113 443 m NDA 10 T 9616 6503 NDA 277 242229 8 it i C3200GR S na 1 Q513 Q518 r 1 LI 1 C 1 CR 1308 Ont teu eos 25 i a 6320068 3200 1 3 e 9 tt 8705 3 9 osx x ol 2 Sok 2 8 1848 322 858 525 0228 2283 3 1205 3321 2 3323 228 825 E i 259 es Sot 25 Beg 829 19 8 259 g lt 221 228 2281 5 BSN 2281 M t els S e E G N lt lt Ny 5 1 Sia 5 c 8 it 2 S T e 15 1 L o 1 9 r 5805 1 q917 0 suB 1 0813 9548 2785 11 AVR145 132 1 T 0820 I eee b503 ET C32006R 29 e 9 R678 H 11 1 56 2 H 1SS133M R870 C3200GR 1 225 ee R808 1555 e e 1 AVRI44 146 1471 1
137. for details Rev 0 1 Nov 2003 156 4 harman kardon hynix HY57V161610ETP I FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM 1Mx16 Synchronous DRAM Self Refresh Counter Refresh Counter 512 16 Bank 0 Refresh Interval Timer Row Decoder O O A Em O lt c Address 0 10 Auto Self Refresh Sense AMP amp I O gates Column Decoder Ref Addr 0 1 1 CLK Address CKE Register BA A11 are Latch amp Counter Overflow Burst Length gt 5 State Machine 0 gt m 2 49 e CAS Counter WE UDQM Column Decoder LDQM 8 Sense AMP I O gates D O D D 512 16 1 5 lt oc Mode Register Test Mode I O Control Rev 0 1 Nov 2003 3 157 AVR347 harman kardon hynix HY57V161610ETP I COMMAND TRUTH TABLE Mode Mode Register Set Mode Register Set o 0 Active Row Address Address Read with Auto precharge Address H X L H L L X Write with Auto precharge Address EM Precharge All Bank H X L L H L X X Precharge selected Bank power A9 Pin High Exit Entry H L Precharge power Exit L H E Note 1 Exiting Self Refresh occurs by asynchronously bringing CKE from low to high
138. function compatible with 74HC4051 4052 4053 130 AVR347 TOSHIBA Pin Assignment top view TC7MZ4051FK 4 16 Voc 6 15 2 COM 14 1 7 13 0 5 12 3 INH 11 A VEE 10 B GND 9 C TC7MZ4053FK 1Y 16 Vcc OY 15 Y COM 1Z 14 X COM Z COM 13 1X 0Z 12 OX INH 11 A VEE 10 B GND 9 C Truth Table Control Inputs gt harman kardon TC7MZ4051 4052 4053FK TC7MZ4052FK OY 1 16 Vcc 2Y 2 15 2X Y COM 3 14 1X 3Y 4 13 X COM 1Y 5 12 OX INH 6 11 3X 7 10 A GND 8 9 B ON Channel s weosrk MZ4053FK __ t t L x X Don t care Except MZ4052FK 131 owe AVR347 harman kardon TOSHIBA e 9 TC7MZ4051 4052 4053FK System Diagram TC7MZ4051FK COM E 0 Logic Level Converter E 7 INH OUT IN TC7MZ4052FK X COM fe Y Logic Level Converter OUT IN Y COM TC7MZ4053FK Y COM X COM Q Logic Level Converter d be gt C T OUT IN INH Z COM 2001 10 23 132 AVR347 harman kardon FEATURES N channel FET switches with no parasitic diode to Vcc Isolation under power off conditions No DC path to Vcc or GND 5V tolerant in OFF and ON state 5V tolerant 1 05 Low RON 40 typical Flat RoN characteristics over operating range Rail to rail switching 0 5V Bi
139. is preprogrammed to operate the transport controls of Harman Kardon DVD players when the AVR the Video 2 cable satellite or the Video 3 TV source is selected You may change this punch through programming at any time Step Nine Remote IR Inputs and Output Optional The AVR 347 is equipped with a Remote IR Input a Multiroom IR Input and both full carrier and stripped Remote IR Outputs to facilitate use of your system with a remote control in a variety of situations See Figure 39 Figure 39 IR Inputs and Outputs CARR MULTI REMOTE OUT IN IN OUT When the AVR 347 is placed in such a way that aiming the remote at the front panel IR sensor is difficult such as inside a cabinet or facing away from the listener you may connect an external IR receiver such as the optional Harman Kardon HE 1000 to the Remote IR Input jack When you are using the AVR 347 in multiroom mode you may connect an optional IR receiver keypad or other control device to the Multiroom IR Input for remote control of the AVR 347 and any sources connected to the AVR s Remote IR Output from the remote zone Any signals transmitted through the Multiroom IR Input will only control source selec tion and volume for the remote zone If a source device is being shared with the main listening area then any control commands issued to that source will also affect the main room If any of your source devices are equipped with a compatible Remote IR I
140. jacks to an external amplifier to power the speakers in the remote zone of a multiroom system When these jacks are used it is possible to have a full 7 1 channel system in the main listening room at the same time the multiroom system is in use A BUS Port Use a Category 5 5e cable to connect this port to optional A BUS equipment for multiroom operation When the A BUS system is used it is possible to have a full 7 1 channel system in the main listening room at the same time the multiroom system is in use Video 1 Video 2 Video 3 and DVD Audio Video Inputs These jacks may be used to connect your video capable source components e g VCR DVD player cable TV box to the receiver Hemember to use only one type of video connection for each source see the Connections section for more information on audio and video connection options for each source component Video 1 Audio Video Outputs These jacks may be used to connect your VCR or another recorder Composite and S Video Monitor Outputs If any of your sources use composite or S video connections you may need to connect one or both of these monitor outputs to the corresponding inputs on your television or video display in order to view the sources and to view the on screen displays If your video display is equipped with component video or HDMI inputs you may take advantage of the AVR 3475 transcoding capability which transcodes composite and o video signals to component video and
141. on the iPod using your home theater system You may even use the harman kardon CONNECTIONS AVR 34 remote to control the iPod with navigation messages displayed on the front panel and on a video display connected to the AVR The Bridge outputs analog audio to the AVR 347 and it is available to the multiroom system 0 i The Bridge Figure 9 The Bridge Video Connections Although some sources produce an audio signal only e g CD player tape deck many sources output both audio and video signals 0 DVD player cable television box HDTV tuner satellite box VCR DVR In addition to the audio connection you will need to connect one type of video connection for each source never more than one at the same time for any source Digital Video If you have already connected a source device to one of the inputs as explained in the Digital Audio Connections section then you have automatically made a video connection at the same time as the HDMI signal includes both digital audio and video components If the source device is not capable of transmitting its digital audio signal through the HDMI connection then use one of the coaxial or optical digital audio inputs for the source lf a multichannel analog audio connection is required for certain lossless formats e g DVD Audio SACD HD DVD or Blu ray Disc you may make both connections but you must also make an analog video connection
142. other copy protected sources you may only do so using analog connections Remember to comply with all copyright laws if you choose to make a copy for your own personal use 19 Figure 7 Analog Audio Analog audio cable RCA Multichannel analog connections are used with some high definition sources where the copy protected digital content is decoded inside the source These types of connections are usually used with DVD Audio oACD Blu ray Disc HD DVD and other multichannel players See Figure 8 However the multichannel analog audio connection is not required for DVD Audio players compliant with HDMI version 1 1 or better or HD DVD and Blu ray Disc players that decode the digital audio internally and output linear PCM signals in digital format Consult the owner s guide for your disc player for more information Front Surround Center Multichannel O analog audio cable RCA Subwoofer Figure 8 Multichannel Analog Audio Harman Kardon receivers also include a proprietary dedicated audio connection called The Bridge DMP If you own an iPod with a dock connector you may separately purchase The Bridge and connect it to The Bridge DMP port on the receiver See Figure 9 Dock your iPod not included in The Bridge and you may listen to your audio materials through your high performance audio system If your iPod is photo or video capable you may view still images or video materials stored
143. purchased and activated an XM antenna module and you will also need to subscribe to the XM Radio service Visit www xmradio com for more information AM FM Button Press this button to select the tuner as the source or to switch between the AM FM and XM Radio bands 6 8 Channel Input Selector Press this button to select the 6 8 Channel Inputs as the audio source The receiver will use the video input and remote control codes for the last selected video source Learn Button The AVR 347 remote is capable of learning individual codes from the original remote that came with your TV or a device that is connected to any of the source inputs See the Advanced Functions section for instructions on learning remote codes Test Tone Press this button to activate the test tone for manual output level calibration TV Video This button has no effect on the receiver but is used to switch video inputs on some video source components Sleep Button Press this button to activate the sleep timer which turns off the receiver after a programmed period of time of up to 90 minutes Volume Controls Press these buttons to raise or lower the volume which will be shown in decibels dB in the Message Display DSP Surround Press this button to select a DSP surround mode Hall 1 Hall 2 Theater AVR347 IR Transmitter Lens Power On Program Indicator AVR Selector AM FM XM Radio Test Tone Sleep DSP Surround On Screen Di
144. separates the video signal into three components one luminance Y and two sub sampled color signals and that are transmitted using three separate cables The Y cable is color coded green the Pb cable is colored blue and the Pr cable is colored red See Figure 12 e Component video cable Figure 12 Component Video If it s available on your video display HDMI is recommended as the best quality connection followed by component video S video and then composite video NOTES e Due to copy protection restrictions there is no output at the Component Video Monitor Outputs for copy protected sources e High resolution 1080i and 1080 video signals are not able at the HDMI Output and are downconverted to 20p for the Component Video Outputs If your source outputs analog high resolution video either use the Component Video Outputs change the output resolution of your source device to 20 or connect your source s component video outputs directly to your video display e Due to the design of some video displays analog 480p or 720 component video source signals may produce artifacts when used with the 5 analog video outputs composite S video or component video If this occurs try changing the Video Mode setting in the INPUT SETUP menu or connecting the source device s video output directly to your video display However for best results we recommend that you
145. source device such as a DVD player to the AVR In that case no separate digital audio connection is required Make sure to turn the volume on your television all the way off Digital Audio The AVR 34 is equipped with two HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface inputs and one output HDMI is capable of carrying digital audio and video information using a single cable thus delivering the highest possible quality picture and sound The AVR 347 is Simplay HD verified for compatibility via the HDMI connection with other Simplay HD verified products There are different versions of HDMI depending on the capability of the source device and the type of signal it is capable of transmitting via the HDMI connection In addition receivers and processors such as the AVR 347 may handle the incoming signal in several different ways depending on their capability as well Thanks to its powerful processor the AVR 34 is capable of processing both the audio and video components of the HDMI data minimizing the number of cable connections in your system NOTE Some multichannel audio devices such as DVD Audio oACD HD DVD or Blu ray Disc players output some audio formats only through the source s multichannel analog outputs These include DVD Audio players with HDMI version 1 0 and HD DVD and Blu ray Disc players that do not decode the digital audio In those cases make a separate analog audio connection in addition to the HDMI connection
146. still images on the disc first select DVD and then the 6 8 Channel Inputs as the source Example 2 In this example your multichannel disc player is equipped with an HDMI output but it does not comply with HDMI version 1 1 Connect it as follows a Connect the player s HDMI output to the HDMI 1 source input and make sure to connect the AVR s HDMI Output to your video display The player will transmit both digital audio e g Dolby Digital or DTS 36 harman kardon audio found on a DVD Video disc and video via the HDMI connection It is not necessary to make a separate digital audio connection b Connect the player s 6 channel analog audio outputs to the AVR s 6 8 Channel Inputs and connect one of the player s analog video outputs to a source input on the AVR e g Component Video 3 or Video 3 Program the player s remote control codes into the Input Selector corresponding to the source you used for the analog video connec tion e g Video 3 When you wish to view a DVD simply select the HDMI 1 source When you wish to play a multichannel disc first select the analog video source 0 Video 3 to obtain the correct video signal then select the 6 8 Channel Inputs to select the audio signal To select the 6 8 Channel Inputs as the source use either the Source selector on the front panel or press the 6 8CH Input Selector on the remote See Figure 73 POWER OFF b GE 4
147. system The use of external mute circuits are not manda tory but may be desired for designs requiring the absolute minimum in extraneous clicks and pops LPFLT 39 PLL Loop Filter Output An RC network should be connected between this pin and ground RXP7 GPO7 42 S PDIF Receiver Input General Purpose Output nput Output Receiver inputs S PDIF encoded RXP6 GPO6 43 data The CS42528 has an internal 8 2 multiplexer to select the active receiver port according to the RXP5 GPO5 44 Receiver Mode Control 2 register These pins can also be configured as general purpose output pins 4 4 45 ADC Overflow indicators or Mute Control outputs according to the RXP General Purpose Pin Control 46 registers RXP2 GPO2 47 RXP1 GPO1 48 RXPO 49 S PDIF Receiver Input Input Dedicated receiver input S PDIF encoded data TXP 50 S PDIF Transmitter Output Output S PDIF encoded data output mapped directly from one of the receiver inputs as indicated by the Receiver Mode Control 2 register VLS 53 Serial Port Interface Power nput Determines the required signal level for the serial port interfaces SAI SDOUT 54 Serial Audio Interface Serial Data Output Output Output for two s complement serial audio PCM data from the S PDIF incoming stream This pin can also be configured to transmit the output of the inter nal and external ADCs RMCK 55 Recovered Master Clock Output Recovered
148. the Video 3 inputs and use the device s own remote to control it lf you receive your television programming using your TV with an antenna or direct cable connection connect the analog audio outputs if available on your TV to the Video 3 Analog Audio inputs See Figure 22 Do not connect any video output on the television set to any video input on the receiver See Step Five for information on connecting the receiver s video monitor outputs to the TV NOTE You may connect any video source other than a display device to the Video 3 S video or composite video inputs O VID3 Figure 22 Video 3 A V Inputs Video 4 Source The Video 4 source is used only for playback It is also generally reserved for components that are only temporarily connected to the receiver such as cameras and game consoles When not in use you may place the supplied covers over the front panel Video 4 jacks for a cleaner appearance Simply snap the covers in place When you wish to use the jacks gently press on the left side of each cover to pivot it out for removal Referring to lable 2 connect your camera or game console to the Video 4 Analog Audio inputs and to either the Coaxial 4 or Optical 4 digital audio input Connect the component s S video or composite video output to the matching Video 4 video input See Figure 23 L Audio S Video Video Video 4 Optical 4 Coaxial 4 Digital Input Figure 23 Video 4 A V and Digital Aud
149. to Observe standards of safety and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of a TOSHIBA product could cause loss of human life bodily injury or damage to property In developing your designs please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent products specifications Also please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook 1999 10 28 1 6 137 AVR347 TOSHIBA SYSTEM DIAGRAM 1A 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B SELECT 2 A 4 28 5 A 7 2Y 6 98 11 3 1098 14 A 12 ay 98 Toan B 15 The products described in this document are subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA CORPORATION harman kardon TC74VHC157F FN FT 9809 10EBA2 for any infringements of intellectual property or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any intellectual property or other rights of TOSHIBA CORPORATION or others The information contained herein is subject to change without notice 138 1999 10 28 2 6 AVR347 ant e m CIRRUS LOGIC Leading the Digital Entertainment Revolution harman kardon
150. used to connect a CDR or another audio only recorder Coaxial and Optical Digital Audio Inputs source has a compatible digital audio output connect it to one of these jacks for improved audio performance Use only one type of digital audio connection for each source Coaxial and Optical Digital Audio Outputs source is also an audio recorder you may connect a compatible digital audio output to the recorder s input for improved recording quality The Bridge DMP Input Connect the optional Harman Kardon Bridge to this input for use with your iPod not included Make sure the receiver is turned off in Standby mode when connecting The Bridge 6 8 Channel Inputs Connect the multichannel analog audio outputs of a DVD Audio SACD Blu ray Disc or HD DVD player or any other external decoder to these jacks to enjoy these proprietary formats NOTE When an HD DVD or Blu ray Disc player has an onboard digital decoder it is not necessary to connect it to the 6 8 Channel Analog Audio Inputs Only a digital audio connection HDMI coaxial or optical is needed Component Video Inputs If both a video source e g DVD player or HDTV tuner and your television or video display have analog component video Y Pb Pr capability and if you are not using connections for the device then you may connect the component video outputs of the source to one of the two component video inputs Do not make any other video conne
151. virtualizers surround simulators and audio enhancement algorithms CS495xx family was designed to reduce system costs and development time and to provide advanced features and flexibility for competitive system level solutions difficult processing tasks of Dolby Digital Surround EX mulitichannel DTS ES 96 24 and THX Ultra2 Cinema be accomplished without the expense of external logic or memory Additionally the CS495xx can meet the needs of dual decode applications with twin DSP cores and audio l O intensive designs with support for up to 10 input and 16 output channels Ordering Information See page 33 for ordering information Memory Coniroller Preliminary Product Information _ CIRRUS LOGIC Crus com 139 Copyright 2005 Cirrus Logic Ine This document contains information for a new product Cirrus Logic reserves the right to modify this product without notice deg NON 05 DS631PP4 AVR347 CS495xx Data Sheet 32 bit Audio Decoder DSP Family harman kardon kendng Ime 7 Package Pinout 144 QFP LQFP A1 AS GPIOS AO AB GPIOS 25 8 a O gt lt 58 098 pu t x 29858 gt cero e gt lt 82220298 a 5 D 6 Bud E 0 Q e d x n
152. which is still used for video or if you wish to listen to Dolby Digital 015 or PCM materials that may be stored on the disc In addition the AVR 347 will convert analog video signals to the HDMI format upscaling to high definition 20p resolution Source signals with 1080 or 1080p resolution are passed via the HDMI Output to your display at their original high quality resolution depending on your displays capabilities You may view the AVR 34 5 own on screen display menus using the HDMI output harman kardon IMPORTANT NOTE The AVR 347 cannot convert 10801 or 1080p analog video signals to the HDMI format and downconverts them to 720p for the Component Video Outputs This affects users of Microsoft Xbox 360 systems and some older set top boxes It your digital cable television set top box outputs 10801 or better video via component video outputs and is not equipped with an HDMI output contact your cable operator for a replacement For Xbox 360 and satellite television customers either change the settings on your source device to ensure that it outputs only 20p video through its component video outputs which the AVR can convert to the HDMI format or connect the AVR s Component Video Monitor Outputs to the video display Although you could connect the source device s component video outputs directly to your video display you would then have to select the correct video input on the display depending on which source input on th
153. with TTL compatible inputs It has separate 8 16 24 bit input ports that accept data in high definition and or standard definition video format For all standards external horizontal vertical and blanking signals or EAV SAV timing codes control the insertion of appropriate synchronization signals into the digital data stream and therefore the output signal One Technology Way P O Box 9106 Norwood MA 02062 9106 U S A Tel 781 329 4700 www analog com Fax 781 326 8703 O 2004 Analog Devices Inc All rights reserved AVR347 harman kardon ADV7322 Digital noise reduction DNR Multiple chroma and luma filters Luma SSAF filter with programmable gain attenuation PrPb SSAF Separate pedestal control on component and composite S video output VCR FF RW sync mode Macrovision Rev 7 1 L1 CGMS WSS Closed captioning 29 97 1 Other standards are supported in async timing mode Rev PrA Page 4 of 88 184 DETAILED FEATURES Table 1 Standards Directly Supported High definition programmable features 720p 1080i 1035i intatiace decane 2x oversampling 148 5 MHz Resolution Prog Rate Hz Standard Internal test pattern generator 720 x 480 ITU R BT 656 Color hatch black bar flat field frame 720 x 576 ITU R BT 656 Fully programmable YCrCb to RGB matrix 720 x 480 NTSC Gamma correction Square Pixel Programmable adaptive filter control 720 x 576 PAL Square Programmable sharpness filter control Pixel CGMS A 720p 1
154. x gt x lt 06 gt I 09 2 5 ny 55 1 1 1 1 N 5 T 1 0262 5 RES 1 11 9 lt lt E 1 2 1 1 1262 2262 769 956 25 ps 5 55 1 00 10 moo noo 22 5 9 11 1 2 25 I 269 9269 1269 8269 5 4 1 e x i 1 Num pet inen r i koa apana ed iz e e 2 EIS T E STs 2097 5 1 1 MEE edy T 2s z gt X gt TE 520 amp BIB gc 57 zm ON 5 5 1 z 1 1 C lt 3 3 1 d 1 1 5 1 e dog GL 081 1 1 w E O 6 1 1 ede 1 4 1 x 10070 S 1928 6642 75 2 a 1 91 001 91 00L 91 001 ds 1 ma Q c x x L 1 i 800 4 4 SL D 1 91 001 06 2 1542 2642 ew H 1 NY 24 82x 52 96 3 6619 1 1 955 255 55 0544 16 8 PRA 55 i 8168 6168 2068 26 lt C 1 1 1 x x szar sar Line 1 5 D D 1 1 5 amp lt mm ask 928 de tete tee
155. 0 0804 0657 0661 4 Q654 0659 ae 0670 Pond od P i y EN 1 1 US o 1 g Li 1 ud S J J 4 e 9 o e BN12 BN21 BN23 BN17 BN18 BN19 BN7 BN13 BN22 BN9 e BN8 BN10 e BN30 e e 103 CENTER BAR CENTER BAR CN88 J742 65 70 AVR347 AVR 45 FIP PCB Z harman kardon 902 24 2 11910 1 e 77 14444 E BK71 72 0000600 000 TL 8 D O pop es go x em JL 5 R E 5 D E 5708 5709 5710 782 5717 5720 Of od kod ES 0 4 R759 R760 gt ee a 45 PCB harman kardon CUP 119 10 2 5703 5704 5705 5706 5 6712 5702 Se 7 harman kardon AVR 45 STAND BY PCB CUP11910 5 0725 m harman kardon a i 2006 12 26 CUP1H910 A Qs NCN86 an ka R76 5711 C5 a QNO passa E LLL mici 7 CUP1I910 8 FOR CARD CABLE harman kardon ETOS PCB 09 C5 AVR 45 BL AVR145 245 345 144
156. 080i 720 x 483 27 SMPTE Enhanced definition programmable features 525p 625p 293M 8x oversampling 216 MHz output 720 x 483 27 BTA T 1004 Internal test pattern generator 720 x 483 27 ITU R Color hatch black bar flat frame 222 720 X 576 27 ITU R Individual Y and PrPb output delay BT 1358 Gamma correction 720 x 483 27 ITU R Programmable adaptive filter control BT 1362 Fully programmable YCrCb to RGB matrix 720 x 576 50 27 ITU R Undershoot limiter BT 1362 Macrovision Rev 1 2 525p 625p 1920 x 1035 30 74 25 SMPTE CGMS A 525p 625p 29 97 74 1758 240M Standard definition programmable features 1280 x 720 60 50 30 74 25 SMPTE 16x oversampling 216 MHz 25 24 296M Internal test pattern generator 23 97 74 1758 59 94 Color bars black bar 29 97 Controlled edge rates for start and end of active video 1920 x 1080 30 25 74 25 SMPTE Individual Y and PrPb output delay 29 97 74 1758 274M Uncersnoot imiter 1920 x 1080 30 25 24 7425 SMPTE Gamma correction 23 98 74 1758 274M AVR347 harman kardon ADV7322 HD PIXEL SHARPNESS DE H F NK INTER CR x PATTERN ADAPTIVE COLOR 2 LEAVE FILTER COLOR K CA El 2 cap CONTROL m AND PLL BI T CONTROL SD 16x WSs 05067 002 Figure 2 Detailed Functional Block Diagram TERMINOLOGY SD standard definition video
157. 0E is offering fully synchronous operation referenced to a positive edge clock All inputs and outputs are synchronized with the rising edge of the clock input The data paths are internally pipelined to achieve very high bandwidth All input and output voltage levels are compatible with LVTTL Programmable options include the length of pipeline Read latency of 1 2 or 3 the number of consecutive read or write cycles initi ated by a single control command Burst length of 1 2 4 8 or full page and the burst count sequence sequential or interleave A burst of read or write cycles in progress can be terminated by a burst terminate command or can be interrupted and replaced by a new burst read or write command on any cycle This pipeline design is not restricted by a 2N rule FEATURES Single 3 0V to 3 6V power supply e Auto refresh and self refresh e All device pins are compatible with LVTTL interface e 4096 refresh cycles 64ms e standard 400mil 50pin TSOP II with 0 8mm of pin e Programmable Burst Length and Burst Type itch 1 2 4 8 and Full Page for Sequence Burst e All inputs and outputs referenced to positive edge of system clock e Data mask function by UDQM LDQM e Programmable CAS Latency 1 2 3 Clocks 1 2 4 and 8 for Interleave Burst e Internal two banks operation Pbrfree Package ORDERING INFORMATION 7 161610 61610 51 200MHz 183MHz HY57V161610ETP 6l 166MHz 400
158. 1 4 4 c2785Y FR PER C505 10 50V R577 Sl SBL 5 1 5 sic 158 10 50 8 51618 6502 eM 5 C32006R 0512 Y g S LAVRA O49 2X ose Da 29 lt 6320068 6320068 522 sis 52 19 2 d i 5 SSE BITS 5 2535 ub ES 1805 2394 873 255 5 ft e 5 82 2545 8 328 N 5 PES 5 8 8 828 228 85 most 2 2 CEU Pd M e ERN 8 O o it tes 8 Piano Fane 1 r 1 C602 L 12 1 5 P 056 c320068 jet esoo sov avRus 0979 ZH E 5 1SS133M R503 1 825 R680 0502 R504 bases 5 9 R677 e AVR145 132 144 146 147 1 POWER MUTE 1 255 1 e e POWER MUTE Va 4852 H 1SS133M 5 0505 43K 0562 1 10000 50V AVR245 247 320068 088 47 1 4W 1 C3200GR 47 1 4 I 1 ress 5 ivi e e R652 1 12000 63V AVR345 347 gt 5 e o R667 16 2y BL_CH 523 2452 Nb C9 AES 9 2 45 53 47 1 4W 825 525 8 030882 SS P exe 47 1 4W RCH _VCC eS ee i E Sit 034237 0655 v R561 R562 z 2SB1560 ses ese Bp x SW 358 iss 528 ge oO N 259 259 0 5uH R565 R850 0 5uH vec R640 _ R851
159. 12 lt 8 F235 gt T ELIT 2 8 k 2 BNTI 1 1 E See 1 t 81 1 L E 5 2 R987 lt lt lt lt IF RIGHT e Lee C601 g E C604 IF e 1 12 R679 12 R676 1 on 0564 e 560 5 6 d C3200GR e e gt 267 54 0504 R502 21 18k 050 R501 Q561 18k THERMAL PROTECTOR JW92_ POWER_MUTE POWER_MUTE gt 6320068 R666 E need eim e 43K RY r 1 155133 43K 1551338 R989 OV 15V 47 1 4 47 1 4 N LRH 4 Q88 R654 _ 18 1 B LEFT e e HARE sys R669 SR_CH 48 R696 3K gt SBL i22 R651 N23 o 1 E 5 842 3 3 a 2 2259 e Zee 0657 BN17 x Q881 Y 47 1 4W a 59 24 225 1 1 5 24 5 C3423Y A EAD nen 2 94222 85 C3423Y R699 1501 Lg L504 ows Q661 IR n POWER MUTE i o So 2581560 Y oTs Boe Te 2581560 95 B RIGHT m SBR lt 559 Ree 0 5uH 1 ese 0 5uH 5 pes BN13 2245 225 225 s 4 T 51006 1 R639 R636 AVR132 144 OPTION VCCI OVERLOAD DETECTION coo 8961 e e e e e e e 955 225 BSo 18 1 4W SIG31 18 1 4W 227
160. 15 MM gt 200V DESCRIPTION The 74LCX32 is a low voltage CMOS QUAD 2 INPUT OR GATE fabricated with sub micron silicon gate and double layer metal wiring C MOS Figure 1 Pin Connection And IEC Logic Symbols September 2004 191 WITH 5V TOLERANT INPUTS Table 1 Order Codes PACKAGE 74LCX32MTR TSSOP T4LCX32TTR technology It is ideal for low power and high speed 3 3V applications it can be interfaced to 5V Signal environment for inputs It has same speed performance at 3 3V than 5V AC ACT family combined with a lower power consumption All inputs and outputs are equipped with protection circuits against static discharge giving them 2KV ESD immunity and transient excess voltage LC10990 Rev 6 1 11 AVR347 TALCX32 Figure 2 Input And Output Equivalent Circuit Table 2 Pin Description 7 harman kardon 5208971 Table 3 Truth Table Table 4 Absolute Maximum Ratings DC Input Voltage Voc Supply Voltage 0 5 to 7 0 0 5 to 7 0 0 5 to 7 0 DC Output Voltage High or Low State note 1 0 5 to Vcc 0 5 DC Output Current DC Output Diode Current note 2 V Vo DC Outp
161. 2 HDMI_SD3 HDMI_SD3 1 GND C602 ur 68 gt 82 1000 6 3 C632 Lil EB PR3 2 8 10 50 R603 C604 O zu 56 gt 68 1000 6 3 5 Be 3 C634 H I gt lt 2 Mn 10 50 S I 22 R605 C606 At 27 62 gt 68 1000 6 3 O 5 C636 2 gt o Lo C2 T 10 50 REVISION 2 4 6 SCHEMATIC MODEL AVR345 247 34 DESIGN CHECK APPROVE DRAWING NO uM MES 07 01 29 H W L 07 01 29 19185CM VIDEO 217 5 4 3 2 1 AVR347 harman kardon AVR347 345 WIRING DIAGRAM BN17 12P CUP11913 2 u 11915 USA 120V 60Hz i Pod B d M Bd HUDSON B d EUR 230V 50Hz gt gt 5 ONLY CN47 7P IT CUP11910 7 44 USA 4 DOWNLOAD UP EUR IN aun E CUP T9 Toss Z 0 7P EUR BN19 15 4L lt q i BN85 2P VIDEO B d CUP11916 7 CN42 11P USA
162. 21592 80 55 gt Ce CN BN90 e OQ DeL PDATED X SES CENTER 58 55 Ls TE 473 aa n 006 4 J 12 R214 d Q 11 OPT2 R207 0 204 03 R20 01 5 DSi QU S NES R48 52 A Re WAS 45 R233 R I R229 R228 R227 C452 64 R46 8 226 C225 22 221 Roa 218 2 gt 202 C201 lt 6 GND 8 CH c2248 045 2 DIPPIN ae 5 0 D 6272 C270 C27 E 1159 DATA Eee x ES LS v E il 188 6 0 119134 BE 55 C4 r e III I Cibi C262 0263 ac i C462 j 703 L L L 2 R48 50 Fg ab ME Mulli Ro 4055 A 8303 6 5 53 2 L C265 266 C267 268 che R72 cm d occu 6 I s d SR ia s 721 2838 R361 BR d EI 187 hani 2 e LIN ees 199 0mm oe C499 ss i AN IC lt lt 882022 22 IDE04 L 105 mm W 01 IC2 5 I 2 ULTI_IR M _ 3 ARR e e i i SDAS E TEMUT e lt gt 5 IC5 LE E m 232 5 fR C378 S arbo 5 00 A H3 dc E L L q S EI 59 gt 388 o 4 ej 1 0958 5 2 C28 720 02019 z 5 4 08 A 1 SIR 8
163. 22 harman kardon BEE 45919 000 00 SYMBOL GND LSCIN RSCIN LBCIN RBCIN GND LAIN RAIN CAIN LSAIN RSAIN LBAIN RBAIN SWAIN GND LBIN RBIN CBIN LSBIN RSBIN LBBIN RBBIN SWBIN GND LOUT AVR347 harman kardon Ml FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 1 CONTROL DATA NJW1197 control data 1s constructed with 16bits MSB LSB o pis iz on vio pz pa 52 Select Address Chip Address RECB Multi channel Input Signal A 1012999 Volume Control 5 Volume Control 6 i Control 7 Volume Control 8 Multi Channel Multi Channel I t Si 1 Input Signal B MSB LSB L channel Volume Control Oo 2 o 9 fa 9 7 7 L7 fo 3 s 7 L7 o 3 o o s 7 f o a 9 L3 7 fe 1L UAM SW channel Volume Control SWehannel Volume Control 0 mp uml Control Tor for tems De Pep be pe be pepe pp REC B Selector Input Selector SWch Volume Output REC REC REC REC REC Gain Control Bl 4 A2 A1 L Rch Volume Output Cch Volume Output y Gain Control Gain Control LS RSch Volume LB RBch Volume SWch 1 1 1 u Output Gain Control Output Gain Control Selector L Rch LS RSch LB RBch 1 1 1 1 A Selector Selector Selector Selector Don t Care
164. 2624 R968 4 5 R967 5 58 AVR345 230 CLT5J038ZE gt FUNC_MUTE1 e e i e e e sv vas Zz 8 A C IN 18 1 4W 1M 5 6K 1 OS zn 7 m 1 gt E 8 5 pap du i accent ie ea L ae gt RIOM ze CJA523FBYA USA AVR145 245 144 146 147 247 z S gt CJA2B043ZA EUR AVR145 245 132 0998 2 lt C903 DEL 8 AVR347 345 230 CWZSR4001BN91A CJJBAO06ZW lt R969 N N CJA2A070Z USA AVR347 S N 1 2 5 T 55 5 CJA2B0542 EUR AVR345 230 N 10K x 25 ain 885 a2 OOE SHEE RE S C H M i D G R 1 i UUU D U 0931 EA A A A LE ae 5 an a a e a facra JW93 AVR145 245 345 25 5 55 5 5 5 51601 zuo m 2 5 zi R980 JW93 AVR147 247 347 516100 601 eg EQ g g ST 5V A V R 1 4 5 2 4 5 4 D 1 2 2 sc 47K IMPORTNAT SAFETY NOTICE INPORTANT FOR SAFETY WHEN REPLACING ANY OF THESE COMPONENTS USE ONLY MANUFACTURE S SPECIFIED PARTS THE UNIT OF RESISTANCE IS OHM K 1000 OHM M 1000 KOHM THE UNIT OF CAPACITANCE IS MICROFARAD uF pF 10 uF THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM MAY MODIFIED AT ANY TIME WIHE THE IMPROVEMENT OF PERFORMANCE 208 MODEL AV R 16 147 247 347 ESIGN CH
165. 47 harman kardon Ref Designator _ NEA Number Description INPUT INPUT PCB i 1 men a aot RES cii lt El c sg Miscellaneous 5 VENE 68 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator PartNumber Description MES eT INPUT 1 BEAD See 60 1608 SIZE HH 1M1608 600 a ene MAIN PCB CUP11911 C j j a ___________ _ Capacitors 0 2 t ee ee 69 AVR347 harman kardon Ref PartNumbr Description 1 ee MAIN ola TEL itl m L ss oat ss 70 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator PartNumber Description Qy ________ _ _ ____ _ _____ __ ea Tae ith LL GGETESVKLESEENK GaP ELEGT s a EA eS Semiconductors po OO NENNEN 71 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Number Number Description ty 22 4 L ee meae TRANSISTOR NEN E 72 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Paun PartNumber Description E a 2 DC en MAIN 5050 m HL on TRANSISTOR rr a Eo ceu Eu Resistors 1
166. 5 199 AVR347 BLOCK DIAGRAM CPU harman kardon anm CIG VFD DISPLAY PATTERN DRIVER ea Refer to 5 5 2 x Grid Data zt Sequence Es AC Data Order 8 2 Segment Map D D ex 2 F2 VDD1 VDD2 VSS 27 RH CH VDD CL VDD NOTE MODEL 18 01 BLOCK DIAGRAM RH Current limit registor for protecting IC CH CL Low pass filter for noise filtering RH 220 0 1 uF CL 0 1 uF FCT Filament is center tab grounded 200 Rev 1 20 Feb 2003 AVR347_ harman kardon PATTERN DETAILS T E mm t ogona 200 eonoo 96600 ponon nnaun 22900 mas D 4 A 5 CI b 90990 8 HERAB 59058 0909650 00000 00000 90900 00550 cnupad 90060 90000 g LJ 0008 00500 o udpo 095000 0600506 00906 60050 E 580038 poaoo acano 00000 oooga ooo angon i aan DKJPROIOGICI 0 VMAx 5 in 88890 pogan 8698 86088 Benna 88908 0 02 bg DSP sii VIDS c FMAM D HEADPHONE 57CH STEREO 55888 paasa 55555 peoga 85565 00488 Babas papas 99590 88888 0888
167. 6 E HD BO as gCVBS QU lt VIDEO00 4 AA BN 80 6 HD_G3 gt UMA UT G7 gt HD 67 Green DATA Input QUT 9110600 ADV7322 on 8 ACND G4 gt i rt 66 gt HD_G6 E 50426 ANALOG OUTPUT B SV3P 6s s an ib es gt D EE 5 GNDS dini HD 66 gt 6 1 a es MC aS EM 3 S Bap 62 62 Green DATA 99 ber cNDS 0 OUT LV 33 gt PET gt P cap 55 OUT LV ee gt u 4 HDMI et eee UU on 5 MCU amp JANUS 3 CN By ET HDMI SDI 57 6 ACND gt TEER c gt CE R6 gt HDMI MUTEOUT 20 RS HD_B3 gt 303 COMPOSITE gt NIE 4 R4 Red DATA Blue DATA Input HD_B4 gt E 20 R3 2 RNBO HD 85 5 500 2 GNDS 2D iS 2 5 2 lt R1 5 HD B7 5 GNDS lt RS ta ed 3 C4P Ac x AVDD_OUT_LV_33 mw SC naz 6845 AVDD_ SC 3 m AVSS_LV ren p 3 S Bros epee E 6 RE x lt ace Ede gt gt t 576 J aw 1 I lt oc 5 C814 VO GND Ze eo o lt S Z x Z o TAN a AVDD_LV_33 Jou VOUT2 f a m2 amp nnoae um E OV 2 4 x 8 vvi 8 oo 4
168. 87 RB95 HPL OUT 1 1 220 953 680P e N e I U P 1 1 9 1 0 4 9 TT SN 5507 xU 50V 100 i 5 5 PA 4 7K S2 S S 2 5 875 0735 RB97 MN R918 HPR OUT lt AVR245 345 147 247 347 OPTION 2 X um SEBAS I D 9 scite ree a ect tette ahead EIN 155133 S 53 225 EZ 0736 1 2 C2874 ET ove 4 7K E ee 0734 R32 22 870 gt JK83 028718 253 823 EZ 15 m 5 220 SBOR Wh R919 CUP11910 1 FIP BN84 e ANA E WW 7k o a 4 BN84 0 T s ED 220 330 16 1 5K 0737 C2874 C866 R896 0739 a t 100 07252 H 10uF 50V gt E EE CJJ2E026Z 1 o 5 1 oc gt 15V e VOL LED CTRL R893 a o 2 l g 33K gt L Wa x 0724 powtR H 2 BN92 i TO VR JACK PCB FRO amp P 4 2 745 CUP11910 6 sack VR HEAD PHONE amp MIC VID3orVID4 ANLOG AVRIA7 PART AVR245 345 247 347 PART KEY PCB CUP11910 2 L Tu uu 345 247 vM a Sa C UC ER G
169. ANK S BLANK S HSYNC S VSYNC Y7 to YO C7 to CO S7 to SO RESET Rset1 Rser2 SCLK SDA ALSB Vpp VREF EXT_LF RTC_SCR_TR IO TESTO to TEST5 Digital Ground Analog Ground Pixel Clock Input for HD 74 25 MHz Only PS Only 27 MHz SD Only 27 MHz Pixel Clock Input Requires a 27 MHz reference clock for progressive scan mode or a 74 25 MHz 74 1758 reference clock in HDTV mode This clock is only used in dual modes Compensation Pin for DACs Connect 0 1 pF capacitor from COMP pin to Vaa CVBS Green Y Y Analog Output Chroma Blue U Pb Analog Output Luma Red V Pr Analog Output In SD Only Mode CVBS Green Y Analog Output in HD Only Mode and Simultaneous HD SD Mode Y Green HD Analog Output In SD Only Mode Luma Blue U Analog Output in HD Only Mode and Simultaneous HD SD Mode Pr Red Analog Output In SD Only Mode Chroma Red V Analog Output in HD Only Mode and Simultaneous HD SD Mode Pb Blue HD Analog Output Video Horizontal Sync Control Signal for HD in Simultaneous SD HD Mode and HD Only Mode Video Vertical Sync Control Signal for HD in Simultaneous SD HD Mode and HD Only Mode Video Blanking Control Signal for HD in Simultaneous SD HD Mode and HD Only Mode Video Blanking Control Signal for SD Only Video Horizontal Sync Control Signal for SD Only Video Vertical Sync Control Signal for SD Only SD or Progressive Scan HDTV Input Port for Y Data Input por
170. AVR 347 may be turned on a Press the Standby On Switch on the front panel See Figure 63 b Press the Source Select Button on the front panel See Figure 64 Figure 64 Source Select Button C Using the remote press any one of these buttons AVR DVD CD TAPE The Bridge HDMI 1 HDMI 2 VID2 VIDS VIDA XM AM FM 6 8CH See Figure 65 POWER OFF CD vos C qo e Figure 65 AVR and Input oelectors NOTE Any time you press one of the remote s Input Selectors DVD CD TAPE The Bridge XM VID2 VIDA or HDMI 1 HDMI 2 the remote will switch modes so that it will only operate that device To control the receiver press the AVR Button to return the remote to AVR mode To turn the receiver off press either the Standby On Switch on the front panel or press the AVR Button and the OFF Button on the remote Unless the receiver will not be used for an extended period of time for example if you will be on vacation it is not necessary to turn off the Master Power Switch When the Master Power Switch is turned off any 33 harman kardon OPERATION settings you have programmed including system configuration and preset radio stations will be preserved for up to four weeks Sleep Timer You may program the AVR to play for up to 90 minutes and then turn off automatically using the sleep timer Press the Sleep Button on the re
171. B1OUT1 16bit timer 1 input 1 16bit Timer 1 count capture trigger input Interrupt Request Pin 8 Interrupt request on rising edge Port 86 I O port 16bit timer 1 output O 16bit Timer 1 output 16bit Port 87 port FETTE A AA PP ET EHE IT ATH A IANS FT ET Era i A TETTE T n cc Sy y m AVR347 T5CC1 Table 2 2 1 Pin names and functions 3 3 _ Pins Port 90 I O port LAE Output Serial Send Data 0 programmable open drain RXDO Input Serial Receive Data O P92 1 VO Port 92 VO port Serial Clock 0 input O Output Serial Data Send Enable 0 Clear to Send Port 93 I O port Serial Send Data 1 programmable open drain Port 94 port with pull up resistor Input Serial Receive Data 1 VO Port 95 port with pull up resistor Serial Clock 1 Serial Data Send Enable 1 Clear to Send Port 96 port open drain output Input Low frequency oscillator connection pi Port 97 I O port open drain output Output Low frequency oscillator connection pi INT1 INTA PAL ALE U 5 Fixed to AM1 1 1 Oupu Openpn ooo O Reset initializes T5CC1 With pull up resistor Pin for reference voltage input to AD converter H Power supply pin for AD converter bin for AD converter 0 V
172. Buttons to access the codes for the devices programmed into the remote harman kardon INSTALLATION You may have noticed that three of the Input Selectors look different from the others see Figure 36 For the DVD CD TAPE The Bridge and HDMI 1 HDMI 2 Selectors there is a primary source the name of which is printed on the button and a secondary source the name of which 5 printed in green above the button When the remote is in the device mode for the primary source e g DVD pressing the device selector will cause it to light up in red When the remote is in the secondary source s device mode the selector will light up in green when pressed To switch between the primary and secondary device modes press the selector twice quickly in succession The selector will retain this selection until the next time you toggle between the primary and secondary device modes That is if you press the DVD CD Selector twice quickly so that the CD source is activated then press another source selector such as Video 1 the next time you press the DVD CD Selector the remote will return to the CD device mode The AVR 3475 remote is factory programmed to control an iPod docked in The Bridge and many Harman Kardon DVD and CD players If you have other source devices in your system follow these steps to program the correct codes into the remote 1 Using the codes in Tables A9 A16 of the Appendix look up the product type e 9 DVD cable TV bo
173. C1 is a high speed 16 bit microcontroller designed for the control of various mid to large scale equipment T5CC1 comes in a 100 pin flat package Listed below are the features 1 High speed 16 bit CPU 900 L1 CPU e Instruction mnemonics are upward compatible with TLCS 90 900 General purpose registers and register banks 16 Mbytes of linear address space e 16 bit multiplication and division instructions bit transfer and arithmetic instructions Micro DMA 4 channels 598 ns 2 bytes at 27 MHz 2 Minimum instruction execution time 148 ns at 27 MHz 3 Built in RAM 16 Kbytes Built in ROM 256 Kbytes Flash memory 4 Kbytes mask ROM used for booting DVCC 3 ADTRG P53 P DVSS 3 ANO to 7 10 Bit CH P50 to P57 AD doin 2 oe Clock Gear AVCC AVSS Converter M EMUO VREFL gt GOL x EMU1 XT1 P96 Lose Maren Ls SIO UART IrDA Aviad H SIO0 4 32 bits gt 1 SCLKO CTSO P92 SRL TF ALE TXD1 293 SIo UART P00 to 07 RXD1 94 gt 9101 p ADO to AD7 SCLK1 CTS1 P95 lt gt P10 to P17 d to AD15 A15 P60 lt Serial Bus Watchdog fo to P27 SO SDA P61 interface Timer WDT 16 to A7 A23 SCL 62 lt 1 gt RD P30 WR P31 mem WR P32 8 Bit Timer special timer Port 3 HW for CLOCK lt gt P34
174. CRJ10DJ302T GPIO CEC_HS ay 23 Y 0548 42V5AA 3 3VVI 2 11 ADISBOBRT 22 ca47 8200 Rang M 8827 T 826 4825 4824 82 822 821 T 3900pF 680 ba m 830 1 D 1u x ee CVIM25PBOVMWGTP gte Option RESET HSYNC1 exe 85 1 T EUIS SY aay REN u u k Mir 2 2 18 0302030305082 3050202020200 2080 8 2 5 5 2 5 2 2 222 2 15 1 g pe CO Sapte ADD ti sucl_g HITT ISS TIT TIT SSIS IOS SST SIO 0035 rou AE lt gt us f vDD18 AB 24 Jaa e TU s Pei Igoe SAVVIS AAS TIONS Oo LU OU A aN PD36 ROM 512 80 Y ADD Gornection 19 NC 2 eJf222222526 022222252 9222222022222 9 1 pp37 i H_HS 8 698054545575 16855 11 11 15 26 58u i 3 Idaa dI LI SILLAL S lt lt lt 20 20720 j m VDD18_C lt gt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt spl En 14 2 heel MR ADC_TEST 5 aaaea
175. CT e o RESET scr 3 3VC m amp GND TO DOWNLOAD PCB CVBS e PC DMP RX S PC DMP L REC R449 5 5 8 1 GND R REC rep 2L L cH is ST gc AVR347 XM e 4 su NO OPTION R433 8 g POD_SV_Y it AVR345 230 e e ae 5 5 CRIMBAI221T 5 I Option RO o TRUE m BAHL BLS STS 100 not use 5 cvs d A 0400 155355 R434 R436 R438 ab gt He I E ee BE IS 525 d 28 5 E C420 R430 75 520 L 4 1 47K 4 4 NJM2068 5 3 TUNI EA ro ND 5 iPod_IN_Lch 2 CO 52x 5 1 R404 can e wd EU 10K 5 6VX 22 16 R443 R445 R447 i e a W AN 5VV 5VV 1 C445 1 1 bs TO XM PCB s 4384 gt 22 16V R441 ela XM MUTE gt i C433 Um 5 Um AMRED i 2 ama pan i i s lt x 2 5 Option OPTION S ST S MN AS a Sue 1 Option I T 2 do not use 1 1 t Bk MEV_STB DsP_RESeT ut Euh Lu MI LC LR eU Ad uie c tea I SCP1_BSY HDMI_1_SW FUNC_MUTE1 DSPDATA lt
176. CTU 7 to 1080p Features Dual Input HDMI 1 1 HDCP 1 1 DVI 1 0 compliant receiver Integrated PanelLink TMDS e Digital video interface supports video processors o 24 bit RGB YCbCr 4 4 4 16 20 24 bit YCbCr 4 2 2 8 10 12 bit YCbCr 4 2 2 ITU BT 656 12 bit DMO Digital Multimedia Output RGB YCbOr 4 4 4 clocked with rising amp falling edges Color Space Conversion for both RGB to YCbCr and YCbCr to RGB both 601 and 709 o Auto video mode configuration simplifies system firmware design e Analog RGB and YPbPr output 10 bit DAC o Separate or Composite Syncs Sync on G e Digital audio interface supports high end audio systems o Four programmable 125 outputs for connection to low cost DACs at 32 192kHz o S PDIF output supports PCM Dolby Digital DTS digital audio transmission 32 192 kHz Fs using IEC 60958 and IEC 61937 o Programmable Channel Mapping for 145 Outputs o Auto audio error detection with programmable soft mute e Integrated HDCP decryption engine for receiving protected audio and video content o Pre programmed HDCP keys provide highest level of key security simplifies manufacturing o Full support for HDCP Repeaters up to 15 attached downstream devices e Software compatible with Sil 9993 O O O O e Flexible power management 144 pin TQFP package Sil DS 0118 A 145 AVR347 harman kardon Sil 9031 HDMI PanelLink Cinema Receiver Data Sheet silicon Image Pin Diagram
177. C_RX_IN HSDP_DATA VSS VSS COMMAND_SEL TEST VDD IRQ VSS VSS OSC_IN VDD RESET OSC_OUT VSS SLAVE_SEL 23 COMM RX DIG C 13 COMM TX DIG C 14 COMM TX 115 COMM C 18 COMM RX M 19 COMM TX M 22 COMM TX Figure 3 1 Pin Connection Top View 110 AVR347 harman kardon PRELIMINARY 14 Aug 04 User Spec XM Digital Transceiver Integrated Circuit Rev 3 3 2 Pin Descriptions Table 3 2 Pin Descriptions Function Function Pame pe in Slave Mode in Master Mode SOLES _TXRX Low Speed Data Port Output Low Speed Data Port Input LVTTL S T Pin Un EJ P S Out System Controller Bus CBM System Controller Bus CBM PELA M Out Transmit Data Out S In System Controller System Controller Bus CBM 5 scRXIN etn Receive Data I Command Mode Select Command Mode Select In 7 COMMAND SEL 12 Command Mode 12 Command Mode LVTTL S T 0 Normal Mode 0 Normal Mode IRO S Out Interrupt Request Out Interrupt Request Out 4m Open M Out Active Low Active Low Drain S In Asynchronous Reset In Asynchronous Reset In RESET Active Low Active Low LVTTL S T S In M S Mode Select In M S Mode Select In High Slave Mode Low Master Mode alee S In DT Comm Bus External DT Comm Bus Extemal e MINERA DIN Transceiver Receive Data In Transceiver Receive Data In POST D
178. Chip address is set by chip address select terminal ADR status Chip Address Chip Address Select Terminal ADR Chip Address tres Ser Tina ODD 2268 m o x o 1 The mute function can be controlled externally If the Mute control terminal 71pin is switched to High Multi Channel outputs are muted immediately hardware mute External mute control terminal MUTE 71pin Setting 123 AVR347 harman kardon ST202E 77 ST232E 15 ESD PROTECTED 5V RS 232 TRANSCEIVER a ESDPROTECTION FOR RS 232 I O PINS 15 KV HUMAN BODY MODEL GUARANTEED 120 kbps DATE RATE GUARANTEED SLEW RATE RANGE 8 to 30Vus OPERATE FROM A SINGLE 5V POWER SUPPLY DESCRIPTION Plastic Package Micro Package The ST202E ST232E are a 2 driver 2 receiver devices designed for RS 232 and 28 communications in harsh enviroments Each transmitter output and receiver input is protected against 15KV electrostatic discharge ESD shocks The drivers meet 232 and CCITT V 28 specifications at data rates up to 120Kbps when loaded in accordance with the 54 W T Micro Package Large TSSOP Package EIA TIA 232E specification while the ST202E operates with four The ST202E 232E use a single 5V supply Capacitors further reducing cost and board voltage space The ST232E operates with four 1uF capacitors ORDER CODES Type Temperature Package Co
179. Circuits Wide frequency range OdB at 100MHz typ 3dB at 300MHz typ Internal 6dB amplifier Selectable Bypass or 6dB External logic discernment terminal External logic control terminal Selectable slave address Power Save Circuit Bi CMOS Technology Package Outline QFP48 BLOCK DIAGRAM WR IN2 INS YR INA LO WR QUT2 INi Pb G IN2 Pb G INS INA 3 OUTI PWG OUT2 1 IN2 IN3 1 4 C OUTI OUT2 ADDRESS 117 NJW1321FP1 AVR347 harman kardon NJW1321 CONFIGURATION a NE e oem 48 gt gt gt gt gt lt lt gt lt lt PILI LI LI EI 1 LI I Jj j IL j j TET 38 25 GND LIT 39 241 Pb OUT2 PriN4 PORTO V PORT YINS TI IL PrOUT2 GND CTT V Pb IN3 CLIL VREF V CLL DGND PrIN3 LIL IL GND GND L IL IL SDA 2 11 48 C SCL 1 14 Fel oe Poco ier Loa Ld od LJ LJ OJ 4 LJ LOJ NON C gt 2222252522 6 2 9 0 gt 2 lt 1 V 13 PORT2 25 AUXO 37 V 2 Pb IN2 14 ADR 26 AUX1 38 Pb IN4 3 GND 15 SCL 27 Y OUT2 39 GND 4 Pr IN2
180. E EET NIME ON RD E RUNE STAND BY PCB vour 90 z RSA CUP11910 3 CVD50BOBBWGA 1 met E 8 1 R828 kawa 220 680 1 e IC41 Select 12727 1 25 1 5 15 5708 1 R935 NJU7301 Ur OFF R CVD50BOBBWGA E 5 8 200967 ji 10K 2 2 Eh MR R920 R921 _ R922 8824 SSN 8825 I As SHE i Only AVR147 DK e 5 TEST_TONE 1K 10k 1K 220 G 680 lt T DOLBY H 1 0828 nox lt pra 5702 5709 l i m 5 eire ER ez C Sex sts 47P R923 412V 52 TONE MODE 2 29 8 0 0 508 1 590onm eso 597 5717 gt 100 ome x amm i 703 7 710 9 255 e 1 825 H 228 d 320 SURR DO 525 STEREO ME R CH WP S701 1 257 257 e o H E oo 578 1 ul a ON NJM2068M eve ool 5 l o nox CHANNEL H 15 L CH 5v POWER ON OFF 74 4 2 lt DTS 0 6 ES 1 SAKCTDAMTR surR_up Sok PRESET_DN T 2 3 528 205 SSS 1 75 I ese gt BTS l e e e 579 SIGNAL 6825 e 8924
181. GECSURVEEZST CHIPELEST zur a 90 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator Part Number Description ________ _ ____ _ _ _ ____ ____ ___ __ ee PCB CUP11915 oma oae cii s j Semiconductors po po 91 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator Pat Number Description ty p HUDSON HDMI PCB CUP11915 _ eee LLL et Resistors 1 eer RES 4ARRAY 160874 92 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Ret Designator Number Description es PCB CUP11915 so s 93 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator _ EE Number Description 24 22 es PCB CUP11915 oa sa 2 2 Miscellaneous ____ KCHG A300 j CUSHON CUSHION 2 EA 94 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Descriptio J Qy _ HUDSON THON PCB CUP11915 ae oC COIL CHIP FOR a 1922 12980092 CHOKE COIL CHIP FOR HDMI 1 EA 1923 7 012980094 CHOKE COIL CHIP FOR HDMI EA CHOKE COIL CHIP CHOKE COL EHE FOR HDMI Ls XM PCB ee 4 gt C Capacitors
182. H 1 9 1 M 1 OZ gt 4 2069 062 7069 I 1769 6569 0862 ic lt EIS e H E 19575 1 i 7 969 59 sl 00 NI H 5 2169 9163 8 8 225 gt N i H S 1 loo N gt ee m mL ni 5 2 2o ams s 8 1 Nae I 1 5 28 22 ress m 1 id 2 Ej 1 1 1 1 5 5 _ p D MEM gt ee E 5 5 H 1 224 5 28 C LO 3 831 582 ME 5 is F CN H 1 1 e 1 gt asz oo gt 0 ii gt gt gt 1 LO 2 MN Q 6569 0762 i oe 1 K 200 06 9582 i nZ20 0 A06 1 E 5989 1 oc 1569 gt Cc 105 01 i z 1 01 1 i X z Rp Oj 1 lt S z E Ao gt 5 i E F E 1 1 1 o i o o i H g x 1 1 5 I I a 5 d ra 1 1 4 1 1 lt DIOIOIOIC 66N2 ozna 824 SNVNI i 0 8 031935 1 Lay
183. HDMI allowing for only a single video connection from the AVR to the video display HDMI Inputs and Output HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a newer type of connection for transmitting digital audio and video signals between devices With the AVR 3475 powerful processor you may connect up to two HDMI equipped source devices to the inputs using a single cable connection while benefiting from superior digital audio and video performance However if your video display is not HDMI compatible you will need to connect the device to one of the other source inputs selecting a coaxial or optical digital audio input and analog video input 5ee the Connections and Installation sections for more information lf your video display has an HDMI input but some of your sources have only analog video outputs you may still rely on just the HDMI video connection to your display the AVR 347 will automatically transcode analog video signals up to 20p to the HDMI format High resolution analog 10801 or higher signals are not available at the HDMI Output AVR347 harman kardon REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS The AVR 347 is Simplay HD verified for compatibility via the HDMI connection with other Simplay HD verified products CD and Tape Audio Inputs These jacks may be used to connect audio only source components e g CD player tape deck Do not connect a turntable to these jacks without a phono preamp Tape Outputs These jacks may be
184. IFICATIONS FOR DESCRIPTION OF B SERIES CMOS DEVICES DESCRIPTION The HCF4053B is a monolithic integrated circuit fabricated in Metal Oxide Semiconductor PIN CONNECTION ORDER CODES DP TUBE HCF4053BEY HCF4053BM1 HCF4053M013TR technology available in DIP and SOP packages The HCF4053B analog multiplexer demultiplexer is a digitally controlled analog switch having low ON impedance and very low OFF leakage current This multiplexer circuit dissipate extremely low quiescent power over the full Vss and Vee supply voltage range independent of the logic state of the control signals When a logic 1 is present at the inhibit input terminal all channel are off This device is a triple 2 channel multiplexer having three separate digital control inputs A B and C and an inhibit input Each control input selects one of a pair of channels which are connected in a single pole double throw configuration TC4053B e ml TOP VIEW October 2002 AVR347 harman kardon HCF4053B INPUT EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT PIN DESCRIPTION PINNo SYMBOL NAME AND FUNCTION 11 10 9 Binary Control Inputs 6 NH inhibit Inputs 12 19 2 T IN OUT 5 3 Output OUTIN OUTIIN OUTIIN Negative Supply Voltage 16 Positive Supply Voltage TRUTH TABLE INHIBIT CorBorA 0 0 1 ay
185. M 559 5 z 82549 THE UNIT OF CAPACITANCE IS MICROFARAD uF 6 pF 10 uF THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM MAY MODIFIED AT ANY TIME WITH THE MPROVEMENT OF PERFORMANCE REVISION 2 4 6 SCHEMATIC DIAGRA SH T AVR S45 247 34 DESIGN CHECK APPROV DRAWING NO 213 M S K W Y Y H W L SCN 07 01 18 07 01 18 07 01 18 INPUT AVR347 harman kardon 345 34 RT MULTI ind GUP AVR345 347 PART REGULATOR SECTION R480 e 1K LA Q454 HVTKTC2874BT C450 180K 470 35V HVINJM2068MDTE1 180K HVDINS819T 468 4 7K MULTI_M Q453 HVTKTC2874BT R499 KJJ9L004Z 1K IC93 L7905CP 1 1 a 1 1 n BUS VDD z 1 N out 2 298 d za BUS GND 5 3 545 E s GND PIE 5 i L7805CP 3 n ti 2 3 HVINJW1159V 1 our 2 ez 1 C453 gt 5 5 855 5 E cm 2 MULTI Nr 8 275 GND 215
186. MODE and BASS MODE Use the 4 Buttons A w on the remote to change the treble or bass settings as desired The display will return to normal a few seconds after your last command J TONE E skis m m Figure 69 Tone Button You may alternatively adjust the tone controls using the 101 050 menu system Press the OSD Button on the remote to view the Menu System The Input Setup tab will be highlighted Press the Set Button to activate the Input Setup menu If you wish to make any changes to the TONE BASS or TREBLE settings use the A W keys on the remote to move the cursor to the line you wish to change and press the Set Button Once you have changed the setting using the lt p gt Buttons press the oet Button to enter the new setting When you have finished either wait until the display times out and disappears press the OSD Button to clear the display or move the cursor to the menu tabs on the left side of the screen if you wish to make other changes using the menu system 34 harman kardon NOTE The AVR 347 does not have a conventional balance control The Ezset EQ process compensates for any character istics of your room or speakers and we recommend that you leave the settings as they are after EzSet EQ has been run However you may manually adjust the levels of the left and right channels decreasing one and increasing the other by the same amount using the Channel Adjust submenu as described i
187. OLTAGE Vcc 2 7V to 3 6V for Program Erase and Read m ACCESS TIME 70 90ns PROGRAMMING TIME 10us per Byte Word typical gm 19 MEMORY BLOCKS 1 Boot Block Top or Bottom Location 2 Parameter and 16 Main Blocks PROGRAM ERASE CONTROLLER Embedded Byte Word Program algorithms m ERASE SUSPEND and RESUME MODES Read and Program another Block during Erase Suspend m UNLOCK BYPASS PROGRAM COMMAND Faster Production Batch Programming m TEMPORARY BLOCK UNPROTECTION MODE COMMON FLASH INTERFACE 64 bit Security Code LOW POWER CONSUMPTION Standby and Automatic Standby m 100 000 PROGRAM ERASE CYCLES per BLOCK m ELECTRONIC SIGNATURE Manufacturer Code 0020h Top Device Code M29W800DT 22D7h Bottom Device Code M29W800DB 225Bh April 2002 179 3V Supply Flash Memory Figure 1 Packages TSOP48 N 12 x 20mm E FBGA TFBGA48 ZA 8 x 6 ball array 1 41 AVR347 harman kardon M29W800DT M29W800DB Figure 3 SO Connections Figure 4 TSOP Connections 105462 105461 q 6 41 180 AVR347 5V TOLERANT INPUTS HIGH SPEED fax 150 MHz MAX at Vcc 3V POWER DOWN PROTECTION ON INPUTS AND OUTPUTS SYMMETRICAL OUTPUT IMPEDANCE PCI BUS LEVELS GUARANTEED AT 24 mA BALANCED PROPAGATION DELAYS tPLH OPERATING VOLTAGE RANGE 2 0V to 3 6V 1 5V Data Retention PIN AND FUNCTION COMPATIBLE WI
188. ONLY IPOWER MUTE gt e 1 eel e e 1 gt e 20 1 SUB se Jt 43k rere 1 8K 1951334 43K pers 0563 Ask 5225 iL AVRI46 147 1 D803 B 5520205 sete 543 1 4 toT zy f a7 SL CH z s sa 1653 MU a 47 1 4W SL 9615 5225 era e NES 35 WW R813 82 gt 8S 33 R698 0914 51617 o h 1 YAN 080 aaa OH 0883 NUS 0653 BN21 1 1 1 s gt 47 1 4W D gos 1 acs 1 C scu 0824 are id 2581560 1566 63423 2581560 47 1 40 32 5 5927 STA 25g z g 0843 Se D 5 55 m 1503 H 8 d i C3198Y sso ese 220 0 5uH 1 C3198Y Bes bes DOR Y Y 1 SBR S28 I 0 5 1 1 A SR R822 _ R638 51019 T H S191 e 0 LS 22 18 1 4W 51601 1 1 1 BS 1 18 1 4W 1 FL 9616 est x L 1 1 1 R936 o X C A V R 1 4 1 4 4 1 1 6 1 4 R991 516100 601 cece ec ewe cece siasa 3 5 SIGL00 60 180K E SBL 51617 51600 ARS FAN t
189. OS out vL T 8 23 DOWNLOAD MODE E w The TM 1 gt DVD SLSR C W SBL SBR 2 OUT IN 6 L BCH Cona OPTIC L 2 ron L sa Mur B Ul sunnouno 8 CENTER 120V 60Hz The related logos anji registered SWITCHED adem ts of XM Satellite R dio Inc r gt 5 S e MODEL NO 7 harman kardon NORTHRIDGE CALIFORNIA USA AC INPUT 120V 60Hz 390W SOW 05 PN CEN Vall Mire O AVIS RISQUE DE CHOC lt 218 10 ELE TRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR WARNING REDUCE 1 6 RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK OO 3 89 C 0 NOT EXPOSE APPLIANCE RAIN 0 MOISTURE LIST D CTROCU NE PAS POSER C T APPA IR B CEN ER UE ALA PLUIE NI A PRE OUT T MF PEAKERS 8 0 JUTLET cours CD Preamp Surround Front Speaker 6 8 Coaxial Switched AC Optical Digital Inputs Outputs Back Outputs Channel Digital Accessory Audio Inputs 1 2 amp 3 Multiroom Inputs Audio Outlet Preamp Multiroom Output Outputs IR Input Multiroom A BUS Port Subwoofer Remote surround Surround Center Speaker Optical Digital AC Power Audio Output IR Input Back Multiroom Speaker Outputs Audio Output Cord Input Outputs Remote IR Speaker Outputs Outputs Carr
190. P1_SDA gt COAX_OUT 0SP_RESET STB SPDIF gt Ga 393 uid 3 2 3 4 lt e m Sra 33 x 5 0 0 19 5 lt 2 ere 0 0 71 SPDIF MODE DIR MASTER aye me 5 55 HDMI 125 MODE HDMI MASTER m SIE x ADC MODE DSP MASTER 3V3 7X8 R724 i DIR MODE DIR MASTER e R728 1K E E E 90 5 8 DALO 15 2 8 N a Sey 7 o x 5 55 21515 5 A 5 CRJ10DJTROT 5 s x lt 512 3 22 amp az amp lt 2 aj lt el e e S S lt 2 al gt el 9 P 1 1 1 1 lt lt 2 E S 5 2 SERERE AD16 E s 5 2 2 5 8 aj al 2 amp al 8 177 RN72 _ _ _10 4 08 7 TO 02 7 9 99 997 96 95 BO 90 X89 X88 67 7 176 S o _ 1 9 0 09 09 AD15 M5 A16 4 Zt VDD gf ae A0 AB GPIOB EDEN aO AD7 GPIO7 9 ADIS AM S 8756 2 DAB 090 0015 Ce TNG Pop ane cPioe 12 014 vss DAg 001 Roar DAG VDDIO7 i 15 gt 5 6765 10K ADI A12 0015 1 DAT 550 550 4 1 8766 10K NM ANM 3 CP AD amp GPIOA 15 010 007 DAIS DAI0 002 20013 DAS n GNDIO7 ER ooo oo e h CG mae
191. Pt O lt 4 9 CCUSTHIOAKC CAP CHIP EA C490 HCECICRV2100T CAP ELEC SMD t0UF 16V 1 HCECICRV22201 CAP ELEC SMD 220816 1 C492 21007 ELEC SMD Jt0UF 16V 1 Ca93 HCECICRV2100T SM HOUF 16V 1 EA pue E Semiconductors So Roes DOE SONKEN wees EX 0404 7 HVDRB160L60TE25 DIODE SCHOTTKEY BARRIER RB160L 60TE25 1 EA ics cvxworc _____ O O o pw CSA 95 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Ref Designator Number _ Number Description ty oea ea e E 5 po 12222222242 EE RES 4ARRAY 160874 RES 4ARRAY 160874 eee eS Miscellaneous ee ee eee eee __ S jj C S S 96 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator Part p P HE AVR 347 TUNER MODULE 97 AVR347 harman kardon 247 0mm CUP 11916 AN OWP119 16 9 SL CEN CH N 4 N 4 gt gt lt lt 2020 N Cn gt gt lt lt 2020 ONLY VR82
192. R347 harman kardon 8 Mbit SPI Serial Flash SST25VF080B Data Sheet PIN DESCRIPTION Top View Top View 1296 08 soic S2A P1 0 1296 08 wson QA P2 0 8 LEAD SOIC 8 CONTACT WSON FIGURE 1 PIN ASSIGNMENTS TABLE 1 PiN DESCRIPTION Serial Clock To provide the timing of the serial interface Commands addresses or input data are latched on the rising edge of the clock input while output data is shifted out on the falling edge of the clock input Serial Data Input To transfer commands addresses or data serially into the device Inputs are latched on the rising edge of the serial clock Serial Data Output To transfer data serially out of the device Data is shifted out on the falling edge of the serial clock Outputs Flash busy status during Programming when reconfigured as RY BY pin See Hardware End of Write Detection on page 12 for details Chip Enable The device is enabled by a high to low transition on CE CE must remain low for the duration of any command sequence Write Protect The Write Protect WP pin is used to enable disable BPL bit in the status register Hold To temporarily stop serial communication with SPI flash memory without resetting the device Power Supply To provide power supply voltage 2 7 3 6V for SST25VFO80B Ground T1 0 1296 2006 Silicon Storage Technology Inc 14 3 571296 01 000 1 06 AVR347 harman kardon Technology Sil 9031 HDMI PanelLink Cinema
193. R637 i 51601 e e e e e e 51601 18 1 4W AVR145 132 144 1 8K 18 1 4W EXCEPT AVR145 1 AVR146 147 4 W usssscsesesesuseem mro pe a ac Ae ses eres ol ee ne aia I gt HE h F AVR14 6 1 a Ree E L 3 AVR245 345 E 2 1 6 agn 0912 11 1 51616 AVR247 347 eve d A1271Y A1271Y 11 Ls iS vec R921 R922 C924 01 I ats H 6821 FS SIG30 1 e e Sido 1 4W 11 15V 1 18 1 4W 18 1 4W H 1 FR H 1 1 322 2S5 228 28 228 R924 Fusible R925 R702 2 P 5 5 2 2258 825 528 252 e OVER 1 295 2 25 25 259 OVER E 155153 1 scs 4 i PME ad aos 47K 47K 15V fay sicos 49 51508 2225 222 aLa D R m rer E fp WE 2 Bi EY u BTS 2 33 sox 470 680P WW 0872 825 FANH vi 1SS133M SL R703 470 680 Q816 52x Q503 ese i A12686R A1268GR Q876 eee 1 A1268GR 2502390 1 R934 0916 ot SIG13 A gt ffe 0915 11 dis e 2502390 e e C2785Y 1SS133M 28 sen s s c as Cle sce the p Hu Li 855 8 SB 0812 RB05 Q801 5254229 238 R673
194. RANS POWER CLT5W027ZU 1 37 FRONT PCB ASS Y COP11910D 1 37 1 FIPPCB 1 37 2 KEY PCB 1 37 3 POWER LED 1 37 4 MOMS PCB 1 37 5 PHONE PCB 1 37 6 VOLUME PCB 1 DESCRIPTION PARTS NO Q ty 37 7 RS232 PCB 1 SCREW CTB3 8JFC 13 37 8 GUIDE PCB CARD CABLE 1 SCREW CTB3 10GR 31 38 MAIN PCB ASS Y COP11911D 1 38 1 MAIN PCB 1 SCREW CTW3 8JR 9 38 2 GUIDE PCB CARD CABLE 1 SCREW CTB3 8JR 10 SCREW CTW3412JR 3 39 INPUT PCB ASS Y COP119113D 1 SCREW 4 6 6 1 39 2 ipod PCB 1 SCREW CTB3 10GFZR 22 393 A BUS PCB 7 SCREW TRANS CHD1A023R 4 39 4 XM PCB 1 SCREW CTB3 6JR 19 39 6 REGULATOR PCB C 1 SCREW 2 40 POWER ASS Y COP11916D SCREW CTB3 10JRR 3 40 1 DIGITAL IN OUT PCB 1 SCREW CTB3 8FFZR 8 40 2 REGULATOR PCB A 7 SCREW SPECIAL CHD1A012R 21 40 3 TRANS PCB 1 SCREW SPECIAL CHD1A012ZR 2 s SS SCREW SPECIAL CHD3A012R 4 41 VIDEO PCB ASS Y COP11918D 1 SCREW SPECIAL CHD4A012R 5 42 HUDSON PCB 55 COP11915D 1 43 TUNER MODULE CNVM9001MS0J72L 1 44 BRACKET SIDE L CMD1A555 1 45 RUBBER CHG1A309 1 46 CUSHION CHG1A160Z 1 47 BADGE ASS Y CGX1A375ZA 1 1 ORNAMENT BADGE CGX1A375M7G32 1 2 BADGEH K TOP KGB1A159Z 1 48 FAN 80 80 25mm CFNCF12825MS 2 49 BEACKET FAN A CMD1A615 1 50 SHEETREFLECTION CMZ1A120 1 51 HEAT SINK CMY2A249 1 52 RECEPTACLE AC CJJ8A006ZW 1 AVR347 DESCRIPTION PART NO
195. Receiver Data Sheet 144 AVR347 harman kardon Sil 9031 HDMI PanelLink Cinema Receiver Data Sheet Silicon Image General Description The Sil 9031 is a second generation PanelLink Cinema receiver that is compatible with the HDMI 1 1 High Definition Multimedia Interface specification DTVs plasma displays LCD TVs and projectors can now provide the highest quality protected digital audio video over a single cable Backwards compatibility with DVI 1 0 allows HDMI systems to connect to existing DVI 1 0 hosts DVD players HD set top boxes D VHS players and receivers PC The Sil 9031 is capable of receiving and outputting up to eight channel digital audio an excellent solution for A V Receivers Four industry standard 76 ports allow direct connection to high performance audio DACs DSPs up to 192kHz An S PDIF port supports up to 192 kHz audio The Sil 9031 enables A V Receivers with full HDCP Repeater support to receive decrypt and output high quality video and audio to an HDMI transmitter The Sil 9031 also comes pre programmed with HDCP keys greatly simplifying the manufacturing process lowering costs while providing the highest level of HDCP key security Silicon Image s PanelLink Cinema receivers use the latest generation of PanelLink TMDS core technology These PanelLink cores pass all HDMI compliancy tests The Sil 9031 is offered in two speed varieties Sil 9031CTU to 720 10801 5 and Sil9031
196. SCOUT NC VOUT V 4 SYOUT GND4 YOUT PBOUT NC GND3 PROUT LPFSW 114 AVR347 harman kardon NJM2566A TERMINAL FUNCTION PINNo PINNAME EQUIMALENTCIRCUT DC VOLTAGE SY V SC SDC Power save Y C MIX control CLAMP BIAS control Y Pb Pr Power save Y Pb Pr LPF control SDC control SDC control Chroma signal input Component signal Pb R input Component signal Pr B input Composite video signal input Y signal input Component signal Y G input Mote Y signal CLAMP G signal BIAS 115 AVR347 harman kardon NJM2566A Component signal Cr output Component signal Cb output Chroma signal output Component signal Y output 1 3V Y signal output Note YOUT Composite video signal output BIAS 2 5V SDCOUT V 30 SDCOUT SDC output GND 116 AVR347 harman kardon NJW1321 WIDE BAND VIDEO SWITCH WITH BUS GENERAL DESCRIPTION PACKAGE OUTLINE The NJW 1321 is a Wide Band Video Switch with BUS The NJW 1321 includes switch of 4 input 2 output and 6dB amplifier It is suitable for RGB or Y Pb and Pr signal because frequency range is 100MHz The NJW1321 includes external logic control terminals and external logic discernment terminals The NJW 1321 is suitable for PTV DTV PDP and other high quality AV systems FEATURES Operating Voltage 9 0V BUS Interface 4 input 2 output 3
197. SET SEARCH appears then use the A W Buttons until the desired bank of presets A through E appears in the upper line of the message display 2 Press the Memory Button and a line will appear next to the preset Dank letter 3 Use the Numeric Keys to enter the preset location 1 through 8 you wish to store the channel in Recording Two channel analog and digital audio signals as well as composite and S video signals are normally available at the appropriate recording outputs Thus to make a recording you need only make sure to con nect your audio or video recorder to the appropriate output jacks as described in the Installation section insert blank media and make sure the recorder is turned on and recording while the source is playing NOTES 1 Analog audio signals are not converted to digital form and digital audio signals are not converted to analog audio form However you may record a coaxial or optical digital audio source using either type of digital audio output Only POM digital audio signals are available for recording Proprietary formats such as Dolby Digital and DTS may not be recorded using the digital audio connections although if the source is connected to the AVR using the analog audio connections an analog recording may be made Component video and HDMI sources are not available for recording Please make certain that you are aware of any copyright restrictions on any material you record Unauth
198. SL SL OUT 4 e e gt 5 DAC R DACO2 10 357 10 35V 54k 10 35V 260 SSRIS 22x 395 VIDEO 151619 VIDEO2 L DAC L DACO 82 150P R210 s 151620 151621 VIDEO1 L 28748 ISIG20 VIDEO2 R BCH SUB 2 R395 100 R6IN NJW1197 i Qui suas 28 ecd 8 FUNC_MUTE2 SW OUT gt 15 151622 VIDEO1 R BCH SBR 8CHO7 9 925 259 392 1 733s 8 2 253518 ISIG23 DVD L SCH SBL BCHOS i pam equ e Ss Pise E T 1 1 eX Cane SL OUT R21 VILREC_L 161603 DAC L DACO1 BCH SR 5 exchange e exchange j ad ISIG24 DVD R BCH SL 8cH04 2 1 4 a FE oils oS x oS x 16 s lt 529 C OUT 5255 56 DAC R BCH C 5 9 8 5 80 52 3 1 929 FUNC_MUTE2 o 0 BOOTS BCH R 2 p i 4 88 C396 3921 Lu ae ier U Q 4 R311 R352 O C2874B SR OUT 35854 BCHO1 e R212 VILREC_R 19604 2222 2 6 i po o u 27 820 2 100 888 8 8 5 58 820 c Cbr A EM 19 E R312 ST E R332 i e jDAC SL ___ 4 VOLOS VOL SR A e 12 AN lt 9R QUT a D_SL e E 27k 10 35V 10 35V 5 1K 10 35V 560 oe SBL OUT E R3 VIDEOI L ISIG21 2
199. T Comm Bus External DT Comm Bus External COMM TX DIG Output Transceiver Transmit Data Transceiver Transmit Data LVTTL S T Out Out DT Comm Bus External DT Comm Bus External 15 COMM TX EN Output Transceiver Direction Out Transceiver Direction Out LVTTL S T 1 Transmit O7 Receive 19 Transmit O7 Receive S In DT Comm Bus Interna DT Comm Bus Interna COMM RX P M In Receiver Differential Positive Receiver Differential Positive LVDS int In In E DT Comm Bus Interna DT Comm Bus Interna 19 M Receiver Differential Receiver Differential LVDS in Me In Negative In Negative In DT Comm Bus Internal DT Comm Bus Internal 22 COMM TX M jOutput Transmitter Differential Transmitter Differential LVDS out Negative Out Negative Out DT Comm Bus Internal DT Comm Bus Internal 23 COMM TX P Output Transmitter Differential Transmitter Differentia LVDS out Positive Out Positive Out 26 OSC OUT Output Crystal Output Crystal Output Crystal Buffer S In Test Mode Select Factory Test Mode Select 07 Normal Oper 7 Test 0 Normal Oper LVTTL S T High Speed Data Pon Data High Speed Data Pon Data 4mA SLC Input Output In LVTTL S T HSDP_DATA S In High Speed Data Port Clock High Speed Data Port Clock Out 4mA SLC HSDP_CLE I LVTTU S HSDP EN S Out High Speed Data Port Enable High Speed Data Port Enable 4mA SLC In Output Input I
200. TH 74 SERIES 74 LAICH UP PERFORMANCE EXCEEDS 500mA JESD 17 ESD PERFORMANCE HBM gt 2000V MIL STD 883 method 3015 MM gt 200V DESCRIPTION The 74LCX74 is a low voltage CMOS DUAL D TYPE FLIP FLOP WITH PRESET AND CLEAR NON INVERTING fabricated with sub micron silicon gate and double layer metal wiring 2 technology It is ideal for low power and high speed 3 3V applications it can be interfaced to 5V signal environment for inputs PIN CONNECTION AND IEC LOGIC SYMBOLS September 2001 181 harman kardon 74LCX74 LOW VOLTAGE CMOS DUAL D TYPE FLIP FLOP WITH 5V TOLERANT INPUTS ORDER CODES PACKAGE TUBE T amp R 74LCX74M 74LCX74MTR TSSOP 74LCX74TTR A signal on the D INPUT is transferred to the Q OUTPUT during the positive going transition of the clock pulse _ CLR and PR are independent of the clock and accomplished by a low setting on the appropriate input It has same speed performance at 3 3V than 5V AC ACT family combined with a lower power consumption All inputs and outputs are equipped with protection circuits against static discharge giving them 2KV ESD immunity and transient excess voltage L11331 1 11 AVR347 harman kardon 74LCX74 INPUT AND OUTPUT EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT OUTPUT 5008981 PIN DESCRIPTION na mo neon Asynchronous Reset Direct Input Data Inputs Clock Input LOW to HIGH Edge Triggered Asynchronous Set Direct Input
201. Voltage input pin GND pin 1 2 3 Figure 6 SNT 4A Table10 Pin description Voltage detection output pin GND pin Voltage input pin 1 The NC pin is electrically open The NC pin can be connected to VDD or VSS Figure 7 205 AVR347 harman kardon ULTRA SMALL PACKAGE HIGH PRECISION VOLTAGE DETECTOR Rev 3 2 00 5 808 Series 5 80842 TO 92 Table 11 Bottom view Pin No Pin name Pin description Voltage detection output pin Voltage input pin 3 VSS GND pin 1 Figure 8 B Absolute Maximum Ratings 1 Detection Voltage Typ 1 4 V or Less Products Table 12 Ta 25 C unless otherwise specified Item V Power dissipation SC 82AB 150 mW SNT 4A 140 Operating ambient temperature 40 to 85 Storage temperature Tstg 40 to 125 Caution The absolute maximum ratings are rated values exceeding which the product could suffer physical damage These values must therefore not be exceeded under any conditions 2 Detection Voltage Typ 1 5 V or More Products Table 13 Symbol Absolute maximum ratings Power supply voltage a m Ta 25 C unless otherwise specified 2 Vss 0 3 to Vss 12 Power dissipation 1 Operating ambient temperature 40 to 85 C Storage temperature 40 to 125 Caution The absolute maximum ratings are rated values exceeding which the product could suffer physical damage These values must therefore not be exceeded under any conditions
202. a bitstream HSDP DA a synchronous clock and a framing signal EN The framing signal can be used as a gating mechanism for the clock or an interrupt source to indicate the beginning and end of the HSDP data burst In Slave mode the HSDP Interface receives HSDP DA HSDP CLK and HSDP EN from the HSDP source In Master mode the HSDP Interface transmits HSDP DA HSDP and HSDP EN 12S Inter IC Sound 12S digital audio Interface The I2S functional block receives and transmits timing and frame sensitive data The 125 interface is also referred to as the PCM interface In Slave mode the XM DT IC 125 Interface recelves the I2S digital audio from the XM Receiver chipset The XM DT IC automatically adjusts to the incoming I2S data sampling rate In Master mode the XM DT IC 12S Interface generates all required signals to drive an 125 compatible audio DAC COMM2W Two Wire Communications Interface The COMM2W functional block enables communications between two XM DT ICs The COMM 2W ts differential Time Division Duplex Interface 109 AVR347 harman kardon PRELIMINARY 14 Aug 04 User Spec XM Digital Transceiver Integrated Circuit Rev 3 Physical Description 3 1 Device Pin out x lt XMDTIC 41 125 39 LJ 125 SCLK 37 LL 125 DATA 48 C EN 45 C SAII CLK LSDP_TXRX VSS HSDP_EN VSS SC_TX_OUT VDD HSDP_CLK VDD S
203. a single supply voltage 6ch Video amplifier It includes LPF Y C MIX circuit and SDC interface LPF for the ES component signal can select SD HD The NJM25664 is suitable for DVD recorder set top box and the high quality AV systems with the SD HD output NJM2566AV FEATURES Operating Voltage 4 5 to 5 5V 6dB amplifier Internal 750 Driver Circuit 2 system drive e Internal LPF V SY SC 6 75MHz Y Pb Pr 13 5MHz Progressive 30MHz HD e Y C MIX Circuit SDC Interface 51 52 CLAMP BIAS Select Y Pb Pr RGB Power Save Circuit Bipolar Technology Package Outline SSOP32 BLOCK DIAGRAM V GND sa our b FEL 242 4 75 Q Driver 75 Q Driver 75 Q Driver Y C CLAMP LPF 51 PS2 MIX BIAS 113 AVR347 harman kardon NJM2566A CONTROL TERMINAL PARAMETER NOTE SYOUT VOUT SCOUT Power Save OFF PS1 Power Save1 SYOUT VOUT SCOUT Power Save ON SYOUT VOUT SCOUT Power Save ON YOUT PbOUT PrOUT Power Save OFF PS2 Power Save2 YOUT PbOUT PrOUT Power Save ON YOUT PbOUT PrOUT Power Save ON M C MIX ON MIX SW Y C MIX M C MIX OFF M C MIX OFF BIAS RGB C B SW CLAMP BIAS CLAMP Y Pb Pr CLAMP Y Pb Pr 30MHz LPF LPF SW LPF 13 5MHz LPF 13 5MHz LPF SDC OUT 51 SDCOUT L OPEN OV 4 3 Normal 24V 4 3 Letter box 2 1V 4 3 Letter box L OPEN 46V 16 9 Squeeze PS1 51 2 SDCOUT
204. a source Press the OSD Button to view the menu system The Input Setup menu tab will be highlighted Press the Set Button to select it and the screen shown in Figure 61 will appear Figure 61 Input Setup Menu AVR347 The first line indicates that the receiver is currently set to the DVD source Press the Set Button and then use the p to view the next source The sources will be selected in the following order Video 1 Video 2 Video 3 Video 4 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 6CH Direct 8CH Direct DMP The Bridge Tape CD TUNER and XM Pressing the lt Button selects the sources in the reverse order For each of these sources you may adjust the following settings At a minimum you should make sure that sources connected to any of the component video or digital audio inputs have the correct settings Other settings are optional and you may adjust them at a later time when you have more experience with the AVR Refer to the Table A4 worksheet in the appendix that you filled out during installation as you assign Inputs to each source TITLE You may change the display name for any source Not only does this enable you to customize your system it helps you to select the correct source device even when you have forgotten which physical connections were used Move the cursor down to the TITLE line and press the Set Button The screen shown in Figure 62 will appear Figure 62 a Source Input Use the Navigation Buttons
205. and Set Buttons on the front panel have no effect on the OSD system The OSD system consists of six main menus Input Setup Surround setup Speaker Setup Multiroom Setup Video Setup and System Setup Navigation tabs for each menu appear on the left side of the screen When you first press the OSD Button the Input Setup menu will be visi ble see Figure 48 since its tab is at the top of the screen However you must press the Set Button to select the Input Setup menu so that you can make any necessary adjustments If you wish to select another menu use the A W Buttons to highlight the tab for the desired menu and press the Set Button to select it 27 harman kardon Figure 48 OSD System When you first select a menu the first setting line will be highlighted see Figure 49 Inpu SETUP El Source DVD Figure 49 Input Setup Menu lf you wish to change that setting press the Set Button Although the setting name will remain highlighted the value will appear in blue type with arrows to the left and right indicating that you may use the lt p gt Buttons to scroll through the available values See Figure 50 When the desired value appears press the Set Button to select it Figure 50 Changing a Setting Use the A W Buttons to navigate to other settings within the menu When you have finished making all adjustments in that menu press the Button to return to the navigation tabs and then
206. ardon FRONT PANEL CONTROLS Main Power Switch This mechanical switch turns the power supply on or off It is usually left pressed in On position and cannot be turned on using the remote control otandby On Switch This electrical switch turns the receiver on for playback or leaves it in Standby mode for quick turn on using this switch or the remote control Power Indicator This LED has three possible modes When main power is turned off the LED is dark and the receiver won t respond to any button presses When main power is turned on but before the otandby On Switch is used the LED turns amber to indicate that the receiver is in Standby mode and ready to be turned on When the receiver is turned on the LED turns blue Source Select Press this button to select a source device which is a component where a playback signal originates e g DVD CD cable TV satellite or HDTV tuner oource Indicators The name of the current source input lights up The indicated input changes each time the Source Select button is pressed Volume Knob Turn this knob to raise or lower the volume which will be shown in decibels dB in the Message Display Message Display Various messages appear in this two line display in response to commands and changes in the incoming signal When the on screen display menu system OSD is in use the message OSD ON will appear to remind you to check the video display Tuner Band Press this button to sel
207. ay notice a difference in bass response depending on whether you are standing opposite the alcove or to one side of it Ezset EQ is capable of measuring the impact room characteristics and speaker placement have on each speaker s performance and of making adjustments to low frequency response to compensate While EzSet EQ 30 harman kardon is making these adjustments a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 59 will appear You may hear EzSet EQ repeat tones from various speakers a number of times as it performs the equalization EzSet EQ in progress EQ Checking Figure 59 EzSet EQ Equalization When EzSet EQ has finished running all of these tests a screen similar to the one in Figure 60 will appear You may press the Set Button and the Speaker Setup screen shown in Figure 52 will appear Select Manual Configuration to view the settings resulting from EzSet EQ The manual Speaker Setup screens are explained in the Advanced Functions section Speaker EzSet EQ successfully detected configured the speakers Individual Multiroom settings have been saved and may be Figure 60 EzSet EQ Successful Configuration Configure Sources In the Installation section you physically connected various cables between your source devices and the AVR In this section you will assign the various audio and video inputs to their sources ensuring that the AVR uses the correct connections each time you select
208. bility Uniform 4 KByte sectors Uniform 32 KByte overlay blocks Uniform 64 KByte overlay blocks e Fast Erase and Byte Program Chip Erase Time 35 ms typical Sector Block Erase Time 18 ms typical Byte Program Time 7 us typical PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SST s 25 series Serial Flash family features a four wire SPl compatible interface that allows for low pin count package which occupies less board space and ultimately lowers total system costs The SST25VFO80B devices are enhanced with improved operating frequency and even lower power consumption than the original SST25VFxxxA devices SST25VFO80B SPI serial flash memories are manufactured with SST s proprietary high performance CMOS SuperFlash technology The split gate cell design and thick oxide tunneling injector attain better reliability and manufacturability compared with alternate approaches 2006 Silicon Storage Technology Inc 571296 01 000 1 06 Data Sheet e Auto Address Increment AAI Programming Decrease total chip programming time over Byte Program operations End of Write Detection Software polling the BUSY bit in Status Register Busy Status readout on SO pin in AAI Mode Hold Pin HOLD Suspends a serial sequence to the memory without deselecting the device Write Protection WP Enables Disables the Lock Down function of the status register Software Write Protection Write protection through Block Prot
209. butes audio to many rooms throughout your home NOTE Only analog audio sources are available to the multiroom System Step Eleven Turn On the AVR 347 Two steps are required the first time you turn on the AVR 347 1 Gently press the Master Power Switch until the word OFF is no longer visible The Power Indicator above the two power switches should light up in amber indicating that the AVR is in Standby mode and is ready to be turned on See Figure 44 Normally you may leave the Master Power Switch in the ON position even when the receiver is not being used 26 harman kardon harman kardon Figure 44 Power Switches 2 here are several ways in which the AVR 347 may be turned on from otandby mode a Press the Standby On Switch on the front panel See Figure 44 b Press the Source Select Button on the front panel See Figure 45 Figure 45 Source Select Button c Using the remote press any one of these buttons AVR DVD CD TAPE The Bridge HDMI 1 2 VID1 VID2 VID3 VIDA XM AM FM or 6 8CH 5ee Figure 46 fi C F TODAS TAPE EN vios LEARN 2 r A gt Figure 46 AVR and Input Selectors NOTE Any time you press one of the Input Selectors on the remote DVD CD TAPE The Bridge HDMI 1 HDMI 2 VID1 VID2 or VIDA the remote will switch modes so t
210. changing as each speaker is measured Figure 58 EzSet EQ Speaker Size Crossover Test At the same time the overall size of the speaker s frequency range is measured the AVR will measure the crossover which is the lowest frequency each of your main speakers is capable of handling effectively in order to set the highest frequency the subwoofer should reproduce The system balances the need to ensure that all frequencies are repro duced for smooth transitions between the subwoofer and main speakers without losing any information against the need to avoid overtaxing smaller satellite speakers NOTE The crossover determined by EzSet EQ is not the same as the crossover frequency specification that appears in the speaker s manual Ezset EQ is measuring the point at which the audio signal must be passed from the main speaker to the sub woofer For an individual loudspeaker the manufacturer specifies the point or points at which the audio signal is passed from one transducer within the speaker to another Equalization EQ Many factors unique to the listening room can affect the overall sound of a home theater system For example a room con sisting of hardwood floors and large expanses of glass can sound livelier with added reverberation while a carpeted room fitted with draperies can dampen sound waves In addition the shape of the room can affect frequency response If a room has a small alcove near a doorway for example you m
211. ct a specific mode ourround Mode Indicators One or more of these icons may light up as you select different surround modes The Message Display also indicates the surround mode Analog Audio Video and Digital Audio Inputs Connect a source component that will only be used temporarily such as a camera or game console to these jacks Use only one type of audio and one type of video connection opeaker Channel Input Indicators The box icons indicate which speaker positions you have configured and the size frequency range of each speaker When a digital audio input is used letters will light inside the boxes to indicate which channels are present in the incoming signal Navigation These buttons are used together with the following five buttons to make selections Tone Mode Press this button to access the tone controls bass and treble Use the Navigation Buttons to make your selections opeaker Press this button to configure speaker sizes that is the low frequency range capability of each speaker Channel Level Adjust Press this button to set the output level for each channel so that all speakers sound equally loud at the listening position Digital Input Select Press this button to select the specific digital audio input or analog audio input you used for the current source Delay Press this button to set delay times that compensate for placing the speakers at different distances from the listening position
212. ct and strobe inputs When the STROBE input is held H level selection of data is inhibited and all the outputs become L level The SELECT decoding determines whether the A or B inputs get routed to their corresponding Y outputs An Input protection circuit ensures that 0 to 5 5V can be FT TSSOP16 P 0044 0 65 applied to the input pins without regard to the supply Weight 0 06g Typ voltage This device can be used to interface 5V to 3V systems and on two supply systems such as battery back up This circuit prevents device destruction due to mismatched supply and input voltages SELECT 1 1A 1B 1Y FEATURES e High Speed tog 4 1ns typ at 5V e Low Power Dissipation Icc 4 at Ta 25 High Noise Immunity 28 Min 2A e Power Down Protection is provided on all inputs 2B Balanced Propagation Delays txLH toHL 2Y e Wide Operating Voltage Range Vcc 2V 5 5V e Low Noise Voip 0 8V Max Pin and Function Compatible with 74ALS157 TRUTH TABLE IEC LOGIC SYMBOL TOP VIEW INPUTS ST SELECT 2 X Don t Care 980910EBA2 Q TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the aay and the reliability of its products Nevertheless semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress It is the responsibility of the buyer when utilizing TOSHIBA products
213. ctions to that source Component Video Monitor Outputs If you are using one of the Component Video Inputs and your television or video display is component video capable and if you are not connecting the HDMI output to our display you may connect these jacks to the corresponding inputs on your video display NOTES e Due to copy protection restrictions there is no output at the Component Video Monitor Outputs for copy protected sources e High resolution 1080 and 1080p video signals are not available at the HDMI Output and are downconverted to 720p for the Component Video Outputs If your source output is analog high resolution video either use the Component Video Outputs lower the output resolution of your source device or connect your source s component video outputs directly to your video display e Due to the design of some video displays analog 480p 20p component video source signals may produce artifacts when used with the AVR s analog video outputs composite S video or component video If this occurs try changing the Video Mode setting in the INPUT SETUP menu or connecting the source device s video output directly to your video display However for best results we recommend you consider upgrading to an HDMI capable video display RS 232 Serial Port This specialized connector may be used with your personal computer in case Harman Kardon offers a software upgrade for the receiver at some time in the future
214. cuit Rev Figure 2 1 below shows a basic top level diagram showing each functional block tn the XM DT device TX RX RX TX DIGL OUT RX_DIGL_IN TX Z O O COMM I F OSC IN i OSC OUT lt SLAVE_SELi gt TEST DS OCLK only 12 LRCLK 5 125 SCLK S i 25 DATA S Inter IC Sound 125 HSOP_EN S i HSDP_CLK M o 851 HSDP_DATA S i High Spd Data Port HSDP Low Spd Data Port LSDP TXRX M o 5 LSDP SAI 5 Szi SAI_DATA S i SC IN SC OUT RESET ERR IRO i COMMAND SEL Sys Ctrir CBM Bus XMDTIC Figure 2 1 XM DT Level Diagram The XM DT IC ts broken into the following functional blocks SC I F System Controller Interface The System Controller Interface transports the serial communication commands and data between the microprocessor in the user interface device and the microprocessor in the XM Digital Antenna The commands and data transported follow typically follow the XM CBM Common Bus Messaging protocol The System Controller Interface functional block consists of a full duplex asynchronous serial interface The SC I F 15 used for both the software configuration of the XM DT IC monitoring of XM DT link status and transparent communications with the SC I
215. d 175 AVR347 harman kardon NJ M2068M OP AMP NJM2068 LOW NOISE DUAL OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER GENERAL DESCRIPTION PACKAGE OUTLINE The NJM2068 is a high performance low noise dual operational amplifier This amplifier features popular pin out superior noise performance and superior total harmonic distortion This amplifier also features guaranteed noise performance with substantially higher gain bandwidth product and slew rate which far exceeds that of the 4558 type amplifier The specially designed low noise input transistors allow the NJM2068 to be used in very low noise signal processing N JW2088D BJM2060M applications such as audio preamplifiers and servo error amplifier X m FEATURES lt Operating Voltage 4V 418V x Low Total Harmonic Distortion 0 001 typ NJM2088V Low Noise Voltage FLAT JISA 0 56 xV typ e High Slew Rate 6V us typ Unity Gain Bandwidth 27MHz f 10kHz Package Outline DIP8 DMP8 SIP8 SSOP8 Bipolar Technology PIN CONFIGURATION PIN FUNCITON 1 A OUTPUT 2 A INPUT 3 4 5 B INPUT 6 7 8 B INPUT B OUTPUT eM NJW2068L NJM2060D NJM2068M NJM2068V EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT 1 2 Shown 176 AVR347 harman kardon IC 86 NJM4556A DUAL HIGH CURRENT OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER GENERAL DESCRIPTION PACKAGE OUTLINE The NJM45564 integrated circuit is high gain high output current
216. dB may be too high allowing for damage to equipment M ROOM vo sv Figure 67 Volume Controls The AVR 347 is designed to reproduce audio with a minimum amount of distortion which may lead you to think that your hearing and the equipment can handle higher volumes We urge caution with regard to volume levels AVR347 OPERATIO Mute Function To temporarily mute all soeakers and the headphones press the Mute Button on the remote See Figure 68 Any recording in progress will not be affected The MUTE message will flash in the display as a reminder To restore normal audio either press the Mute Button again or adjust the volume Turning off the AVR will also end muting POWER 00 OFF SS b SS a Figure 68 Mute Button Tone Controls You may boost or cut either the treble or the bass frequencies by up to 10dB Using the front panel controls or the remote press the Tone Mode Button once See Figure 69 This will indicate whether the tone controls are in or out of the circuitry If you wish to return the tone controls to 0 or flat response press the lt p gt Buttons A W on the remote until the TONE OUT message appears which preserves any changes you have made to the bass or treble settings for later use To reactivate your changes the tone control must again be set to TONE IN With the TONE IN message displayed press the Tone Mode Button repeatedly to access TREBLE
217. dio Input Interface The SAII Interface functional block provides a synchronous interface with hardware flow control from the Master to the Slave devices In Master mode the XM DT IC receives SAII Data and SAII Clock from the SAII source in the playback unit The Enable SAIL EN output signal 1s fed back to the SAII source to control the flow of input data based on the state of the EN signal at the Slave Device In Slave mode the XM DT IC sends SAII Data and SAII Clock to the Slave device SAII receiver and receives the signal from the receiver to control the flow of transmitted data The Master XM DT IC adapts to the incoming SAII data rate LSDP Low Speed Data Port The LSDP functional block consists of a unidirectional asynchronous serial interface harman kardon User Spec XM Digital Transceiver Integrated Circuit Rev 3 In Master mode the LSDP transmits data out of the device In Slave mode the LSDP receives data into the device This interface operates in default mode at 115200 no parity 8 data bits and stop bit HSDP High Speed Data Port Interface The HSDP Interface functional block provides a synchronous serial interface combined with framing signal from the Slave XM DT IC to the Master XM DT IC The source of the HSDP ts typically the XM receiver chipset The HSDP data 15 typically received by the Host microprocessor The HSDP signals include a serial dat
218. directional dataflow with near zero delay no added ground bounce Excellent RoN matching between channels Vcc operation 2 3V to 3 6V High bandwidth up to 500 MHz LVTTL compatible control Inputs Undershoot Clamp Diodes on all switch and control Inputs Low 1 0 capacitance 4pF typical Available in SSOP and TSSOP packages APPLICATIONS Hot swapping 10 100 Base T Ethernet LAN switch Low distortion analog switch Replaces mechanical relay ATM 25 155 switching FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM SEL1 The logois a registered trademark of Integrated Device Technology Inc INDUSTRIAL TEMPERATURE RANGE QUICKSWITCH PRODUCTS 2 5 3 3V 32 16 MUX DEMUX HIGH BANDWIDTH BUS SWITCH TEST2 133 IDTQS3VH16233 DESCRIPTION The 053 16233 witch is a 32 bit to 16 bit high bandwidth bus Switch which can multiplex or demultiplex data The QS 3VH16233 has very low ON resistance resulting in under 250ps propagation delay through the switch This device can be used as two 16 bit to 8 bit multiplexers oras 32 bitto 16 bitmultiplexer SELxinputs control data flow TESTxinputs control either one ortwo ports connection Inthe OFF and ON states the switches are 5V tolerant In the OFF state the switches offer very high impedance atthe terminals The combination of near zero propagation delay high OFF impedance and over voltage tolerance also makes the QS 3VH16233 ideal for high performance
219. dual operational amplifier capable of driving 3 70mA into 150 Q loads 10 5V output voltage and operating low supply voltage 2 Vt V 2V The NJM4556A combines many of the fetures of the popular NJM4558 as well as having the capability of driving 1500 loads In 4 NJMASSGAD NUM4556AM addition the wide band width low noise high slew rate and low distortion of the NJM4556A make it ideal for many audio telecommu nications and instrumentation applications 2 I TUS m FEATURES Operating Voltage 2V 18V High Output Current lo 70mA e Slew Rate 3V us typ N JM4556AL Gain Band Width Product 8MHz typ Package Outline DIP8 DMP8 SIP8 SSOP8 Bipolar Technology m PIN CONFIGURATION AVR347 harman kardon 4 PIN FUNCTION 1 A OUTPUT 2 A INPUT 3 A INPUT 4 V 5 B INPUT 6 B INPUT n 7 B OUTPUT NUMASSBAD NJMASS0AL 8 NJMAS56AM u NJMA556AV EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT 1 2 Shown Vt INPUT OUTPUT INPUT y 177 AVR347 harman kardon IC87 RE5VL28CATZ RESET PIN CONFIGURATION 92 SOT 89 SOT 23 5 mark side mark side PIN DESCRIPTION TO 92 SOT 23 5 BLOCK DIAGRAMS Nch Open Drain Output F 5VL A CMOS Output R 5VL 178 AVR347 Ay harman kardon 29 8000 29 8000 8 Mbit 1Mb x8 or 512Kb x16 Boot Block FEATURES SUMMARY m SUPPLY V
220. e E L 5 e co EP _ BO o J 2 e e cJ x gt s Gara e IN JO e Li 0 A s gt Ws 5 5 0 035 5 0 OieREEERE s gt xj Of 35 Qs 0 6e 2 2 90 2 2 2 29 f Raw p B s R5 2 79 9 OF Hoo Crass Gre OH ceo wpr2 Rew Sd Hios 1 ee 5 9252 55 25 EN lt 2 2 gt Af 55 E lt g 8 Diod 5 8 oT Wert ete 1522 E S ETT SE 8 ST LET II ar M R58 q x e u IF a c807 2 808 0651 5 C636 e NS gt EXCEPT AVR145 144 132 z amp VC 3 b si 5 O 2 T 4 aw ns EW n689 Gow 0802 E J802 1805 804 Oa 1805 C a m Co J704 4 ovs 1705 070 G 0 0 O 0 0 C802 w Ew 1684 N 4 28 4 02390 02590 F 2 4 5 202390 7 Te 2r 2 O 202560 A 1 5 02560 ea 1303 f 301 B1560 2 B1560 C C n 0 lt 1504 Ga Camm 05 B1647 B1647 C 508 B1647 C 210 B1647 D 08
221. e 8f ef 8 wl mx z o Ly B6 p lt JD IP 06 1 i Re 57 D_IP_D5 e RN95 TP 22 4 5 B3 0 22 04 Blue DATA b IP 03 2 fees esse 4 F D P 02 FSSEL M D IP Di igi 22 BO 2 423 SD 13 5MHZ MODE LOW ME C7 5 00 x HD 30MHZ MODE HICH D_IP_01s o Control by HUDSON lt JD_IP_D14 PERS N lt 0_1 _013 RN95 KRIS 22 G4 lt JD_IP_D12 lt 3 gt G3 ae Green DATA 95 3 52 T lt Y lt D IP 43 3VVI 1 lt _09 v IP I 1071 HVIKIC7SZOBFU RN89 gt 22 60 _ 72 MU u D_IP_D23 ae 74LCX74MTC MIS R5 D_IP_p22 see HO ee 5 x 1 pues 33 peeves HIGH OUTPUT ON LOW MUTE 22 R4 p IP D20 ee RS pene Poe lt Jam 16 i bd AKT R2 D pis THIS PORT IS USED TO MUTE AMALOG OUTPUT 1 62CLK ysyne_s2CLK R1 ca p OF TO MEET COPY PROTECT COMPLIANT HSYNC_6OCLK H_HS S 22 RO lt p IP 06 1 m JD IP HS 4 Hudson_CLK H_CLK in e lt 55 lt D IP vs lt _ RE gt gt i L O D_IP_PWR us gt HUDSON_INT1 m 2 5 5 Y ANMUX C851 gt 0 P_MUX e T 20844 A RA C849 25 CRJI0DJ12T 82 11 525 bait CVDADISBOBRT 8828 1 8VVI 1 8VVI L8VVI 1 8 3 3VVI 8 5 Ho amp _
222. e and automatic seeks frequencies with acceptable signal strength tuning mode It also toggles between stereo and mono modes when an FM station is tuned When listening to XM Radio press the Tuning Mode Button once to view the category name of the current channel Additional presses will display the artist song title and channel name Memory After you have tuned a particular radio station press this button then the numeric Keys to save that station as a radio preset For XM Radio the procedure for saving a preset is a little different To save the current channel in one of the 40 available preset locations press the Set Button repeatedly until PRESET SEARCH appears Use the A W Buttons to select a letter A through E representing one of the five banks of preset memory slots Then press the Memory Button followed by a Numeric Key 1 through 8 for the precise preset memory location you wish to save the channel in Tuning Press these buttons to tune a radio station or XM Radio channel For the AM and FM bands and depending on whether the tuning mode has been set to manual or automatic each press will either change one frequency step at a time or seek the next frequency with acceptable signal strength Direct Press this button before using the Numeric Keys to directly enter a radio station frequency AM or FM bands only Clear Press this button to clear a radio station frequency you have started to enter Preset Station
223. e 6 or 8 channel analog audio outputs on the player to the 6 8 channel analog audio inputs on the receiver in order to enjoy these discs to their fullest See Figure 25 0 00 Figure 25 6 8 Channel Analog Audio Inputs NOTE The multichannel analog audio connection is not required for DVD Audio players compliant with HDMI version 1 1 or better or HD DVD and Blu ray Disc players that decode the digital audio internally and output linear PCM signals in digital format Consult the owner s guide for your disc player for more information HDMI 1 and 2 The HDMI sources are used with devices that are capable of outputting digital audio and video through an HDMI connection such as an HD DVD or Blu ray Disc player or HDTV tuner The HDMI 1 and 2 sources are not used with any of the 2 channel analog audio or video inputs on the AVR 347 Make sure your video display is HDMI capable and for many source devices the display must be HDCP compliant High Bandwidth Digital 21 harman kardon INSTALLATION Content Protection in order to display copy protected materials If the source device is not capable of outputting digital audio via its HDMI output connect its coaxial or optical digital audio output to an available input on the AVR If the source device plays multichannel discs 6 0 DVD Audio SACD HD DVD Blu ray Disc connect its multichannel analog audio outputs to the AVR 347 s 6 8 Channel Inputs but see note above
224. e AVR was in use The physical HDMI connection is simple The connector is shaped for easy plug in see Figure 4 If your video display has a DVI input you may use an HDMI to DVI adapter not included to connect it to the AVR s HDMI Output Figure 4 HDMI Connection HDMI cable runs are usually limited to about 10 feet The AVR 347 incorporates a repeater which allows an additional 10 feet of cable between the source device and the video display fre gt If your video display or source device is not HDMI capable use one of the analog video connections composite S or component video and if available on your source device either a coaxial or optical digital audio connection Coaxial digital audio jacks are usually color coded in orange Although they look similar to analog jacks they should not be confused and you should not connect coaxial digital audio outputs to analog inputs or vice versa See Figure 5 Coaxial digital Coaxial audio cable dq Figure 5 Coaxial Digital Audio Optical digital audio connectors are often covered by a shutter to protect them from dust The shutter opens as the cable is inserted Input con nectors are color coded using a black shutter while outouts use a gray shutter See Figure 6 Optical G Optical digital ES audio cable J Figure 6 Optical Digital Audio Due to the nature of digital signals as binary bits they aren t subj
225. e S o o Resistors ___ ___ Pee 8888 CHD201J12 07 44 RES CARBON t2KOHM1 5WJ EA 221 8011 5 SEMI FIXED 220 OHM RHO615Ct00221 1 EA VR82 221 8011 SEMI 220 OHM RHO615Ct 00221 1 VR83 221 011 SEMI 220 OHM 615 100221 1 EA VR84 HVNIRA221BO IT 5 SEMI FIXED 220 OHM 015 00221 1 EA VR85 HVNIRA221BO IT RES SEMI FIXED 220 OHM RHO615Ct 00221 1 1 _ __ _____ o Miscellaneous o CES REGULATOR PCB CUP11916 5 G p isa ass he oa ce oue sov 80 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator Part Number Description y OJS _________ _ ___ _ ___ ___ _____ __ REGULATOR PCB CUP11916 5 a ELECT 1000UF 35V E C930 CCEA1VH102E CAP ELECT 1000UF 35V IC89 HVIL7805CP I C REGULATOR 5V 92 HVIL7815CP LC REGULATOR 15V L C REGULATOR 15V 1 POWER TAN TRANS PORCUPINE 3 1 1 1 _ 5 EL S Semiconductors po C C SS 2 C fC EE um 81 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator PattNumbr ty 24 2 2 POWER TAN TRANS PCB CUP11916 3 4
226. e ways see Figure 78 1 Press the Source Selector button on the front panel repeatedly until XM Radio is selected XM will only appear in the Message Display 2 Press the Tuner Band Button front panel or remote repeatedly until XM Radio is selected 3 Press the XM Radio Input Selector on the remote i o EN m ovo gum Uu 8 a XM m LEARN Figure 78 XM Radio Source Selection You should be able to tune in Channel 1 the Preview Channel to confirm that your equipment is ready for activation There are three ways to tune an XM Radio channel see Figure 75 1 Enter the channel number directly using the Numeric Keys on the remote It is not necessary to press the Direct Button first 2 Press the Tuning Buttons on the front panel or remote to scan through the channels Auto tuning mode is not available 3 The AVR 347 is capable of storing up to 40 XM Radio preset channels The presets are divided into five banks denoted by the letters A through E with eight numeric presets per bank After you have pro grammed preset stations see below you may select one by pressing the Set Button repeatedly until PRESET SEARCH appears then using the A W Buttons to change the bank A through E Use the Preset Buttons to scan through the eight numeric positions within a bank When you are able to hear Channel 1 you are ready to activate your module If y
227. ect to signal degradation the way analog signals are Therefore the quality of all digital audio connections should be the same although it is important to limit the length of the cable Whichever type of connection you choose Harman Kardon recommends that you always select the highest quality cables available within your budget AVR347 Analog Audio Analog connections require two cables one for the left channel white and one for the right channel red These two cables are often attached to each other for most of their length See Figure 7 Most sources that have digital audio jacks also have analog audio jacks although some older types of sources such as tape decks have only analog jacks For sources that are capable of both digital and analog audio you may wish to make both connections The analog audio connection is strongly recommended if you intend to use the source with the multiroom system It s required if you will be using the multiroom preamp outputs with an external amplifier to power your remote speakers as the AVR 34 75 multiroom system is not capa ble of converting the digital signal to analog format It s suggested that you also use the analog audio connections when using the surround back multirnom speaker outputs in case another two channel digital audio source is in use in the main listening area The AVR 34 is only capable of processing one PCM source at a time lf you wish to record materials from DVDs or
228. ect the tuner as the source to switch between the AM and FM bands or to select XM satellite radio Tuning Press either side of this button to tune a radio station or XM channel Tuning Mode This button toggles between manual one frequency step at a time and automatic seeks frequencies with acceptable signal strength tuning mode It also toggles between stereo and mono modes when an FM station 15 tuned When XM Radio is in use pressing this button repeatedly displays the channel name category artist and track title in the lower line of the Message Display For traffic and weather channels this button displays the city channel name local weather and local temperature Preset Stations Press this button to select a preset radio station Headphone Jack EzSet EQ Microphone Input Plug a 1 4 headphone plug into this jack for private listening This jack is also used to connect the supplied microphone before begin ning the EzSet EQ procedure described in the Initial Setup section To begin EzSet EQ plug the supplied microphone into this jack place the microphone at the listening position and follow the directions given in the SPEAKER SETUP on screen menu Surround Mode Press this button to select a surround sound e g multichannel mode group Choose from the Dolby modes DTS modes Logic modes DSP modes or Stereo modes ourround Select After you have selected the desired surround mode group press this button to sele
229. ection appear on the upper line of the semi OSD and front panel displays When The Bridge source is selected its status as CONNECTED or UNPLUGGED appears in place of the audio input selection However when a source input is retitled the audio input selection or status of The Bridge no longer appears unless you press the Digital Input selector on the remote or front panel VIDEO IN This setting reflects the video input that is assigned to the source The default assignment for all Sources is COMPOSITE except as shown In Table 5 Table 5 Default Video Inputs Source Input Default Video Input DVD Video 1 Video 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 Component 1 Component 2 Component 3 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 We recommend that you leave the setting for the HDMI sources as is For the other sources change this setting to reflect use of the Component 1 2 or 3 Video Input as appropriate If you used the composite or S video input for any source make sure this setting is COMPOSITE There is no separate selection for S video NOTE If your video display has an HDMI input then you only need to connect the AVR s HDMI Output to the display The AVR 347 transcodes analog source video signals up to 20 from composite S video or component video to the HDMI format and is also capable of upscaling the signal up to 20p to match your display s capabilities The only exception to this rule is for analog 1080i p sources which are not availab
230. ection bits in status register Temperature Range Commercial O C to 70 C Industrial 40 C to 85 C e Packages Available 8 lead SOIC 200 mils 8 contact WSON 6mm x 5mm non Pb lead free devices are RoHS compliant The SST25VFO80B devices significantly improve perfor mance and reliability while lowering power consumption The devices write Program or Erase with a single power supply of 2 7 3 6V for SST25VFO80B The total energy consumed is a function of the applied voltage current and time of application Since for any given voltage range the SuperFlash technology uses less current to program and has a shorter erase time the total energy consumed during any Erase or Program operation is less than alternative flash memory technologies The SST25VFO80B device is offered in both 8 lead SOIC 200 mils and 8 contact WSON 6mm x 5mm packages See Figure 1 for pin assignments The SST logo and SuperFlash are registered Trademarks of Silicon Storage Technology Inc These specifications are subject to change without notice AVR347 harman kardon a or 8 Mbit SPI Serial Flash SST25VF080B Data Sheet FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM SuperFlash X Decoder 2 i Address Memory Buffers and Latches Buffers Control Logic and Data Latches Serial Interface 1296 B1 0 SCK SI SO WP HOLD 2006 Silicon Storage Technology Inc 571296 01 000 1 06 142 AV
231. eeds to be delayed so that it reaches the listener at the same time as the sounds from the other speakers This preserves the clarity and directionality of surround sound presentations During the Speaker Distance test a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 5 will appear The speaker position will change as EzSet EQ measures the distance for each speaker Figure 57 EzSet EQ Speaker Distance Test NOTE The AVR 347 is also capable of setting a different type of delay called A V Sync Delay A V Sync Delay is used to compensate for lip sync problems that may occur when a video AVR347 display device or set top box causes delays while digital video signals are processed It simultaneously adds a delay to all speaker channels in the system Sync Delay is not set during EzSet EQ It may be set while watching a program as follows press the Delay Button on the remote and the first setting displayed is A V Sync Delay Press the Set Button to select it and then use the Buttons to adjust it Speaker Size his test checks the low frequency range capabilities of each of your speakers to ensure that low frequency sounds are not sent to speakers unable to reproduce them efficiently Each of the main speakers in your system will be assigned a value of Large or Small depending solely on how it handles low frequencies During the Speaker Size test a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 58 will appear with the speaker position
232. elf refresh Chip Select Command input enable or mask except CLK CKE and DQM Bank Address Select either one of banks during both RAS and CAS activity A10 Address Row Address RAO RA10 Column Address CA7 Auto precharge flag A10 Row Address Strobe Column Address Strobe Write Enable RAS CAS and WE define the operation Refer function truth table for details Rev 0 2 Aug 2003 160 AVR347 harman kardon hyuix HY57V161610E FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM 1Mx16 Synchronous DRAM Self Refresh Counter Refresh Counter 512 16 Bank 0 Refresh Interval Timer Row Decoder O O A Em O lt c Address 0 10 Auto Self Refresh Sense AMP amp I O gates Column Decoder Ref Addr 0 1 1 CLK Address CKE Register BA A11 are Latch amp Counter Overflow Burst Length gt 5 State Machine 0 gt m 2 49 e CAS Counter WE UDQM Column Decoder LDQM Sense AMP amp I O gates 512Kx16 Bank 1 Mode Register Test Mode I O Control Row Addr Latch Predecoder Rev 0 2 Aug 2003 3 161 AVR347 harman kardon HY57V161610E COMMAND TRUTH TABLE Register Set Register Set OP code
233. ellite Video 3 TV Video 4 TV HDMI 1 DVD PVR CBL SAT HDMI 2 DVD PVR CBL SAT DVD DVD CD CD CDR After you have programmed a code set to operate a device test the functions to see which ones may be missing or not operating correctly You may learn individual key codes if you have the device s original remote control by following this procedure 24 harman kardon a Place the two remotes so that their IR transmitters face each other end to end separated by about one inch See Figure 37 The AVR 347 remote s transmitter also serves as an IR receiver during the learning process Figure 37 AVR 347 and Original Remote Head to Head 0 Press the Input Selector for the device mode you wish to learn a code into and place the AVR 347 remote in Learning mode by pressing and holding the Learn Button until the Program Indicator flashes in amber then release See Figure 38 POWER j i DY TAPE 29 mm Figure 38 Learning Commands ON 28 Press the button on the AVR 347 remote you wish to program with the new code and the Program Indicator will light steadily in amber d Press and hold the button on the device s original remote whose code you wish to learn until the Program Indicator flashes in green then release it e You may program additional buttons by repeating steps c and d Press the Learn button once to
234. erve the correct polarity Figure 35 Remote Battery Compartment When using the remote remember to point the lens toward the front panel of the AVR 347 Make sure no objects such as furniture are blocking the remote s path to the receiver Bright lights fluorescent lights and plasma video displays may interfere with the remote s functioning The remote has a range of about 20 feet depending on the lighting conditions It may be used at an angle of up to 30 degrees to either side of the AVR lf the remote seems to operate intermittently or if pressing a button on the remote does not cause the AVR Selector or one of the Input selectors to light up then make sure the batteries have been inserted correctly or replace all three batteries with fresh ones step Eight Program Sources Into the Remote The AVR 347 remote not only is capable of controlling the receiver but it may also be programmed to control many brands and models of VCRs DVD players CD players cable boxes satellite receivers cassette decks and TVs as well as an iPod docked in The Bridge It may help to think of the remote as a book with pages Each page represents the button functions for a different device In order to access the functions for a particular device you first need to turn to that page that is switch the remote to that device mode This is done by pressing the AVR Button to access the codes that control the receiver or the Input Selector
235. es Oversampling Quad Speed Mode 24 Bit 8 times FIR Digital Filter SCF with High Tolerance to Clock Jitter 2nd order Analog LPF Single Ended Output Buffer Digital de emphasis for 32k 44 1k 48kHz sampling Soft mute Digital Attenuator Linear 256 steps I F format 24 Bit MSB justified 24 20 16 Bit LSB justified or 25 Master clock 256fs 384fs 512fs 768fs 1152fs Normal Speed Mode 128fs 192fs 256fs or 384fs Double Speed Mode 128fs 192fs Quad Speed Mode O THD N 94dB 0 Dynamic Range 106dB 0 Power supply 4 5 to 5 5V Very Small Package 16pin TSSOP 6 4mm x 5 0mm P S MCLK Q SMUTE CSN De emphasis Clock Wwe b Control Divider VCOM Interface e DIFO CDTI DZFL DZFR AOUTL ex Interpolator Modulator AOUTR 8X AX SCF Interpolator Modulator PDN 189 AVR347 harman kardon ASAHI KASEI AK4384 B Ordering Guide AK4384VT 40 85 C 16 TSSOP 0 65mm pitch AKD4384 Evaluation Board for AK4384 B Pin Layout PIN FUNCTION 1 MCLK I Master Clock Input Pin An external TTL clock should be input on this pin BICK Audio Serial Data Clock Pin SDTI Audio Serial Data Input Pin LRCK L R Clock Pin Power Down Mode Pin When at L the AK4384 is in the power down mode and is held in reset The AK4384 should always be reset upon power up Soft Mute Pin in parallel mode H Enable
236. ets see Figure 77 1 Tune the desired station 2 Press the Memory Button on the remote 3 Use the Numeric Keys to enter the desired preset number XM Radio Operation XM Radio is a satellite delivered service that offers hundreds of program channels as well as local traffic and weather information for select cities The AVR 347 is XM Ready which means that it is able to receive the Figure 77 Storing a Preset Station 3 harman kardon OPERATION XM service when an optional XM antenna module is connected and the service activated As of this writing the Audiovox CNP 1000 Connect and Play module for home audio use and the XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock Models CNP 2000 and CNP 2000H are compatible with the AVR 347 Additional modules may become available in the future Modules produced for automotive or mobile use are not compatible with the AVR 347 NOTE Io listen to XM Radio using the AVR 347 you will need to purchase an XM antenna module and subscription and you will need to activate your module Note that XM service is not available in Alaska or Hawaii Visit the XM Radio Web site at www xmradio com for more information Plug the module into the XM Antenna Jack on the rear of the AVR 347 Place the antenna module so that it has a clear view through a south facing window in order to obtain reception from the XM satellite oelect XM Radio as the source in one of the following thre
237. ets single boot mode When released reset Single boot mode is started at P37 Low level Port 40 VO port with pull up resistor Chip Select 0 Outputs 0 when address is within specified address area Port 41 port with pull up resistor Chip Select 1 Outputs 0 if address is within specified address area Port 42 port with pull up resistor Chip Select 2 Outputs 0 if address is within specified address area Port 43 port with pull up resistor Chip Select 3 Outputs 0 if address is within specified address area P50 P57 ADTRG Port 5 Pin used to input port Analog input Pin used to input to AD converter AD Trigger Signal used to request start of AD converter Shared with53 pin 167 AVR347 e a ey a tt Rha RENE Out yt harman kardon 22 union P60 1 Port 60 port Serial bus interface clock in SIO Mode VO Port 61 I O port 1 Output Serial bus interface send data at SIO mode Serial bus interface send recive data at bus mode 1 VO Port 62 VO port Input Serial bus interface recive data at SIO mode VO Serial bus interface clock data at bus mode Open drain output mode by programmable programmable Open drain output mode b 63 I O port INTO Input P61 SO SDA P62 SI SCL P64
238. everal different rooms or when listening to mono FM radio to individual speakers placed in different rooms Use the Tuning Mode Button to select the mono mode for FM radio The advantage of using the Multiroom Audio Outputs is the ability to have 1 channel system in the main listening area at the same time others are listening to a different source in the remote zone However the benefit is achieved at the expense of purchasing an additional component i e the amplifier Connect the remote speakers directly to the Surround Back Multiroom Speaker Outputs See Figure 41 8 Figure 41 Surround Back Multirnom Speaker Outputs lf you do not require a full 7 1 channel system in your main listening area and you prefer not to purchase an external amplifier to power pair of remote speakers you may reassign the AVR 3475 surround back amplifier channels to power the speakers Your main system will be limited to 5 1 channels which affects your ability to enjoy the many DVDs and other programs recorded in 6 1 and 1 channels AVR347 INSTALLATION 3 Connect an external amplifier to the Surround Back Multiroom Preamp Outputs See Figure 42 5 4 SB MULTI Figure 42 Surround Back Multroom Preamp Outputs This method may be used when it is more important to distribute audio to additional rooms than to have a full 7 1 channel system in the main listening area as it is still necessary to
239. ew the terminal cap until the pass through hole in the collar is revealed 2 Insert the bare end of the wire into the hole 3 Hand tighten the cap until the wire is held snugly Figure 2 Binding Post Speaker Terminals With Bare Wires Subwoofer The subwoofer is a specialized type of loudspeaker that is usually connected in a different way The subwoofer is used to play only the low frequencies bass which require much more power than the other speaker channels In order to obtain the best results most speaker manufacturers offer powered subwoofers in which the speaker contains its own amplifier on board Sometimes the subwoofer is connected to the receiver using the front left and right speaker outputs and then the front left and right speakers are connected to terminals on the subwoofer More often a line level nonamplified connection is made from the receiver s Subwoofer Output to a corresponding jack on the subwoofer as shown in Figure 3 Although the subwoofer output looks similar to the analog audio jacks used for the various components it is filtered and only allows the low frequencies to pass Don t connect this output to any other devices Although doing so won t cause any harm performance will suffer Preout Subwoofer Figure 3 Subwoofer Connecting Source Devices to the AVR The AVR 347 is designed to process audio and video input signals playing back the audio and displaying the video on a televisio
240. f your room or speakers have unusual characteristics or simply as a matter of personal preference see the Tone Controls section on page 40 for more information VIDEO MODE This setting is used only with a fully analog video path composite S video or component video It has no effect on HDMI sources and video displays Due to the design of some analog video displays and the nature of the video standard there may be timing issues with the AVR If you observe some minor video instability when using the AVR s analog video outputs try changing the Video Mode setting to Mode B If you continue to observe problems connect your source device s video output directly to the video display or consider upgrading to an HDMI capable display You are now ready to begin enjoying your new receiver 32 AVR347 Now that you have installed your system components and completed at least a basic configuration of your receiver you are ready to begin enjoying your home theater system Turning On the AVR 347 Gently press the Master Power Switch until the word OFF is no longer visi ble The Power Indicator above the two power switches should light up in amber This indicates that the AVR is in Standby mode and is ready to be turned on Normally you may leave the Master Power Switch in the ON position even when the receiver is not being used See Figure 63 harman kardon zu aes T Figure 63 Power Switches There are several ways in which the
241. harman kardon AVR347 7 X 55W 7 1 CHANNEL A V RECEIVER SERVICE MANUAL harman kardon CONTENTS ESD 2 DISASSEMBLY 43 LEAKAGE 3 UNIT EXPLODED 48 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS 4 EXPLODED VIEW PARTS LIST 49 GIS 5 AMP BIAS ADJUSTMENT 50 FRONT PANEL CONTROLS 6 BLOCK 51 REAR PANEL 8 ELECTRICAL PARTS 157 52 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS 11 PCB 5 98 2 14 SEMICONDUCTOR PINOUTS 107 0 33 5 4 209 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 41 WIRING 219 PROCESSOR 42 harman kardon Inc 250 Crossways Park Dr Woodbury New York 11797 Rev 0 6 2007 AVR347 harman kardon ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE ES DEVICES some semiconductor solid state devices can be damaged easily by static electricity Such components commonly are called Electrostatically Sensitive ES Devices Examples of typical ES devices
242. hat it will only transmit the codes programmed to operate that device In order to control the receiver press the AVR button to return the remote to AVR mode AVR347 Before you begin enjoying your new receiver a few adjustments should be made to configure the AVR 347 to match your actual system Make sure that you have connected a video display to one of the video monitor outouts on the receiver When you turn on your display and the AVR you should see a blue screen A message may appear briefly at the bottom of the screen This message is part of the on screen display system and is referred to as the semi OSD The semi OSD is activated any time you send a command to the AVR and any time the AVR detects a change in the incoming signal Semi OSD messages are overlaid on top of any video signal so that you may continue to watch your program while making adjustments to the AVR Although its possible to configure the AVR using only the remote and the semi OSD messages we recommend that you use the full screen menu system known as the full OSD Using the On Screen Menu System The full OSD system is accessed by pressing the OSD Button on the remote See Figure 47 While the full OSD system is in use it isn t possible to see any video programming In addition an OSD ON message will appear on the front panel of the receiver to remind you to use a video display Figure 47 Navigation Buttons NOTE The lt p gt
243. he Fip PCB 37 1 7 KEY PCB 37 2 REMOVAL 1 Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 2 Remove the Front Panel ASS Y referring to the previous step 2 3 Remove the Fip PCB 37 1 referring to the previous step6 4 Remove 10 screws S2 and then remove the Key PCB 37 2 8 TUNER MODULE 43 REMOVAL 1 Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 2 Disconnect the card cable between connector CON1 13P on the Tuner module 43 and connector CN13 on Input PCB 39 1 3 Remove 2 screws S8 and then remove the Tuner Module 43 9 HUDSON PCB 42 REMOVAL 1 Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 2 Disconnect connector CN80 on the HUDSON PCB 42 from the lead wire BN80 3P on the RS232 PCB 37 7 3 Remove 3 screws 515 4 Disconnect the board to board connector between and connector CN81 44P on the HUDSON PCB 42 and connector BN81 44P on VIDEO PCB 41 and then remove the HUDSON PCB 42 10 VIDEO PCB 41 REMOVAL Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 Remove the Hudson PCB 42 referring to the previous step 9 Disconnect the card cable between connector BN14 17p on the Video PCB 41 and connector CN14 on the Input PCB 39 1 Disconnect connector CN43 on the Video PCB 41 from the lead wire BN43 3P on the Regulator PCB A 40 2 Disconnect connector CN41 on the Video PCB 41 from the lead wire BN41 6P on the Vol
244. he Input PCB 39 1 from the lead wire BN10 4P on the Volume PCB 37 6 Disconnect the card cable between connector CN14 on the Input PCB 39 1 and connector BN14 17P on the Video PCB 41 Disconnect the card cable between connector CN19 on the Input PCB 39 1 and connector BN19 15P on I Pod PCB 39 2 Disconnect the card cable between connector CN21 on the input PCB 39 1 and connector BN21 7P on XM PCB 43 Disconnect the card cable between connector CN12 21p on Input PCB 39 1 and connector CN12 21p on the PCB 38 1 Disconnect the card cable between connector CN11 17p on the Input PCB 39 1 and connector CN11 on the main PCB 38 1 Disconnect the card cable between connector CN72 on the Input PCB 39 1 and connector CN72 17p on the Fip PCB 37 1 Disconnect the card cable between connector CN16 12P on the Input PCB 39 1 and connector BN16 on A BUS PCB 39 3 Remove 11 screws 58 515 and then remove the Input PCB 39 1 15 POWER TRANS 36 POWER PCB ASS Y 40 REMOVAL Jo of WD Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 Disconnect lead wire of the Power Trans 36 from connector CN91 3P on the Main PCB 38 1 Disconnect connector CN19 3P CN20 4P on TRANS PCB 40 3 from the lead wire BN19 3P BN20 4P on the Main PCB 38 1 Disconnect the lead wire BN96 8P on the Power PCB 40 4 from connector CN96 on the Regulator PCB B 40 5 Discon
245. ht side to indicate whether The Bridge is unplugged or connected If you have retitled this source then only the new name will appear in the upper line For direct access to any source press its Input Selector on the remote see Figure 65 Since the AVR 347 allows for more source input devices than the remote has buttons for some sources are required to share buttons These are the DVD and CD sources the Tape and The Bridge sources and the HDMI 1 and HDMI 2 sources The first press AVR347 of any of these three Input Selectors will select the source whose name appears on the button DVD Tape HDMI 1 as indicated by the button lighting up in red Press that Input Selector again quickly to select the source whose name appears above the button CD The Bridge or HDMI 2 and the selector will light in green to indicate that you have selected the source whose name is printed above the button The AVR 347 will switch to the audio and video inputs assigned to the source If you selected a surround mode for the source the AVR 347 will switch to that mode The source name will appear in the upper line of the front panel display If you retitled the source only the new title will appear Otherwise the audio input assigned to the source analog or one of the digital audio inputs will also appear The surround mode will be displayed on the lower line The same information will also appear on screen in the semi OSD unless yo
246. i tie r 1 1 EN C3200GR 1 5 5 gt lt 0901 o ox 1 8 52 5 2S9 252 275 5594 T 038 Boa 2 5 28 2 l R307 5 POWER_HIGH Ads C2785Y F901 4A KBA2C4000TLEZ EUR 2 5 SH BSN BSN 5551 1 5 2 AVR145 230 132 230 a 51 8 x g P FAIL 5 F901 6 34 KBA2C6300TLEZ EUR 5 PROTECT e l BN90 AVR245 230 345 230 H R910 2 ST 5V 1 94 m MOMS S W 1 H HP_MUTE2 0823 gt C3200GR PEE e e MC7805 AD AOD H a FUNC MUTE2 H 1SS133M R871 Y 5221 e RB09 e ias 1 POWER_MUTE gt esx 1 R R905 DSO lt 2 scm eme eee i REMOTE_OUT 8862 43K H 0815 1 8K NW 58 28 4 1 2 E iar TO REMOTE IN OUT B D m POWER_DOWN t E 0320088 A ea R814 4 7K 10 144003 2 85 7172 d E 54 CSS 225 eiii om nic ch e tte Rete en os rg 1 gt POWER_HIGH Sy e XY 47 1 4W BR CH I R932 C906 1255 FROM T RANS gt P M H 518 0887 i R815 10K 87 3 od i N30 4 1000 25V g 782 009 gt gt HP_MUTE1 1 BN IL 2SB1560 47 1 4W me e 2 1 e T e H ors 0825 1507 Io RES gt 58 MUTE 1 e 398 522 528 5 3 520 CY e 1902 CLT8J033ZU perc ei 0 5uH gt MULTI_MUTE1 x lt AVR347 CLT5J038ZU i EE
247. ic key When the Program LED flashes in amber enter the code 333 When the green LED goes out the remote will have been fully reset Processor Reset There may be instances when you wish to fully reset the AVR 347 to its factory defaults or the unit may behave erratically after a power surge To correct erratic behavior first try turning the Master Power Switch off and unplugging the AC power cord for at least three minutes Plug the cord back in and turn the receiver back on If this doesn t help try a system reset NOTES A system reset erases all user configurations including speaker and level settings and tuner presets After a reset you will need to reenter all of these settings e he RS 232 Reset Button on the rear panel of the AVR 347 does not perform a system reset DO NOT press the RS 232 Reset Button To reset the AVR 347 place the receiver in Standby mode press the front panel Standby On owitch so that the Power Indicator turns amber Then press and hold the front panel Tone Mode Button for at least five seconds until the RESET message appears in the display Memory If the AVR 347 is unplugged or experiences a power outage it will retain user settings for up to four weeks 42 24 25 2627 AVR347 22 28 38 37 2 G 9 4 harman kardon
248. icated in silicon gate C MOS technology It has the same high speed performance of LSTTL combined with true CMOS low power consumption As the intrnal circuit is composed of a single stage inverter it can be used in crystal oscillator All inputs are equipped with circuits against static discharge and transient excess voltage INPUT AND OUTPUT EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT Plastic Package Ceramic Package M1R Micro Package Chip Carrier ORDER CODES M54HCU04F1R M74HCU04M1R M74HCU04B1R M74HCU04C1R PIN CONNECTIONS top view NC No Internal Connection 152 AVR347 harman kardon PIN ASSIGNMENT 74HCUO4AFN 1C72 76 B LOGIC SYMBOL TRUTH TABLE 153 AVR347 harman kardon H LOW DROP OUT AND LOW NOISE VOLTAGE REGULATOR RN5RZ SERIES OUTLINE HVIRN5RZ50BA REGULATOR 5V SOT 23 5 RN5RZ PIN CONFIGURATION SOT 23 5 PIN DESCRIPTION GND Ground Pin Input Pin Output Pin No Connection Chip Enable Pin Description r VCE Input Voltage CE or CE Pin 0 3 to VIN 40 3 154 4 harman kardon la HY57V161610ETP I Vi 2 Banks x 512K x 16 Bit Synchronous DRAM DESCRIPTION THE Hynix HY57V161610E is a 16 777 216 bits CMOS Synchronous DRAM ideally suited for the main memory and graphic appli cations which require large memory density and high bandwidth HY57V161610E is organized as 2banks of 524 288x16 HY57V16161
249. ideo 1 source and the Component Video 3 input is assigned to the Video 2 source The two HDMI inputs obtain the video signal from their own inputs and may not be reassigned to another video input harman kardon Eo cS ml gt h lt a es b fi 1 j Y 7 h EV h EN M E aM bod y lf your iPod is capable of playing still images and videos it may be used as a video source However you may reassign the video input for The Bridge to another device for viewing while listening to audio files stored on the iPod All other sources default to the COMPOSITE setting meaning that they may only be used with their composite or S video inputs The AVR 347 will transcode the incoming composite or S video signal and make it available using the HDMI or component video monitor outputs enabling a single cable connection to your television NOTES e Due to copy protection restrictions there is no output at the Component Video Monitor Outputs for copy protected sources e High resolution 1080i and 1080 video signals are not able at the HDMI Output and are downconverted to 20p for the Component Video Monitor Outputs If your source outputs analog high resolution video either use the Component Video Outputs change the output resolution of your source device to 720p or connect your source s component video outpu
250. ier Remote Output IR Output NOTE To make it easier to follow the instructions throughout the manual that refer to this illustration a copy of this page may be downloaded from the Product Support section at www harmankardon com 10 AVR347 harman kardon MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS The AVR 347 remote is capable of controlling 11 devices including the AVR itself and an iPod docked in the optional The Bridge accessory During the installation process you may program the codes for each of your source components into the remote Each time you wish to use the codes for any component first press the Selector button for that component This changes the button functions to the appropriate codes for that product NOTE Several of the Input Selectors are shared between two devices The selector button will light in red when the remote is in the device mode printed on the button and it will light in green for the device mode printed above the button To switch between the two device modes press the selector twice quickly in succession The selector will remain in the last selected mode until the next time you press the selector twice quickly For example the first time you press the DVD button the button will light up in red indicating that the remote is in DVD mode If you press another selector such as the VID3 selector and then press the DVD button again the DVD button will remain red indicating the remote is still in DVD mode
251. inches 26 mm Depth 15 inches 382mm 18 1 4 inches 464mm Product Shipping Weight 30 6 Ib 13 9kg 35 6 Ib 16 2kg Depth measurement includes knobs buttons and terminal connections Height measurement includes feet and chassis All features and specifications are subject to change without notice Harman Kardon and Logic 7 are trademarks of Harman International Industries Incorporated registered in the United States and or other countries EzSet EQ Bridge and Designed to Entertain are trademarks of Harman International Industries Incorporated A BUS is a registered trademark of Leisure Tech Electronics Pty Ltd Apple iTunes and iPod are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries shuffle is a trademark of Apple Inc Audiovox is a registered trademark of Audiovox Corporation Blu ray Disc is a trademark of the Blu ray Disc Association CEA is a registered trademark of the Consumer Electronics Association Cirrus Logic is a registered trademark of Cirrus Logic Inc Dolby Pro Logic and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories DIS and DTS ES Neo 6 are registered trademarks of DTS Inc 96 24 is a trademark of DTS Inc Faroudja and DCDi by Faroudja are registered trademarks of Genesis Microchip Inc HD DVD is a trademark of the DVD Format Logo Licensing Corporation DVD HDMI is a trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC
252. ings If you don t plan on recording you may use the Component Video 2 inputs Figure 20 Video 1 A V Inputs and Outputs and Digital Audio Inputs and Outputs Remember to connect the audio and video output jacks on your recorder to the Video 1 or digital audio input jacks on the AVR and the audio and video input jacks on your recorder to the Video 1 or digital audio output jacks on the AVR NOTE It isn t possible to make recordings using component video or HDMI connections Keep this in mind as you connect other source devices that you may wish to make recordings from Video 2 Source The Video 2 source is used only for playback The AVR 347 remote control is programmed to operate many brands and models of cable and satellite television devices and we recommend connecting your cable or satellite set top box to this source Referring to Table 2 connect your set top box to the Video 2 Analog Audio inputs and to the Optical 1 Digital Audio input If possible use the Component Video 3 inputs Otherwise connect the set top box s S video or composite video output to the matching Video 2 video input see Figure 21 20 harman kardon Pr COMPONENT VIDEO Figure 21 Video 2 A V Digital Audio and Component Video Inputs Video 3 Source The Video 3 source is used for playback only The remote control is programmed to operate a TV but you may connect any audio video source device to
253. io Inputs NOTE The Video 4 Input Selector on the remote may be pro grammed to operate a television or video display only AVR347 IMPORTANT NOTE FOR MICROSOFT XBOX 360 USERS The Microsoft Xbox 360 gaming system is capable of outputting high definition 10801 and 1080 video signals using the analog component video outputs Since the AVR 347 is not capable of converting these analog component video signals to the HDMI format and downconverts them to 720p for the Component Video Outputs to view your Xbox 360 s video output either connect the Xbox s component video outputs to your video dis play or change your Xbox 3605 settings so that it outputs 20 video which the AVR 347 can then convert to the HDMI format DVD The DVD source is used for a DVD player If you have a more advanced multichannel device such as a Blu ray Disc or HD DVD player you may connect it to the DVD source or to one of the HDMI sources Referring to Table 2 connect your DVD player to the DVD Analog Audio inputs and to the Coaxial 1 Digital Audio input If possible use the Component Video 1 inputs Otherwise connect the DVD player s S video or composite video output to the matching DVD video input see Figure 24 Figure 24 DVD A V Digital Audio and Component Video Inputs lf your DVD player plays multichannel lossless discs such as SACD or DVD Audio or when an HD DVD or Blu ray Disc player is used you may also need to connect th
254. k to the front left speaker This enables Ezset EQ to compare the level of the speaker being measured to the reference level it set for the front left Speaker 29 harman kardon Figure 56 EzSet EQ Speaker Level Test If at any time the test tone is not heard from the speaker indicated on screen press the Set Button to stop EzSet EQ Turn off the AVR using the Master Power Switch and check your speaker connections Make sure all wires are connected to the correct speakers and Speaker Outputs on the AVR and that you have observed the correct polarity terminals connected to terminals and terminals connected to terminals NOTE EzSet EQ can detect only the presence of a speaker not its location within the room If your speakers are not placed reasonably close to the positions shown in the Speaker Placement Section on page 23 EzSet EQ may not be able to perform this test correctly If EZSet EQ detects only one speaker in a pair e g surround back left but no surround back right or no main speakers it will generate an error and stop If that happens check that you have placed your speakers in their correct locations and that you have wired each speaker to its Correct set of speaker terminals Speaker Distance During this test EZSet EQ measures the distance from each speaker to the listening position If the speakers are placed at different distances from the listener the sound from speakers placed closer n
255. l 1 exsvc Ph ZEN l Eu AVR345 247 347 PART AA A d 1 l x 5 H 5 4 4 45 6VC 9 2 8 H Baol i Y l g 2 Ed R770 R771 REMOTE IN 5 10 10K 1 u aSvets 52 ST pgto ES 0731 KSAN75YT H R779 0725 fe 4 10 HVDISS355T Ww 2 I 9733 ajg SC2785YT R780 e 1 1 REMOTE_OUT lt e 10K NDA 1 555 EST T_CE lt lt T_CLK 211 AVR345 347 PART CARRIE SECTION CARR OUTI R797 HVTKRA107S Q735 MULTI_IR CARR_OUT gt REMOTE_IN gt HVTKRA107S Q736 r H HVDRLS4148SR 5 6VC 88 OUT A IN GND HLZ9R005Z L705 0757 KSC2785YT 3 5VC C733 0 1 C740 100 16V A C749 100 16V R EVISION one TIC DIAG MOD AV E 345 247 34 0 ESIGN CH ECK APP ROVE DRAWING NO
256. le at the HDMI Output and are downconverted to 20 for the Component Video Outputs If your source device is a Microsoft Xbox 360 or an older set top box that outputs 10801 or higher video via component video outputs then set the source to output 720p video or connect its component video outputs to your video display If your display does not have an HDMI input but does have compo nent video inputs you only need to connect the AVR s Component Video Monitor Outputs to the display The AVR 347 transcodes com posite and S video signals to the component video format Similarly if your display s best quality video input is S video you do not need to connect the Composite Video Monitor Output to the display any composite video source signals will be converted to S video format and S video signals may be converted to composite video format if your video display is not equipped with an S video input AVR347 harman kardon INITIAL SETUP AUDIO IN By default the analog audio inputs are assigned at the factory to all sources with the following exceptions Table 6 Default Digital Audio Assignments Source Input Default Digital Audio Input DVD Coax 1 Video 2 Optical 1 HDMI 1 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 2 lf you used a digital audio connection for another source change this setting to assign the correct digital audio input to the source even if you also connected the analog audio outputs of the source to the receiver
257. les 64ms e standard 400mil 50pin TSOP II with 0 8mm of pin e Programmable Burst Length and Burst Type itch 1 2 4 8 and Full Page for Sequence Burst e inputs and outputs referenced to positive edge of system clock e Data mask function by UDQM LDQM Programmable CAS Latency 1 2 3 Clocks 1 2 4 and 8 for Interleave Burst e Internal two banks operation ORDERING INFORMATION HYSTVIGIGIOETS 61610ET 5 200MHz Luc 183MHz HY57V161610ET 6 166MHz 400mil HY57V161610ET 7 143MHz 2Banks x 512Kbits x 16 50pin TSOP HY57V161610ET 8 125MHz HY57V161610ET 10 100MHz HY57V161610ET 15 66MHz Note 1 VDD min of HY57V161610ET 5 55 is 3 15V This document is a general product description and is subject to change without notice Hynix Semiconductor does not assume any responsibility for use of circuits described No patent licenses are implied Rev 0 2 Aug 2003 1 159 AVR347 hyuix PIN CONFIGURATION A3 VDD PIN DESCRIPTION 50pin TSOP II 400mil x 825mil 0 8mm pin pitch VSS DQ15 DQ14 VSSQ DQ13 DQ12 VDDQ 0011 0010 VSSQ DQ9 DQ8 VDDQ NC UDQM CLK CKE NC A9 8 6 5 4 VSS harman kardon HY57V161610E CLK Clock The system clock input All other inputs are referenced to the SDRAM on the rising edge of CLK CKE Enable Controls internal clock signal and when deactivated the SDRAM will be one of the states among power down suspend or s
258. licate Iry to select a location with a sturdy surface finish Step One Connect the Speakers If you have not yet done so place your speakers in the listening room as described in the Speaker Placement section above Connect the center front left front right surround left surround right surround back left and surround back right loudspeakers to the corresponding speaker terminals on the AVR 347 See Figure 17 Hemember to maintain the proper polarity by always connecting the positive and negative terminals on each speaker to the positive and negative terminals on the receiver Use the Connection Color Guide on page 19 as a reference BEES o gt 773 AVR 347 mov l Figure 17 Speaker Connections NOTE If you only have one surround back speaker wait until after you have run EzSet EQ in the Initial Setup section before connecting it to the Surround Back Left speaker outputs Step Two Connect the Subwoofer Connect the Subwoofer Output on the AVR 347 to the line level input on your subwoofer See Figure 18 Consult the manufacturer s guide for the subwoofer for additional information gt Ts AVR 347 FL SL CENTER 5 O O OS O10 m pe SB MULTI Figure 18 Subwoofer Connection harman kardon Step Three Connect the Antennas Connect the FM and AM antennas to their termina
259. lly this is done using the on screen menu system as described in the Initial Setup section Navigation 4 and Set Buttons These buttons used to make selections within the on screen menu system or when accessing the functions of the four buttons surrounding this area of the remote Channel Level Speaker Setup Digital Input or Delay Digital Input Select Press this button to select the specific digital audio input or analog audio input you used for the current source Delay Press this button to set delay times that compensate for placing the speakers at different distances from the listening position or to resolve a lip sync issue that may be caused by digital video process ing This may also be done using the on screen menu system as described in the Initial Setup section Numeric Keys Use these buttons to enter radio station frequencies or to select station presets When the AM or FM band is in use press the Direct button before entering the station frequency When listening to XM Radio you may enter channel numbers without first pressing the Direct Button however use the Preset Stations selectors to access the preset stations access another bank of XM presets press the Set Button repeatedly until PRESET SEARCH appears then use the A W Buttons to select the letter of the desired bank Tuning Mode When listening to AM or FM radio this button toggles between manual one frequency step at a tim
260. log digital signal 55 16 0030 0 50 selection as well mixed signals 4051 has 8 channel configuration the 4052 has an 4 channel X 2 configuration and Weight 0 02 g typ the 4053 has a 2 channel x 3 configuration The switches for each channel are turned ON by the control pin digital signals Although the control signal logical amplitude Vcc GND is small the device can perform large amplitude Vcc VEE signal switching For example if Vcc V GND 0 V and VEE 3 V signals between 3 V and 3 V can be switched from the logical circuit using a single 3 V power supply A l input pins are equipped with a newly developed input protection circuit that avoids the need for a diode on the plus side forward side from the input to the Vcc As a result for example 5 V signals can be permitted on the inputs even when the power supply voltage to the circuits 1s off As a result of this input power protection the TC7MZ4051 4052 4053FK can be used in a variety of applications including in the system which has two power supplies and in battery backup circuits Features Low ON resistance Ron 22 typ Vcc VEE 3 V Ron 15 typ VEE 6 V e High speed tpd 3 ns typ Vcc 3 0 V e Low power dissipation ICC 4 pA max Ta 25 C Input level VIL 0 8 V max Vcc 3 V VIH 2 0 V min Vcc 3 V e Power down protection is provided on all control inputs e Pin and
261. ls If you have purchased an XM antenna module designed for connection to an XM Ready device such as the AVR 347 you may connect it now To enjoy XM Radio remember to purchase a subscription and activate your antenna module More information is available at www xmradio com See Figure 19 4 w Figure 19 Antenna Connections Step Four Connect the Source Components Use the Table A4 worksheet in the Appendix to note which connections you will use for each of your source devices For each source select a source input Video 1 Video 2 Video 3 In Table 2 we recommend connecting certain types of sources to certain source inputs to make it easier to program and use the remote control Decide which audio connections you will use If your source device has them use one of the HDMI coaxial digital or the optical digital audio connection Referring to Table 2 we recommend that you connect the DVD source to the Coaxial 1 input jack and the source designated Video 2 to the Optical 1 input jack If you are using the HDMI inputs then in most cases other audio connection is required If your source outputs video but not audio via its HDMI connection then select any available digital audio input on the AVR to use with the source If your HDMI source plays DVD Audio SACD HD DVD Blu ray Discs or another multichannel audio format connect its multichannel analog audi
262. ls and One line Mode Support e Digital Output Volume Control with Soft Ramp e Digital 15dB Input Gain Adjust for ADC e Differential Analog Architecture e Supports logic levels between 5 V and 1 8 V TXP VARX AGND LPFLT U U U RXPO RXP1 GPO1 RXP2 GPO2 General Description The CS42528 codec provides two analog to digital and eight digital to analog delta sigma converters as well as an integrat ed S PDIF receiver in a 64 pin LQFP package The CS42528 integrated S PDIF receiver supports up to eight inputs clock recovery circuitry and format auto detection The internal stereo ADC is capable of independent channel gain control for single ended or differential analog inputs All eight channels of DAC provide digital volume control and differential analog outputs The general purpose outputs may be driven high or low or mapped to a variety of DAC mute controls or ADC overflow indicators The CS42528 is ideal for audio systems requiring wide dynam ic range negligible distortion and low noise such as A V receivers DVD receivers digital speaker and automotive audio systems ORDERING INFORMATION 542528 7 10 to 70 C 64 LQFP CS42528 DQZ 40 85 C 64 LQFP CDB42528 Evaluation Board Lead Free Lead Free DGND DGND VD VD O O O O C amp U Bit WORST RXP3 GPO3 RXP4 GPO4 RXP5 GPO5 RXP6 GPO6 Clock Data Recovery Data Buffer Control S PDIF Port Decoder
263. ltage 25 92mV 5 CUP11911 MAIN PCB RC UC E ch Um 5 a E hU 5 ep ep ee ep ep ep ep VR31 VR32 VR33 VR34 VR35 VR36 VR37 DC VOLTMETER Connect to CN66 SL CN61 CEN CN64 SR CN63 FL CN65 SBL CN62 FR CN67 SBR Channel Adjufor Adjustment ___ 4 Sumound Left 25 92mv 5 6 SumoundBackLeft 25 92mV 5 34 _ 50 C CD IN TAPE IN AVR347 ALL version A BUs OUT has TUNER module ONLY AVR345 TO FUNCTION SEL MULTI OUT 177 7 TUNER CONT 22225 i A SL R Z N Zx E 1 1 1 1 SBL R 1 1 CEN SUB 1 1 I I I SEINEN PRE OUT PRE AMP PRE AMP ATT DATA CLOCK NJW119 F C2 PRE AMP 1 1 1 1 TAPE OUT o O 0 I 2 0 1 VIDEOS IN e I PRE AMP VIDE02 IN I 1 VIDEO OUT LUN 1 1 VIDEO IN 1 gt DVD IN I 1 1 1 TONO SBL MULTI L OO I DMP IN gt OO i 2 07 1 1 1 XM_RADIO gt VIDEOS IN VIDEO2 IN VIDEO1 IN VIDEO1 OUT DVD IN VIDEO3 IN VIDEO2 IN VIDEO1 IN VIDEO1 OUT DVD IN SBR MULTI R
264. m types Although more detailed information on surround modes may be found in the Advanced Functions section it is easy to select any of the modes available at a given time To select a surround mode using the front panel controls press the ourround Mode Button repeatedly until the desired group of modes is selected Logic 7 Dolby DIS DSP or Stereo Then press the Surround oelect Button repeatedly to select the desired mode within the group see Figure 84 harman kardon Figure 84 Select a Surround Mode Front Panel To select a surround mode using the remote control locate the button dedicated to the desired group of modes Logic 7 Dolby Sur DTS Sur DIS Neo 6 DSP or Stereo Press that button repeatedly to select the desired mode See Figure 85 To select a surround mode using the full DSD menu system press the OSD Button to display the Menu System Use the A W Buttons to highlight the Surround tab and press the Set Button to access the 40 harman kardon surround Setup menu as shown in Figure 86 With the Surround Mode highlighted press the Set Button to change the surround mode group Use the lt P Buttons to scroll through the options and press the Set Button when the desired mode group appears Navigate to the Mode line and follow the same procedure to select an individual mode As explained in the Advanced Functions section there are also some additional settings that may be made POWER OFF
265. master clock output from the External Clock Reference OMCK pin 59 or the PLL which is locked to the incoming S PDIF stream or CX LRCK 197 AVR347 l xE harman kardon CIRRUS LOGIC CS42528 CX_SDOUT 56 CODEC Serial Data Output Output Output for two s complement serial audio data from the internal and external ADCs ADCIN1 58 External ADC Serial Input Input The CS42528 provides for up to two external stereo analog to digital ADCIN2 5 converter inputs to provide a maximum of six channels on one serial data output line when the CS42528 is placed in One Line mode OMCK 59 External Reference Clock Input External clock reference that must be within the ranges specified in the register OMCK Frequency OMCK Fregx on page 54 SAI LRCK 60 Serial Audio Interface Left Right Clock nput Output Determines which channel Left or Right is currently active on the serial audio data line SAI SCLK 61 Serial Audio Interface Serial Clock Input Output Serial clock for the Serial Audio Interface 198 AVR347 harman kardon OUTER DIMENSIONS 10 0 E B NN 2202248 E Um mE Soldered area 4 War 4 PIN CONNECTION a 3 Notes Pu Fn Filament Pin T EL MODEL NP No Pin BENE Tap No Connection Pin HCA 18ML03 OUTER DIMENSIONS Rev 1 20 Jan 200
266. mil HY57V161610ETP 7I 143MHz 2Banks x 512Kbits x 16 50pin TSOP II Pb free HY57V161610ETP 8l 125MHz 57 161610 101 100 2 57 161610 15 66 2 Note 1 VDD min of HY57V161610ETP 51 55l is 3 15V 2 Hynix supports lead free part for each speed grade with same specification This document is a general product description and is subject to change without notice Hynix Semiconductor does not assume any responsibility for use of circuits described No patent licenses are implied Rev 0 1 Nov 2003 1 155 AVR347 hyuix PIN CONFIGURATION A3 VDD PIN DESCRIPTION 50pin TSOP II 400mil x 825mil 0 8mm pin pitch harman kardon HY57V161610ETP I VSS DQ15 DQ14 VSSQ DQ13 DQ12 VDDQ 0011 0010 VSSQ DQ9 DQ8 VDDQ NC UDQM CLK CKE NC A9 8 6 5 4 VSS CLK Clock The system clock input All other inputs are referenced to the SDRAM on the rising edge of CLK CKE Enable Controls internal clock signal and when deactivated the SDRAM will be one of the states among power down suspend or self refresh Chip Select Command input enable or mask except CLK CKE and DQM Bank Address Select either one of banks during both RAS and CAS activity A10 Address Row Address RAO RA10 Column Address CA7 Auto precharge flag A10 Row Address Strobe Column Address Strobe Write Enable RAS CAS and WE define the operation Refer function truth table
267. mments Range 2500 parts per reel April 2000 1 12 124 AVR347 harman kardon ST202E ST232bE PIN CONFIGURATION 12180 DESCRIPTION v Negative Terminal the frst Charge Pump Capacitor Cor Terminal for the second Charge Pump Capacitor Negative Terminal for the second Charge Pump Capacitor vonage Termina 0 00 07 enn eu _ Ves 2 12 4 125 AVR347 harman kardon NUU7 5 QUAD SPST ANALOG SWITCH GENERAL DESCRIPTION E PACKAGE OUTLINE The NJU 301 is a quad break before make SPST analog switch protected up to 44V operating voltage Each switch is controlled by TTL or G MOS compatible input lt NJU7301D NJU7301M FEATURES PIN CONFIGURATION High Break Down Voltage 44V Package Outline DIP DMP 16 05 Technology TRUTH TABLE Logic In Switch 0 1100 1 OFF EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT V 13 3 14 11 6 LEVEL 1 16 9 8 pre D Q0 2 15 10 7 5 V 4 Logic input threshold voltage is about V x 0 128 V When the designing enough margin is required 126 AVR347 harman kardon NJM2137 ULTRA WIDE BAND HIGH SLUE RATE DUAL OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER m GENERAL DESCRIPTION PACKAGE OUTLINE The NJM2137 is an ultra wide band high slew rate dual opera
268. mote and the time until turn off will be displayed See Figure 66 Each additional press of the Sleep Button will reduce the time until turn off by 10 minutes until the OFF setting is reached which disables the sleep timer 94 v M e Figure 66 Sleep Button When the sleep timer has been set the front panel display will automati cally dim to half brightness If you press any button on the remote or front panel the display will return to full brightness The display will dim again several seconds after your last command lf you press the Sleep Button after the timer has been set the remaining time until turn off will be displayed You may press the Sleep Button to change the time until turn off Pressing and holding the Sleep Button disable the sleep timer and the SLEEP OFF message will appear Volume Control he volume may be adjusted either by turning the knob on the front panel clockwise to increase volume or counterclockwise to decrease volume or by pressing the Volume Control Buttons on the remote see Figure 67 The volume is displayed as a negative number of decibels dB below the OdB reference point and may be changed in 0 5gB increments Unlike the volume controls on some other products OdB is the maximum volume for the AVR 347 Although it s physically possible to turn the volume to a higher level doing so may damage your hearing and your speakers For certain more dynamic audio materials even O
269. mponent Video 3 inputs Any HDMI capable source devices should be connected to one of the two HDMI inputs All other source devices should be connected to either the component S or composite video input for that source However you may make whatever video connections are best for your system harman kardon INSTALLATION NOTE It s possible for a source to use none of the connections named for that source For example you might connect your DVD player to the Component Video 1 inputs and the Coax 1 digital audio input However we will refer to this source as DVD and in the Initial Setup section you will program the receiver so that these connections are assigned to the DVD source When you select DVD as your source using the front panel or the remote the correct connections for your DVD player will be used We recommend connecting your various sources using the connections shown in Table 2 below in order to simplity programming your receiver and remote control However you may connect any device to any source input Table 2 Recommended Source Component Connections Source Device Type AVR 347 Source Input Audio Connections Video Connections device only when used a source e Any one available coaxial or optical digital audio input VCR DVR PVR Video 1 e Video 1 Analog inputs and outputs e One of Component Video 2 Video 1 S video TiVo or other and or Video 1 Composite Video Input audi
270. n LVTTL S T S In 2S Digital Audio Port Oul 4mA SLC I28 DATA 2S Digital Port Data In Oul In LVTTI S T 36 37 ymai 111 AVR347 harman kardon PRELIMINARY 14 Aug 04 User Spec XM Digital Transceiver Integrated Circuit Rev 3 Pin Function Function in Slave Mode in Master Mode 2S Digita Audio Port Bit 25 Digita Audio Port Bit 4mA SLC ai d Clock In Clock Out In LVTTL S T DS LRCLK 12S Digital Audio Port 12S Digital Audio Port Out 4mA SLC M Out LefUVRight Clock In LefURight Clock In LVTTL S T eee 2S Digital Audio Port 4mA SLC 2 Oversample Clock M Out hint iced camera Oversample Clock Out S Out Oul 4mA SLC SAII SAII Port Clock Output SAII Port Clock Input 13V S T 5 Out 4mA SLC DATA Port Data Output Port Data Input In LVTTL S T 43 DS OCLK S In 4mA SLC SAHI REQ SAII Port Request Input Port Request Output IneLVTTL S T Function Function a Pint PinName Type in Master Mode 4 8 17 20 27 33 40 46 T3 3V Supply Voltage 3 3V Supply Voltage 2 6 10 16 E VSS GND Digital Ground Digital Ground 44 Notes All Inputs 3 3V LVTTL compatible S T Schmitt Trigger inputs SLC Slew Rate Controller Output 112 AVR347 harman kardon NJM2566A 6CH VIDEO AMPLIFIER WITH SD HD LPF GENERAL DESCRIPTION m PACKAGE OUTLINE The NJM2566A is
271. n XM PCB 39 4 and connector CN21 on the input PCB 39 1 Disconnect the lead wire BN85 2P on the XM PCB 39 4 from connector CN85 on the Regulator PCB A 40 2 Disconnect the board to board connector between and connector CN23 on the XM PCB 39 4 and connector BN17 12P on the iPod PCB 39 2 Remove 1 screw S15 and then remove the XM PCB 39 4 13 85232 PCB 37 7 REMOVAL 1 2 3 4 5 Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 Remove the Hudson PCB 42 referring to the previous step 9 Remove the Video PCB 41 referring to the previous step 10 Disconnect the card cable between connector CN47 7P on the iPod PCB 89 2 and connector CN47 on the RS232 PCB 37 7 Remove 2 screws and then remove the RS232 PCB 37 7 14 INPUT 39 1 REMOVAL NO OF Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 Remove the Tuner module 44 referring to the previous steps Remove the Hudson PCB 42 referring to the previous step 9 Remove the Video PCB 41 referring to the previous step 10 Disconnect connector CN20 on the the Input PCB 39 1 from the lead wire BN20 5P on the Regulator PCB B 40 5 Disconnect connector CN22 on the Input PCB 39 1 from the lead wire BN22 6P on the Phone PCB 37 5 Disconnect connector CN18 on the Input PCB 39 1 from the lead wire BN18 5P on the Phone PCB 37 5 Disconnect connector CN10 on t
272. n or monitor connected to the AVR These signals originate in what are Known as source devices including your DVD player CD player DVR digital video recorder or other recorder tape deck game console cable or satellite television box or MP3 player Although the tuner is built into the AVR it also counts as a source even though no external connections are needed other than the FM and AM antennas and the XM antenna module separate connections are required for the audio and video portions of the signal except for digital HDMI connections The types of connections used depend upon what s available on the source device and for video signals the capabilities of your video display AVR347 Audio Connections There are two formats for audio connections digital and analog Digital audio signals are of higher quality and are required for listening to sources encoded with digital surround modes such as Dolby Digital and DTS There are three types of digital audio connections HDMI coaxial and optical Any one type of digital audio connection may be used for each source device but never more than one for the same source However its okay to make both analog and digital audio connections at the same time to the same source NOTE Since the AVR 347 is capable of processing the audio and video portions of most HDMI signals if your video display device has an HDMI input you may make a single HDMI connection from your HDMI 1 1 or higher
273. n the Advanced Functions section This achieves the same effect as a balance control Headphones Plug the 1 4 plug on a pair of headphones into the headphone jack on the front of the receiver for private listening See Figure 70 The first time you use the headphones the DOLBY H BP message will be displayed indicating that Dolby Headphone surround processing is in the bypass mode which delivers a conventional 2 channel signal to the headphones 6 Phones Set up MIC Figure 0 Headphone Jack Press the Surround Select Button on the front panel or the Dolby Button on the remote to switch to Dolby Headphone virtual surround processing indicated by the DOLBY H DH message Dolby Headphone delivers an enhanced sound field that emulates a 5 1 channel speaker system No other surround modes are available for the headphones Source Selection Press the front panel Source Select Button to scroll through the sources The left side of the button scrolls down the list that appears in the display the right side scrolls upward For direct access to the tuner press the Tuner Band Button which switches to the last used band and frequency See Figure 71 Figure 71 Source Select and Tuner Band Buttons NOTE The Bridge DMP HDMI 1 and HDMI 2 sources have no icon in the Source Indicators display When selected the appro priate indication will appear in the Message Display s upper line One of two messages will scroll on the rig
274. nctor NOTE 1 H HIGH Voltage Level L LOW Voltage Level X Don t Care 134 AVR347 harman kardon K SEMICONDUCTOR KIC7SZ08FU TECHNICAL DATA SILICON MONOLITHIC CMOS DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUIT 2 INPUT AND GATE FEATURES High Output Drive 24mA Typ QVcc 3V Super High Speed Operation tpp 2 7ns Typ Q Vcc 5V DO0pF Operation Voltage Range Vcctiopo71 8 5 5V en s e Supply Voltage Data Retention Vcc 1 5 5 5V L oV Tolerant Function B pil _ 12501 0 1 D 02 010 005 G 0 0 1 MAXIMUM RATINGS CHARACTERISTIC UNIT Supply Voltage Range Vcc V DC Input Voltage ViN V DC Output Voltage Input Diode Current MARKING Output Diode Current ype Name DC Output Current DC Vcc Ground Current Power Dissipation Storage Temperature Lead Temperature 10s U gt Q gt gt Q 5 z U ax 135 AVR347 harman kardon NJM2845 46 LOW DROPOUT VOLTAGE REGULATOR GENERAL DESCRIPTION PACKAGE OUTLINE The NJM2845 is low dropout voltage regulator Advanced gt Bipolar technology achieves low noise high ripple rejection and low quiescent current NJM2845 is 3 terminal type and NJM2846 is ON OFF control NJM2845DL1 NJM2846DL3 built in type These product can be selected accordi
275. nect the lead wire BN99 8P on the Power PCB 40 4 from connector CN99 on the Regulator PCB A 40 2 Disconnect connector CN81 on the Trans PCB 40 4 from the lead wire BN81 8P on the Fip PCB 37 1 Remove 4 Trans screws 59 and then remove the Power Trans 36 amp Power ASS Y 40 REMOVAL 16 REMOTE PCB ASS Y 40 7 REMOVAL 1 2 Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 Disconnect connector CN88 on the remote PCB 40 7 from the lead wire BN88 6P on the Main PCB 38 1 Remove 3screws 513 and then remove the Remote ASS Y 40 7 17 A BUS Y 39 3 REMOVAL 1 Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 2 Disconnect connector CN90 2P on the Regulator C PCB 39 6 from the lead wire BN90 on the A BUS PCB 39 3 46 AVR347 harman kardon 3 4 Disconnect the card cable between connector CN16 12P on Input PCB 39 1 and connector BN16 12P on A BUS PCB 39 3 Remove 3screws 513 and then remove the A BUS PCB ASS Y 39 3 18 MAIN PCB ASS Y 38 1 REMOVAL NOOO Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 Remove the Tuner module 43 referring to the previous steps Remove the Hudson PCB 42 referring to the previous step 9 Remove the Video PCB 41 referring to the previous step 10 Remove the iPod PCB 89 2 referring to the previous step 11 Remove the XM PCB 39 4 referring to the previo
276. ng to the applications FEATURES High Ripple Rejection 75 typ f 1kHz 3V Version Output Noise Voltage Vno 45uVrms typ Vo 3V Version Output capacitor with 2 2uF ceramic capacitor Vo22 6V Output Current lo max 800mA High Precision Output Vo 1 0 Low Dropout Voltage 0 18V typ lo 500mA ON OFF Control NJM2846 Internal Short Circuit Current Limit Internal Thermal Overload Protection Bipolar Technology Package Outline TO 252 3 NJM2845DL 1 TO 252 5 NJM2846DL3 CONFIGURATION 1 CONTROL 2 GND 2 Vin 3 Vour 3 GND 4 5 NJM2845DL1 NJM2846DL3 EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT VN Control a Thermal Protection Bandgap end Reference NJM2845DL1 NJM2846DL3 GND Ver 2005 01 20 136 AVR347 harman kardon TOSHIBA TC 4VHC157F FN FT TOSHIBA CMOS DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUIT SILICON MONOLITHIC TC74VHC157F TC74VHC157FN TC74VHC157FT Note The JEDEC SOP FN is not available in QUAD 2 CHANNEL MULTIPLEXER Japan The TC74VHC157 is an advanced high speed CMOS QUAD 2 CHANNEL MULTIPLEXER fabricated with silicon gate C2MOS technology 16 lt SEHE qu It achieves the high speed operation similar to equivalent Bipolar Schottky TTL while maintaining the CMOS low 1 power dissipation SOP16 P 300 1 27 FN SOL16 P 150 1 27 It consists of four 2 input digital multiplexers with common Weight 0 189 Weight 0 139 Typ sele
277. nput you may use a 1 8 mini plug interconnect cable not included to connect the AVR s Remote IR Output to the source device s Remote IR Input which will pass any applicable remote signals transmitted through the AVR to the source device This enables you to control your sources even when the itself is controlled via an external IR receiver Check with the manufacturer of the source device for more information on the type of IR signal expected The AVR 347 will output a stripped carrier IR signal through the Remote IR Output but a full carrier IR signal is available at the Carrier Remote IR Output To control more than one source device using the Remote IR Output connect all sources in daisy chain fashion with the AVR s Remote IR Output connected to the first device s Remote IR Input that Remote IR Output connected to the next device s Remote IR Input and so forth Connect devices expecting a full carrier IR signal to the Carrier Remote IR Output Use the Remote IR Output for devices expecting a stripped signal Step Ten Install a Multiroom System optional The AVR 347 offers several methods of distributing music to other lis tening areas in your home As indicated in the subheading installing a multiroom system is not required to enjoy the home theater experience lf you prefer not to install a multiroom system at this time skip to Step Eleven to turn on the AVR 347 and configure it 25
278. o ____ _______ ___ 52 AVR347 harman kardon Ref Designator PartNumber Description O ee FONT POR PCB ASSY CUP11910 1 CARBON xo E Miscellaneous uc C 1222 22 __ ___________ 111 _ STAND BY PCB CUP11910 3 LSS eee s F FRONTPOWERPCB CUP11910 4 Wawaman luum CN86 CJP02GA89ZM WAFER WAFER CSH1A008ZV SW PUSH MOMS MOMS SW x ee 4 12 DOWNLOAD PCB CUP11910 17 11 pu MM F 2 9P D SUB FEMALE RS 232C SEMCO RIEN PCB FRONT PANEL KEY CUP11818 2 ENEMIES __ Capacitors o o L 7 7j 5 2 42 222 e 719 HCBS1H102KBT CERAMIC 1000PF 50V K C720 HCBS1H102KBT CERAMIC 1000PF 50 721 HCBS1H102KBT CAP CERAMIC 1000PF 50 AVR347 harman kardon Pet fy _ GC t BOB FRONT PANEL KEY i uc Resistors po eS usu Miscellaneous o c 7 22 __ 9 CJPO4GB46ZY WAFER E BOB HEADPHONE o UU 54 AVR347 harman kardon Ref
279. o outputs to the AVR 347 s 6 8 Channel Inputs and connect one of its analog video outputs to a source input on the AVR 347 e g Component Video 3 or Video 3 When you select that source input e g Video 3 select the 6 8 Channel Inputs and the AVR will automatically use the analog video input NOTE The multichannel analog audio connection is not required for DVD Audio players compliant with HDMI version 1 1 or better or HD DVD and Blu ray Disc players that decode the digital audio internally and output linear PCM signals in digital format Consult the owner s guide for your disc player for more information In addition to the digital audio connections we recommend that you connect the analog audio connections for each source as a backup to the digital connections for recording for use with the multiroom system or in the event that you use all eight of the digital audio inputs for other devices For sources that dont have digital audio outputs you must use the analog audio connections AVR347 For each video source select one type of video connection HDMI video is preferred but both your source device and your video display must nave this type of video capability If either device does not then use component video S video or composite video Referring to lable 2 we recommend that you connect the DVD source to the Component Video 1 inputs the Video 1 source to the Component Video 2 inputs and the Video 2 source to the Co
280. o video recorder Any one available coaxial or optical digital e For recording use Video 1 S video or audio input with corresponding coax Composite Video Output and do not use or optical digital output component video connections at all Cable TV satellite TV Video 2 e Video 2 Analog Inputs and e One of Component Video 3 Video 2 or other e Optical 1 Input S video or Video 2 Composite Video Input device that delivers television programs TV or other audio video Video 3 e Video 3 Analog Inputs and e Video 3 S video or Video 3 Composite Video Input e Not required if source is a TV game console camera or other audio video device Video 4 front panel jacks e Video 4 Analog Inputs and e Fither Coax 3 or Optical 3 Input e Video 4 S video or Video 4 Composite Video Input e Not required if source is a TV audio input with corresponding output or optical digital output DVD Audio Video DVD e DVD Analog Inputs e Component Video 1 Input SACD HD DVD e 6 8 Channel Inputs optional and Blu ray Disc e Coax 1 Input HDMI capable DVD HDMI 1 e HDMI 1 Input e HDMI 1 Input Audio Video or HD DVD e 6 8 Channel Inputs optional player or other audio video device HDMI capable DVD HDMI 2 e HDMI 2 Input e HDMI 2 Input Audio Video or HD DVD e 6 8 Channel Inputs optional player or other audio video device CD player CD e CD Analog Inputs and e Not required e Any one available coaxial or op
281. or chapters Dim Press this button to partially or fully dim the front panel display Transport Controls These buttons have no effect on the receiver but are used to control many source components By default when the remote is operating the receiver these buttons will control a DVD player Backlight Press this button to illuminate the buttons on the remote Press it again to turn the backlight off or wait five seconds after the last button press for the light to turn off on its own AVR347 There are different types of audio and video connections used to connect the receiver to the speakers and video display and to connect the source devices to the receiver make it easier to Keep them all straight the Consumer Electronics Association CEA has established a color coding standard Table 1 may be helpful to you as a reference while you set up your system Table 1 Connection Color Guide Audio Connections Front FL FR Center C Surround SL SR Surround Back SBL SBR Subwoofer SUB Digital Audio Connections Coaxial peg Input 8 Output Optical Video Connections Component Composite S Video HDMI Connections digital audio video HDMI Types of Connections This section will briefly review different types of cables and connections that you may use to set up your system opeaker Connections opeaker cables carry an amplified signal from the receiver s speaker terminal
282. orby or ey NONE Vss CS05790 X Don t Care FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM LOGIC LEvEL BINARY TO CONVERSION 1 OF 2 DECODERS WITH OUT IN axoray OUT IN bx or by OUT IN cx or cy 1443n 4 2 10 172 AVR347 harman kardon NJM2595 5 3 OUTPUT VIDEO SWITCH GENERAL DESCRIPTION PACKAGE OUTLINE The NJM2595 is a 5 input 3 output video switch Its switches select one from five signals received from VTR TV DVD T V GAME and others The NJM2595 is designed for audio items such as AV amplifier lt 8 and others au NJM2595D NJM2595M FEATURES 5 input 3 output Operating Voltage 14 0 to 6 5V Operating current 15mAtyp at Vcc 5V Crosstalk 65dBtyp Internal 6dB Amplifier Internal 75Q Driver Bipolar Technology Package Outline DIP16 DMP16 PIN CONFIGURATION and BLOCK DIAGRAM V SW2 SW1 SW5 SW3 SW4 GND V New Japan Radio Co Ltd 173 AVR347 harman kardon NJM2595 EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT PIN No PIN INSIDE EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT AVR347 harman kardon NJM2595 EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT PIN No PIN NAME INSIDE EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT VOLTAGE Vcc B TEST CIRCUIT V Vout2 2 Vout2 1 Vout3 2 Vout3 1 O ils 75Q GL CH 75Q CL CH O Q0 0 Q 0 O 7 O 0 75Q A T 100uF Vouti 2 Voutt 1 New Japan Radio Co Lt
283. orized duplica tion of copyrighted materials is prohibited by federal law DO CO a harman kardon Using Bridge The Bridge is an optional dock that may be used with a compatible iPod not included When The Bridge is connected to its proprietary input on the AVR 347 and the iPod is docked you may play the audio video and still image materials on your iPod through your high quality audio video system operate the iPod using the AVR remote or the AVR s front panel controls view navigation messages on the front panel or a connected video display and charge the iPod Either press the front panel Source Selector repeatedly until the mes sage DMP The Bridge is CONNECTED scrolls across the front panel and appears in the semi OSD display or press the DMP Button on the remote to select The Bridge as the Input source When an is docked in The Bridge the screen shown in Figure 79 will appear on a video display connected to the AVR Navigate The Bridge s screens by using the lt P gt Buttons to highlight a line and pressing the Set Button to select the line The p gt Button scrolls down and the Button scrolls up Press the Menu Button to return to the previous level of The Bridge s menu system Remember to set the remote in The Bridge device mode by pressing the Tape The Bridge Button If it lights in red press it again quickly so that it lights in green indicating it is in The Bridge mode Figure 79
284. ou don t hear Channel 1 make sure the module s plug is firmly seated in the XM Antenna jack and that the module is near a south facing window unfolding the module and rotating it to obtain reception You may need to purchase an extension cable available on the XM Radio site to ensure that the module is near the window AVR347 Tune to Channel O for a display of your antenna module s Radio ID number required for activation The current channel number and preset location will appear in the upper line of the Message Display and the channel s name will appear in the lower line Three signal strength bars will appear to the right of the channel number and preset location Press the Tuning Mode Button repeatedly to display the category current artist or song title For traffic and weather channels the current city s name will appear instead of the channel name and pressing the Tuning Mode Button repeatedly will display the local weather and temperature Press the Set Button to search all channels Press it again to search by category using the A W Buttons to change the category and then pressing the Set Button to tune the first available channel in the new category Press the Set Button again to change the preset bank using the A W Buttons to change the bank letter Press the Set Button again to return to the all channel search To store a channel in one of the 40 preset locations 1 Press the Set Button repeatedly until PRE
285. put Determines the required signal level for the control port SCL CCLK f Serial Control Port Clock Input Serial clock for the serial control port Requires an external pull up resistor to the logic interface voltage in mode as shown in the Typical Connection Diagram SDA CDOUT 8 Serial Control Data nput Output SDA is a data line in mode requires an external pull up resistor to the logic interface voltage as shown in the Typical Connection Diagram CDOUT is the output data line for the control port interface in SPI mode AD1 CDIN 9 Address Bit 1 I2C Serial Control Data SPI nput AD1 is a chip address pin in 2 mode is the input data line for the control port interface in SPI mode 196 AVR347 harman kardon RRUS LOGIC 542528 ADO CS 10 Address Bit 0 I2C Control Port Chip Select SPI Input ADO is a chip address pin in 2 mode CS is the chip select signal in SPI mode INT 11 Interrupt Output The 542528 will generate an interrupt condition as per the Interrupt Mask register See Interrupts on page 40 for more details RST 12 Reset nput The device enters a low power mode and all internal registers are reset to their default settings when low AINR 13 Differential Right Channel Analog Input nput Signals are presented differentially to the delta sigma AINR 14 modulators via the AINR pins AINL 15 Differential Left Channel Analog Input nput
286. reliable However no responsibility is assumed by Analog Devices for its use nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties that may result from its use Specifications subject to change without notice No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of Analog Devices Trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners 183 GENERAL FEATURES Simultaneous SD HD PS SD inputs and outputs Oversampling up to 216 MHz Programmable DAC gain control Sync outputs in all modes On board voltage reference Six 11 bit precision video DACs 2 wire serial IC interface open drain configuration Dual I O supply 2 5 V 3 3 V operation Analog and digital supply 2 5 V On board PLL 64 lead LQFP package Lead Pb free product APPLICATIONS EVD players enhanced versatile disk SD PS DVD recorders players SD progressive scan HDTV display devices SD HDTV set top boxes STANDARD DEFINITION CONTROL BLOCK COLOR CONTROL BRIGHTNESS DNR GAMMA PROGRAMMABLE FILTERS SD TEST PATTERN PROGRAMMABLE RGB MATRIX oz r uz omm c o HIGH DEFINITION CONTROL BLOCK HD TEST PATTERN COLOR CONTROL TIMING ADAPTIVE FILTER CTRL GENERATOR SHARPNESS FILTER 05067 001 Figure 1 Simplified Functional Block Diagram GENERAL DESCRIPTION The ADV 7322 is a high speed digital to analog encoder on a single monolithic chip It includes six high speed video DACs
287. rom the leads of a replacement ES device touch the protective material to the chassis or circuit assembly into which the device will be installed CAUTION Be sure no power is applied to the chassis or circuit and observe all other safety precautions 8 Minimize bodily motions when handling unpackaged replacement ES devices Otherwise harmless motion such as the brushing together or your clothes fabric or the lifting of your foot from a carpeted floor can generate static electricity sufficient to damage an ES devices PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICE Each precaution in this manual should be followed during servicing Components identified with the IEC symbol A in the parts list are special significance to safety When replacing a component identified with A use only the replacement parts designated or parts with the same ratings or resistance wattage or voltage that are designated in the parts list in this manual Leakage current or resistance measurements must be made to determine that exposed parts are acceptably insulated from the supply circuit before retuming the product to the customer AVR347 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The following check should be performed for the continued protection of the customer and service technician LEAKAGE CURRENT CHECK Measure leakage current to a known earth ground water pipe conduit etc by connecting a leakage current tester between the earth ground and all exposed metal parts of the appliance input ou
288. rotect In order to prevent data corruption and inadvertent Write operations during Power up a Power On Reset POR circuit is included At Power up the internal reset is held active until Vcc has reached the Power On Reset POR threshold voltage and all operations are disabled the device will not re spond to any command In the same way when Vcc drops from the operating voltage below the Power On Reset POR threshold voltage all op erations are disabled and the device will not re spond to any command A stable and valid Vcc as defined in Table 9 and Table 10 must be applied before applying any logic signal EO E1 E2 SDA Figure 3 DIP SO TSSOP and UFDFPN Connections M24C64 M24C32 Al01845C Note See PACKAGE MECHANICAL section for package dimen sions and how to identify pin 1 4 AVR347 harman kardon TOSHIBA TC7MZ4051 4052 4053FK TOSHIBA CMOS Digital Integrated Circuit Silicon Monolithic TC7MZA4051FK TC7MZ4052FK TC7MZ4053FK TC7MZAO051FK 8 Channel Analog Multiplexer Demultiplexer TC7MZA052FK Dual 4 Channel Analog Multiplexer Demultiplexer 7 2405 Triple 2 Channel Analog Multiplexer Demultiplexer The TC7MZ4051 4052 4053FK are high speed low voltage drive analog multiplexer demultiplexers using silicon gate CMOS technology In 3 V and 5 V systems these can achieve high speed operation with the low power dissipation that 1s a feature of CMOS The TC7MZ4051 4052 4053FK offer ana
289. rray Normal Read Write Operations AT24C01A 1K SERIAL EEPROM Internally organized with 16 pages of 8 bytes each the 1K requires a 7 bit data word address for random word addressing AT24C02 2K SERIAL EEPROM Internally organized with 32 pages of 8 bytes each the 2K requires an 8 bit data word address for random word addressing AT24C04 4K SERIAL EEPROM Internally organized with 32 pages of 16 bytes each the 4K requires a 9 bit data word address for random word addressing AT24C08A 8K SERIAL EEPROM Internally organized with 64 pages of 16 bytes each the 8K requires a 10 bit data word address for random word addressing AT24C16A 16K SERIAL EEPROM Internally organized with 128 pages of 16 bytes each the 16K requires an 11 bit data word address for random word addressing AIMEL w 151 AVR347 ky SGS THOMSON MICROELECTRONICS harman kardon M54HCU04 M74HCU04 HEX INVERTER SINGLE STAGE HIGH SPEED 5 ns TYP Voc 5V LOW POWER DISSIPATION 1 MAX 25 C HIGH NOISE IMMUNITY VNiH VNiL 10 MIN OUTPUT DRIVE CAPABILITY 10 LSTTL LOADS SYMMETRICAL OUTPUT IMPEDANCE loL 4 mA MIN gz BALANCED PROPAGATION DELAYS tPHL a WIDE OPERATING VOLTAGE RANGE Vcc OPR 22V TO6 V AND FUNCTION COMPATIBLE WITH 54 74LS04 DESCRIPTION The M54 74HCU04 is a high speed CMOS HEX IN VERTER SINGLE STAGE fabr
290. s Selector Press these buttons to select a preset radio station For XM Radio first press the Set Button repeatedly until PRESET SEARCH appears and then use the A W Buttons to select the letter of the desired bank of presets Tone Mode Press this button to access the tone controls bass and treble Use the Navigation Buttons to make your selections Disc Skip This button has no effect on the receiver but is used with some optical disc changers to skip to the next disc Macros These buttons may be programmed to execute long command sequences with a single button press They are useful for programming the command to turn on or off all of your components or for accessing special ized functions for a different component than you are currently operating ourround Mode Selectors Press any of these buttons to select a type of surround sound e g multichannel mode Choose from the Dolby modes DTS modes Logic modes or Stereo modes Each press of a button will cycle to the next available variant of that mode Not all modes or mode groups are available with all sources Night Mode Press this button to activate Night mode with specially encoded Dolby Digital discs or broadcasts Night mode compresses the audio so that louder passages are reduced in volume to avoid disturbing others while dialogue remains intelligible Track Skip These buttons have no effect on the receiver but are used with many source components to change tracks
291. s compatible with your display 22 harman kardon If you used component video for any sources connect the Component Video Monitor Outputs on the receiver to one set of component video inputs on your display See Figure 31 The AVR 347 is able to transcode composite and S video sources to component video If your video dis play has component video inputs then you need only to connect the Component Video Monitor Outputs and you may proceed to Step Six Y Pb Pr Figure 31 Component Video Monitor Outputs MONITOR OUT lf you used S video for any sources connect the S video Monitor output on the receiver to an S video input on your display See Figure 32 The AVR 347 converts composite video sources to S video If your video display has S video inputs then you need only to connect the S Video Monitor Output and you may proceed to Step lf you used composite video for any sources but not component video or S video connect the Composite Video Monitor output on the receiver to a composite video input on the display See Figure 32 Figure 32 S Video and Composite Video Monitor Outputs Consult the manual for your TV to make sure you understand how to select each video input otep Six Plug in AC Power Having made all of your wiring connections it is now time to plug each component s AC power cord into a working outlet You may plug one device into the AC Switched Accessory Outlet on the rear of
292. s to each loudspeaker Speaker cables contain two wire conduc tors or leads inside plastic insulation The two conductors are usually differentiated in some way by using different colors or stripes or even by adding a ridge to the insulation Sometimes the actual wires are different one being copper colored and the other silver The differentiation is important because each speaker must be connected to the receiver s speaker output terminals using two wires one positive and one negative referred to as speaker polarity It s important to maintain the proper polarity for all speakers in the system If some speakers have their negative terminals connected to the receiver s positive terminals performance can suffer especially for the low frequencies Always connect the positive terminal on the loudspeaker which is usually colored red to the positive terminal on the receiver which is colored as shown in the Connection Color Guide Table 1 Similarly always connect the black negative terminal on the speaker to the black negative terminal on the receiver a 8 1 The AVR 347 uses binding post speaker terminals that can accept banana plugs or bare wire cables Banana plugs are simply plugged into the hole in the middle of the terminal cap See Figure 1 Figure 1 Binding Post Speaker Terminals With Banana Plugs harman kardon CONNECTIONS bare wire cables are installed as follows see Figure 2 1 Unscr
293. splay Channel Level Digital Input Tuning Mode Direct Station Entry Tuning Tone Mode Night Mode Track Skip Transport Controls 12 harman kardon Mute Power Off Input Selectors 6 8 Channel Input Selector Learn TV Video Volume Controls Multiroom speaker Setup AV lt gt Navigation Set Delay Numeric Keys Memory Clear Preset Stations Selectors Disc Skip Macros Surround Mode Selectors Dim Backlight AVR347 harman kardon MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS On Screen Display OSD Press this button to activate the on screen menu system Multiroom Press this button to control the multiroom system Three settings are available MULTI ON OFF which is used to turn the multiroom system on or MULTI LEVEL which adjusts the volume of the remote zone only and MULTI INPUT which is used to select the source input for the remote zone See Multiroom Operation in the Advanced Functions section for more information on using the AVR 3475 multirnom system Channel Level Press this button to adjust the output levels for each channel so that all speakers sound equally loud at the listening position Usually this is done while playing an audio selection such as a favorite CD after you have calibrated the levels using EzSet EQ as described in the Initial oetup section opeaker Setup Press this button to configure speaker sizes that is the low frequency capability of each speaker Usua
294. system Use the on screen menu system to configure these channels as desired Remote Infrared IR Input and Output When the remote IR receiver on the front panel is blocked such as when the AVR is placed inside a cabinet connect an optional IR receiver to the Remote IR Input jack for use with the remote control The Remote IR Output may be connected to the Remote IR Input of a compatible source device or other product to enable remote control through the AVR This is particu larly useful in multiroom applications when you wish to control the source device from the remote room when used with the Multiroom IR Input When several source devices are used connect them in daisy chain fashion Multiroom Infrared IR Input Connect a remote IR receiver located in the remote zone of a multiroom system to this jack to control the AVR and any source devices connected to the Remote IR Output from the remote zone Remote IR Carrier Output This output is similar in function to the Remote IR Output with the difference that this jack outputs the full infrared signal as received by the AVR s IR sensor or the Remote IR Input while the Remote IR Output jack outputs a stripped signal that has no carrier frequency The full signal may be required by some components with IR inputs It may also be required when you connect external IR emitters or other devices to the AVR to pass IR signals to other components Multiroom Audio Outputs Connect these
295. t for interleaved progressive scan data The LSB is set up on Pin YO Progressive Scan HDTV Input Port 4 4 4 Input Mode This port is used for the Cb Blue U data The LSB is set up on Pin CO SD or Progressive Scan HDTV Input Port for Cr Red V data in 4 4 4 input mode LSB is set up on Pin SO This input resets the on chip timing generator and sets the ADV7322 into default register setting RESET is an active low signal A 3040 resistor must be connected from this pin to AGND and is used to control the amplitudes of the DAC outputs Port Serial Interface Clock Input Port Serial Data Input Output TTL Address Input This signal sets up the LSB of the address When this pin is tied low the filter is activated which reduces noise on the I C interface Power Supply for Digital Inputs and Outputs Digital Power Supply Analog Power Supply Optional External Voltage Reference Input for DACs or Voltage Reference Output 1 235 V External Loop Filter for the Internal PLL Multifunctional Input Real time control RTC input timing reset input subcarrier reset input This input pin must be tied high for the ADV7322 to interface over the port Digital Input Output Ground Not used Tie to DGND Rev PrA Page 19 of 88 186 AVR347 SZA HIGH SPEED tpp 4 3 ns TYP at Vec 5V LOW POWER DISSIPATION Icc 2 uA at 25 m HIGH NOISE IMMUNITY Vu 28 Voc MIN
296. t the Auto Configuration setting and the screen shown in Figure 53 will appear to direct you to plug the EzSet EQ microphone into the Headphone Jack Figure 53 EzSet EQ Screen Step Four After you select Continue the screen shown in Figure 54 will appear Although the AVR 347 may be used with up to eight speakers you may have elected not to install surround back speakers at this time or you may have decided to use the surround back speaker channels to power speakers in the remote room of a multiroom system This screen directs you to program EzSet EQ for a 5 1 or 7 1 channel configura tion Select the setting that reflects the number of speakers installed in your system and EzSet EQ will do the rest automatically Figure 54 EzSet EQ Number of Speakers NOTE If you are using fewer than five main speakers in your system then it will not be possible to configure your speakers using EzSet EQ and you will need to select Manual Configuration as described in the Advanced Functions section If you have selected a 6 1 channel configuration using only a single surround back speaker it is possible to use a combination of EzSet EQ automatic configuration for 5 1 speakers connect the single AVR347 surround back speaker to the left Surround Back Speaker Output and then configure the surround back speaker manually as described in the Advanced Functions section However we do not recommend the 6 1 channel configuration
297. tal Core Data PanelLink TMDS Digital Core E Oe harman kardon Silicon Image Registers RESET INT Configuration Logic Block HDCP Keys EEPROM amp Repeater Decryption Engine EN 24 Bit Encrypted Pixel Data Control Signals Port Detect m Figure 3 Functional Block Diagram CSDA CSCL HDMI Mode Control Audio Data Decode Decrypted Pixel Data MCLKIN MCLKOUT XTALIN XTALOUT SCK ws SD 3 0 SPDIF Video Color Space Converter Up Down Sampling CLK48B Auto A V Exception MUTEOUT Handling The Sil 9031 supports two HDMI input ports Only one port may be active at any time Sil DS 0118 A 148 SCDT AVR347 harman kardon Features Low voltage and Standard voltage Operation 2 7 Vec 2 7V to 5 5V 1 8 1 8V to 5 5V Internally Organized 128 x 8 1K 256 x 8 2K 512 x 8 4K 1024 x 8 8K or 2048 x 8 16K Two wire Serial Interface Schmitt Trigger Filtered Inputs for Noise Suppression Bidirectional Data Transfer Protocol 100 kHz 1 8V and 400 kHz 2 7V 5V Compatibility Write Protect Pin for Hardware Data Protection 8 byte Page 1K 2K 16 byte Page 4K 8K 16K Write Modes Partial Page Writes Allowed Self timed Write Cycle 5 ms max High reliability Endurance 1 Million Write C
298. temal RAM and then time division multiplexes the data on a 2 wire serial communication link This link provides for the physical decoupling of the Slave and Master side of up 100 meters with software transparency XM Digital Antenna Receiver Slave Side harman kardon User Spec XM Digital Transceiver Integrated Circuit Rev 3 between the Master side processor and audio circuitry and the Slave side XM Satellite Radio receiver chip set n the Master unit X M DT Ready Radio the XM DT IC demultiplexes the received data buffers it internally and reproduces it for consumption The XM DT IC is capable of simultaneously sending and receiving serial frames while multiplexing and de multiplexing them in real tune formatting them and then routing them into the appropriate Slave or Master side interfaces The software interface between the user interface and the receiver 15 unaffected by the introduction of the XM DT IC link pair An input pin on the XM DT IC configures the part s functionality as either Master user interface end or Slave XM Digital Transceiver end allowing the same JC to be used at either end of the link XM Consumer Equipment i Receiver Audio and Interface User Interfaces Master Side Figure 1 1 Typtcal XM DT Application 107 AVR347 PRELIMINARY 14 Aug 04 2 Functional Description harman kardon User Spec XM Digital Transceiver Integrated Cir
299. the AVR 347 See Figure 33 Make sure this device draws no more than 50 watts The device should have its mechanical or master power switch turned on and it will power on any time the AVR 34 is turned on Hr 3 120 50 SWITCHED ESO 0 SA Figure 33 Switched AC Accessory Outlet Before plugging the AVR 347 s AC Power Cord into an electrical outlet make sure that the Master Power Switch on the front panel is popped out so that the word OFF appears on its top Gently press the button to turn the switch off This will prevent the possibility of damaging the AVR in case of a transient power surge The AVR 34 is equipped with a detachable power cord It allows you to fully wire your system before installing the AVR which may be required for some in wall entertainment centers or custom applications The male end of the cord should be plugged into an unswitched AC power outlet and the female end should be plugged into the receptacle on the AVR 347 s rear panel See Figure 34 AVR347 E o lt lt gt i Figure 34 AC Power Input step Seven Insert Batteries in Remote The AVR 347 remote contro uses three AAA batteries which are Included To remove the battery cover located on the back of the remote firmly press the ridged depression and slide the cover toward the top of the remote Insert the batteries as shown in Figure 35 making sure to obs
300. the play mode icon and the time remaining on the right In addition if a video display is connected to the AVR 347 a screen will appear briefly to display information about the iPod s status and the track he top line will display the play mode icon with the phrase Now Playing appearing to the right to indicate that you are viewing the status of the current track Below that the AVR displays the total number of tracks in the current playlist on the right all materials on the iPod are considered one playlist with the number of the current track on the left The song title artist and album are displayed At the bottom of the screen is a graphic bar indicating the current play position within the track with the elapsed and remaining times appearing below the bar After a period of time the screen may disappear from view The length of time is set using the Full OSD Time Out setting in the System Settings menu described in the Advanced Functions section You may restore the Now Playing screen to view by pressing either of the lt Buttons and you may then navigate the menus as explained above NOTE It is strongly recommended that you use a screen saver built into your video display to avoid possible damage from burn in that may occur with plasma and many CRT displays when a still image such as a menu screen remains on display for an extended period of time AVR347 TIC NOTES ON VIDEO PLAYBACK e Before attempting
301. tical digital audio input CDR MiniDisc Tape e Jape Analog inputs and outputs and e Not required cassette e Any one available coaxial or optical digital AVR347 INSTALLATION NOTE The AVR 347 is equipped with a total of eight digital audio Inputs not including the HDMI inputs six on the rear panel Coaxial 1 2 and 3 Optical 1 2 and 3 and two on the front panel Coaxial 4 and Optical 4 However there are a total of nine sources that may be connected to devices that have digital audio outputs We recommend certain digital audio connections simply because as reflected in Table A1 of the Appendix those digital audio inputs are assigned to those sources by default at the factory But any digital audio input except HDMI may be reassigned to any source Since you may not be using all nine source inputs you may reassign a digital audio input that is recommended for a source you aren t using to another device Table 2 is a guide you may need to make adjustments to fit your system Video 1 Source since this source includes audio and video recording output jacks it is best suited to a video recorder such as your VCR or DVR PVR Referring to Table 2 connect your recorder to the Video 1 Analog Audio inputs and outputs and to any available coaxial or optical digital audio input and corresponding digital audio output See Figure 20 Use either the Video 1 S video or composite video input and output if you wish to make record
302. tional amplifier operated from low voltage 1 35V It can apply to active filter high speed analog and digital signal processor line driver HDTV industrial measurement equipment and lt lt others S It can also apply to portable communication items because of low operating voltage and low operating current NJM2137V NJM2137 M FEATURES Operating Voltage 1 35V 6V e Ultra Wide Band 200MHz typ e High Slew rate 45V us typ Low Operating Current Ll 14m typ Bipolar Technology Package Outline SSOP8 DMP8 m PIN CONFIGURATION PIN FUNCTION A OUTPUT A INPUT B INPUT B INPUT BOUTPUT Vt SIAM NJM2137 M NJM2137V EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT 1 2 Shown Ay harman kardon M24C64 M24C32 64Kbit and 32Kbit Serial IPC Bus EEPROM FEATURES SUMMARY m Two Wire Serial Interface Supports 400kHz Protocol Single Supply Voltage 4 5 to 5 5V for M24Cxx 2 5 to 5 5V for M24Cxx W 1 8 to 5 5V for M24Cxx R Write Control Input Self Timed Programming Cycle Automatic Address Incrementing Enhanced ESD Latch Up Protection More than 40 Year Data Retention Table 1 Product List Reference Part Number M24C64 M24C64 M24C64 W M24C64 R M24C32 M24C32 M24C32 W M24C32 R January 2005 BYTE and PAGE WRITE up to 32 Bytes RANDOM and SEQUENTIAL READ Modes More than 1 Million Erase Write Cycles
303. to highlight the desired letter or other character and press the Set Button to add it to the new title which will be displayed in the bar at the top of the screen You may use the Navigation Buttons or select the left or right arrow and press the Set Button to move the cursor within the new title To add a space either move the cursor one character to the right as described above or highlight the SPACE indicator on screen and press the Set Button You may edit a title by inserting or deleting characters insert a new character between two existing characters move the cursor to highlight the character to the right of the insertion point in the bar at the top of the screen Then highlight the INS indicator on screen and press the set Button You may now select a character to insert in the new space Delete a character by moving the cursor to highlight the unwanted character in the bar at the top of the screen Then highlight the DEL indicator on screen and press the Set Button When you have finished entering the new title highlight the OK indicator and press the Set Button to return to the Input Setup menu Although the Source Input name will remain the same in the Input Setup menu the new title will appear in the semi OSD displays and the front panel display as appropriate 31 harman kardon NOTES e Only upper case letters are available for titles e Normally both the source input and the digital or analog audio input sel
304. to play videos stored on your iPod check the Video Settings menu on the iPod and make sure that the TV Out setting is set to On The TV Signal setting should be NTSC to match the capabilities of your video display Set Widescreen to On or Off depending on the aspect ratio of your video display If your selection was playing and paused at the time you changed the TV Out setting the iPod may require you to navigate its menu system and reselect the video for the new TV Out setting to take effect Resuming play from the Now Playing function may not reflect the change to the TV Out setting This is a function of the iPod not the AVR 347 e n Video mode the iPod s menus will not be visible on your video display although you may view them on the iPod s screen You may operate the iPod using the AVR remote as long as it is in The Bridge device mode You may view the AVR s on screen displays while The Bridge is in use just as you would with any other video source e The MP4 and H 264 video formats often used for videos to be played on the iPod are intended for optimal performance on the iPod s small screen Playback on larger displays may have different results selecting a Surround Mode surround mode selection can be as simple or sophisticated as your individual system and tastes Feel free to experiment with the many available surround modes on the AVR 347 and you may find a few that become your favorites for certain sources or progra
305. tput terminals screwheads metal overlays control shaft etc Plug the AC line cord of the appliance directly into a 120V AC 60Hz outlet and turn the AC power switch on Any current measured must not exceed 0 5mA not be above Leakage 0 5mA Current o9 tester Test all exposed metal surfaces Also test with plug reversed Using AC adapter plug as required Earth ground AC Leakage Test ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS OUTLINED ABOVE ARE POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD AND MUST BE CORRECTED BEFORE RETURNING THE APPLIANCE TO THE CUSTOMER Reading should INDICATIVE OF A harman kardon AVR347 harman kardon AVR 347 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Audio Section Stereo Mode Continuous Average Power FTC 70 Watts per channel 20Hz 20kHz lt 0 07 THD both channels driven into 8 ohms Seven Channel Surround Modes Power per Individual Channel Front L amp R channels 55 Watts per channel 0 0796 THD 20Hz 20kHz into 8 ohms Center channel 55 Watts lt 0 07 THD 20Hz 20kHz into 8 ohms surround L amp R Side L amp R Back channels 55 Watts per channel 0 0796 THD 20Hz 20kHz into 8 ohms Input Sensitivity Impedance Linear High Level oignal to Noise Ratio IHF A 200mV 4 7k ohms 100dB Surround System Adjacent Channel Separation Pro Logic Dolby Digital AC 3 DIS Frequency Response 1W 0dB 3dB High Instantaneous Current
306. ts directly to your video display e Due to the design of some video displays analog 480p or 20p component video source signals may produce artifacts when used with the 5 analog video outputs composite S video or component video If this occurs try changing the Video Mode setting in the INPUT SETUP menu or connecting the source device s video output directly to your video display However for best results we recommend you consider upgrad ing to an HDMI capable video display e The AVR 34 cannot convert 1080 or 1080p analog video signals to the HDMI format and downconverts them to 20p for the Component Video Outputs This affects users of Microsoft Xbox 360 systems and some older set top boxes If your digital cable television set top box outputs 1080 or higher video component video outputs and is not equipped with an HDMI output contact your cable operator for a replacement For Xbox 360 or satellite receivers with no HDMI output change the settings on your source device so that it outputs only 20p video through its component video outputs which the AVR can convert to the HDMI format Although you could connect the source device s component video outputs directly to your video display you would then have to select the correct video input the display to match the AVR s input The component video inputs may be reassigned to other source inputs as needed depending on the physical connections you made during the
307. u have set the semi OSD to OFF in the System oetup menu as described in the Advanced Functions section Audio Input Selection The AVR 347 is programmed at the factory to use the analog audio inputs for each source except for the DVD Video 2 HDMI 1 and HDMI 2 sources see lable 4 assign a digital audio input to a source if you have not done so using the Input Setup menu during Initial Setup press the Digital Button on the remote or front panel The current audio input selection will flash in the display and you may press the A W or 4 on the front panel Buttons to scroll through the audio inputs When the desired input appears press the Set Button to select it See Figure 72 Figure 72 Digital Input Selection If the Auto Poll feature is ON in the Input Setup menu and if a digital audio input has been assigned to the source the AVR 347 will first check the digital audio input for a signal If a signal is present the AVR 347 will select the digital audio input If no signal is present the AVR 34 will switch to the analog audio inputs for the source Video Input Selection When a source is selected the AVR 34 switches to a video input as follows The VIDEO IN line of the Input Setup menu indicates which of the video inputs on the AVR 34 is assigned to each source As shown in Table 5 by default the Component Video 1 input is assigned to the DVD source the Component Video 2 input is assigned to the V
308. ume PCB 37 6 Disconnect the card cable between connector CN42 on the Video PCB 41 and connector BN44 11P on the iPod PCB 39 2 Disconnect the card cable between connector BN15 15P on Video PCB 41 and connector CN15 15P on INPUT PCB 39 1 Remove 6 screws S8 and then remove the Video PCB 41 NO OF 11 iPod PCB 39 2 REMOVAL Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 Remove the Hudson PCB 42 referring to the previous step 9 Remove the Video PCB 41 referring to the previous step 10 Disconnect the card cable between connector BN19 15P on the the iPod PCB 39 2 and connector CN19 on the PCB 39 1 Disconnect the card cable between connector BN44 11P on the iPod PCB 39 2 and connector CN42 on the Video PCB 41 Disconnect the card cable between connector CN47 7P on the iPod PCB 39 2 and connector CN47 on the RS232 PCB 37 7 Disconnect the board to board connector between and connector CN23 on the XM PCB 39 4 and connector BN17 12P on the iPod PCB 39 2 8 Remove 2 screws S13 and then remove the iPod PCB 39 2 NOOO 12 XM PCB 39 4 REMOVAL 1 Remove the Top cabinet referring to the previous step 1 2 Remove the Hudson PCB 42 referring to the previous step 9 3 Remove the Video PCB 41 referring to the previous step 10 45 AVR347 harman kardon 4 5 6 Disconnect the card cable between connector BN21 7P o
309. urround Speaker Outputs Use two conductor speaker wire to connect each set of terminals to the correct speaker Remember to observe the correct polarity positive and negative connections Always connect the positive lead to the colored terminal on the receiver and the red terminal on the speaker Connect the negative lead to the black terminal on both the receiver and the speaker See the Connections section for more information on connect Ing your speakers surround Back Multiroom Speaker Outputs These speaker outputs may be used either for the surround back channels in a l channel home theater or they may be reassigned to a remote room for use with a multirnom system When these outputs are reassigned for multiroom operation only a 5 1 channel configuration will be available in the main listening room Use the on screen menu system to configure these channels as desired As with the other speaker outputs remember to observe proper polarity by connecting the positive and negative output terminals to the corre sponding terminals on each speaker Subwoofer Output If you have a powered subwoofer with a line level input connect it to this jack Preamp Outputs Connect these jacks to an external amplifier if more power is desired surround Back Multiroom Preamp Outputs These outputs may be used with an external amplifier either to power the surround back channels or to power the speakers in the remote zone of a multi channel
310. us step 12 Remove the RS232 PCB 37 7 referring to the previous step 13 Remove the Input PCB 39 1 referring to the previous step 14 Remove the A BUS PCB 39 3 referring to the previous step 17 Remove the AC Cord wire from the connector CN92 2P of the Main PCB 38 1 Disconnect the lead wire BN90 2P on the Main PCB 38 1 from connector CN86 on Moms PCB 37 4 Disconnect connector CN91 3P on the Main PCB 38 1 from lead wire of the Power Trans 36 Disconnect the lead wire BN89 2P on the Main PCB 38 1 from connector CN89 on Regulator PCB C 39 6 Disconnect the lead wire BN19 3P BN20 4P on Main PCB 38 1 from connector CN19 3P CN20 4P on TRANS PCB 40 4 Disconnect the lead wire BN88 6P on the Main PCB 38 1 from connector CN88 on remote PCB 40 7 Disconnect the lead wire of the DC FAN 49 from connector CN89 2P on the Main PCB 38 1 Disconnect the lead wire BN97 3P on the Main PCB 38 1 from connector CN97 on Regulator PCB C 39 6 Remove 11screws 513 1 54 2 S6 2EA S8 6EA and then remove the Main PCB ASS Y 38 1 47 AVR347 harman kardon
311. use the A W Buttons to select the tab for another menu We recommend that most users follow the instructions in this INITIAL SETUP section to configure a basic home theater system You may return to these menus at any time to make additional adjustments Thanks to the EzSet EQ system most of the menu adjustments may be saved until you have become more familiar with the AVR and are therefore described in the Advanced Functions section AVR347 The Initial Setup section requires that you complete all of the steps in the Installation section that apply to your receiver You should have connected all of your loudspeakers and a video display as well as your source devices You should be able to turn on the receiver and view a blue screen on your video display If necessary reread the Installation section before continuing Configure the AVR 347 Using EzSet EQ One of the most important and perhaps often overlooked aspects of setting up a home theater system is to calibrate the receiver to match the loudspeakers which enables the AVR to perform at its best Until recently most receivers required the user to perform the calibration and configuration manually a somewhat tedious process that called for a good ear or the purchase of an SPL sound pressure level meter Although you may configure the AVR 347 manually as described in the Advanced Features section we recommend that most users take advantage of our signature EzSet EQ system
312. ut Voltage Vcc OV T Storage Temperature 65 to 150 C Absolute Maximum Ratings are those values beyond which damage to the device may occur Functional operation under these conditions is CC VI lik OK not implied 1 lg absolute maximum rating must be observed 2 Vo lt GND 192 SZA HIGH SPEED tpp 5 0ns TYP at Veg 5V LOW POWER DISSIPATION log 2UA MAX at 25 COMPATIBLE WITH TTL OUTPUTS 2V MIN 0 8V MAX m 500 TRANSMISSION LINE DRIVING CAPABILITY mg SYMMETRICAL OUTPUT IMPEDANCE loi 24mA MIN g BALANCED PROPAGATION DELAYS tPLH OPERATING VOLTAGE RANGE mg PIN AND FUNCTION COMPATIBLE WITH 74 SERIES 04 IMPROVED LATCH UP IMMUNITY DESCRIPTION The 74ACT04 is an advanced high speed CMOS HEX INVERTER fabricated with sub micron silicon gate and double layer metal wiring 2 05 technology The internal circuit is composed of 3 stages including buffer output which enables high noise immunity and stable output PIN CONNECTION AND IEC LOGIC SYMBOLS July 2001 193 harman kardon 74 4 HEX INVERTER 74AGTOSTTR The device is designed to interface directly High opeed CMOS systems with TTL NMOS and CMOS output voltage levels All inputs and outputs are equipped with protection circuits against static discharge giving them 2KV ESD immunity and transient excess voltage
313. x and the brand name of your source The number s listed is are potential candidates for the correct code set for your particular device 2 on your source device 3 This step places the remote in program mode and varies slightly depending on which Input Selector is being programmed Refer to Figure 36 a DVD Tape Video 1 Video 2 Video 3 and Video 4 Sources Press and hold the Input Selector until the Program Indicator LED Starts to flash then release it Follow the directions in Step 4 below b CD Source Press the DVD CD Input Selector twice quickly so that it turns green hold it until the Program LED starts to flash then release Follow the directions in Step 4 below C HDMI 1 Source Press and hold the Input Selector until it turns red and the Program LED flashes then release it Next press the Input Selector that corresponds to the device type you want to program into the HDMI 1 mode i e DVD VCR PVR or CBL SAT Then follow the directions in Step 4 below d HDMI 2 Source Press and release the Input Selector once then quickly press the Input Selector again so that it turns green Hold it until the Program LED starts to flash then release it Next press the Input Selector that corresponds to the device type you want to program into the HDMI 2 mode i e DVD VCR PVR or CBL SAT Then follow the directions in Step 4 below AVR347 INSTALLATION 25 I 1 EA c c VID4 D NS
314. ycles Data Retention 100 Years 8 lead PDIP 8 lead JEDEC SOIC 8 lead MAP 5 lead SOT23 8 lead TSSOP and 8 ball dBGA2 Packages Die Sales Wafer Form Waffle Pack and Bumped Wafers Description Automotive Grade and Lead free Halogen free Devices Available Two wire Serial EEPROM 1K 128 8 2K 256 x 8 4K 512 x 8 8K 1024 x 8 16K 2048 x 8 The AT24C01A 02 04 08A 16A provides 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 bits of serial electrically erasable and programmable read only memory EEPROM organized as 128 256 512 1024 2048 words of 8 bits each The device is optimized for use in many industrial and commercial applications where low power and low voltage operation are essential The AT24C01A 02 04 08A 16A is available in space saving 8 lead PDIP 8 lead SOIC 8 lead MAP 5 lead SOT23 AT24C01A AT24C02 AT24C04 8 lead TSSOP and 8 ball dBGA2 packages and is accessed via a Two wire serial inter face In addition the entire family is available in 2 7V 2 7V to 5 5V and 1 8V 1 8V to 5 5V versions 8 lead TSSOP Table 1 Pin Configuration Pin Name Function Address Inputs Serial Data Serial Clock Input Write Protect Od LOBOS No Connect VCC D A0 Ground SCLI qGlA 2 Power Supply 5 0 9 Bottom View 8 lead PDIP AT24C01A AT24C02 AT24C04 AT24C08A AT24C16A 8 lead SOIC 8 lead MAP VCC WP SCL SDA AO A1 A2 GND Bottom
315. you are using a home audio XM antenna module designed for use with XM Ready home audio equipment and that the module is plugged into the XM Radio Jack on the rear panel of the receiver e The XM Antenna module needs to be placed with an unobstructed view of the southern sky or within range of an XM terrestrial repeater If necessary purchase an extension cable from your XM Radio dealer e The selector will light as you initially press it and go dark as you hold it down Wait at least 3 seconds for the selector to light up again and the Program LED will flash e Only the DVD VCR includes DVR cable or satellite CBL SAT selector devices may be assigned to the HDMI 1 or 2 selectors e Always press remote contro buttons as gently as possible Additional information on troubleshooting possible problems with your AVR 347 or installation related issues may be found in the list of Frequently Asked Questions which is located in the Product Support section of our Web site at www harmankardon com 41 AVR347 harman kardon Erasing Macros It isn t possible to edit a command within a macro However you may erase the macro as follows e Simultaneously press and hold the Mute Button and the Macro Button containing the macro until the LED flashes e Press the Surround Button to erase the macro Resetting the Remote To reset the remote to its factory defaults simultaneously press and hold any Input Selector and the 0 Numer

AVR347 - Quality & Performance

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

AVR347 - Quality &amp; Performance

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

AVR347 - Quality & Performance